Today’s News May 18, 2015

  • Falling Yield, Rising Asset

    by Keith Weiner

    Our monetary system is failing, but explaining that isn’t easy. The most popular argument is that the dollar has falling purchasing power and rising inflation. The problem with this argument is that consumer prices aren’t skyrocketing now. So, of course, people remain skeptical.

    Meanwhile, yields across all markets are falling worldwide. This causes the income generated from assets to fall. I wrote about this serious problem last time, introducing the concept of yield purchasing power—which is how much you can buy with the interest on your savings.

    Today, there is little to no interest, which forces retirees to spend down their principal. This is no accident. It’s the vision of economist John Maynard Keynes. Nearly 80 years ago, he called for the “euthanasia of the rentier,”—his pejorative term for retirees and others on fixed income. Today Federal Reserve Chair Janet Yellen calls herself a New Keynesian.

    To picture the plight of the retiree living on fixed income, let’s use the example of a poor farmer. Every year, his harvest shrinks. With a smaller and smaller crop, it’s harder and harder to live. So he commits the sin of eating some of his seed corn. Smaller plantings only accelerate the decline in his crops.

    Our paper currency causes falling productivity, though not in terms of bushels per acre. What falls is productivity per dollar or euro of savings. This is the real meaning of the falling interest rate. When the rate was 10 percent, $1,000 of principal produced $100 of return. When it falls to two percent, then the same capital generates a return of only $20. Now with the Swiss 10-year bond, CHF 1,000 earns only CHF 1.3.

    Every farmer understands a falling crop yield. However, few investors see the problem with a falling interest rate. Let’s use another farm example to help clarify. A dealer wants to buy the farmer’s tractor. He offers $10,000 for
    it. The farmer says no. Next week, he increases his offer to $11,000. Still no. The dealer keeps coming back with higher offers, until the farmer finally accepts $50,000. He can live for a year on that. Unfortunately, he’s given up
    his most important tool. Now he’s not consuming his seed corn, but his capital stock. Next year’s harvest will be even more meager.

    Bond Price vs. Interest Rate

    Falling interest forces you to spend your principal, because it starves you of return. At the same time it feels rather pleasant, because you can sell your assets at higher and higher prices. Everyone loves a bull market, because they’re all making money. Alas, the process of relentlessly higher asset prices is totally corrupt. Let’s drill down into this, because it’s the key to understanding why our system is failing.

    Normally, to make money you must first produce something. This means either working, or else putting your capital to work. Our monetary system now breaks this economic law. Falling yields and rising assets seemingly offer you a profit for doing nothing. You are not putting your capital to work, using your tractor to plant a food crop. You are consuming it, selling the tractor to pay for food. It’s not a real profit. A society cannot live by consuming previously-accumulated capital. Consumption without production is unsustainable.

    This is how our money is being devalued, debased, debauched, and destroyed. Money was once a tool to help people coordinate their production and trade. Now, it has devolved into a lever to deprive retirees of the return on their life savings.

    Forget about consumer prices. The problem is much more serious than that. We’re destroying the productivity of capital, and rewarding instead its consumption.

     

    This article is from Keith Weiner’s weekly column, called The Gold Standard, at the Swiss National Bank and Swiss Franc Blog SNBCHF.com.



  • Guest Post: Why Syriza Will Blink

    Authored by Anatole Kaletsy, originally posted at Project Syndicate,

    Once again, Greece seems to have slipped the financial noose. By drawing on its holdings in an International Monetary Fund reserve account, it was able to repay €750 million ($851 million) – ironically to the IMF itself – just as the payment was falling due.

    This brinkmanship is no accident. Since coming to power in January, the Greek government, led by Prime Minister Alexis Tsipras’s Syriza party, has believed that the threat of default – and thus of a financial crisis that might break up the euro – provides negotiating leverage to offset Greece’s lack of economic and political power. Months later, Tsipras and his finance minister, Yanis Varoufakis, an academic expert in game theory, still seem committed to this view, despite the lack of any evidence to support it.

    But their calculation is based on a false premise. Tsipras and Varoufakis assume that a default would force Europe to choose between just two alternatives: expel Greece from the eurozone or offer it unconditional debt relief. But the European authorities have a third option in the event of a Greek default. Instead of forcing a “Grexit,” the EU could trap Greece inside the eurozone and starve it of money, then simply sit back and watch the Tsipras government’s domestic political support collapse.

    Such a siege strategy – waiting for Greece to run out of the money it needs to maintain the normal functions of government – now looks like the EU’s most promising technique to break Greek resistance. It is likely to work because the Greek government finds it increasingly difficult to scrape together enough money to pay wages and pensions at the end of each month.

    To do so, Varoufakis has been resorting to increasingly desperate measures, such as seizing the cash in municipal and hospital bank accounts. The implication is that tax collections have been so badly hit by the economic chaos since January’s election that government revenues are no longer sufficient to cover day-to-day costs. If this is true – nobody can say for sure because of the unreliability of Greek financial statistics (another of the EU authorities’ complaints) – the Greek government’s negotiating strategy is doomed.

    The Tsipras-Varoufakis strategy assumed that Greece could credibly threaten to default, because the government, if forced to follow through, would still have more than enough money to pay for wages, pensions, and public services. That was a reasonable assumption back in January. The government had budgeted for a large primary surplus (which excludes interest payments), which was projected at 4% of GDP.

    If Greece had defaulted in January, this primary surplus could (in theory) have been redirected from interest payments to finance the higher wages, pensions, and public spending that Syriza had promised in its election campaign. Given this possibility, Varoufakis may have believed that he was making other EU finance ministers a generous offer by proposing to cut the primary surplus from 4% to 1% of GDP, rather than all the way to zero. If the EU refused, his implied threat was simply to stop paying interest and make the entire primary surplus available for extra public spending.

    But what if the primary surplus – the Greek government’s trump card in its confrontational negotiating strategy – has now disappeared? In that case, the threat of default is no longer credible. With the primary surplus gone, a default would no longer permit Tsipras to fulfill Syriza’s campaign promises; on the contrary, it would imply even bigger cutbacks in wages, pensions, and public spending than the “troika” – the European Commission, the European Central Bank, and the IMF – is now demanding.

    For the EU authorities, by contrast, a Greek default would now be much less problematic than previously assumed. They no longer need to deter a default by threatening Greece with expulsion from the euro. Instead, the EU can now rely on the Greek government itself to punish its people by failing to pay wages and pensions and honor bank guarantees.

    Tsipras and Varoufakis should have seen this coming, because the same thing happened two years ago, when Cyprus, in the throes of a banking crisis, attempted to defy the EU. The Cyprus experience suggests that, with the credibility of the government’s default threat in tatters, the EU is likely to force Greece to stay in the euro and put it through an American-style municipal bankruptcy, like that of Detroit.

    The legal and political mechanisms for treating Greece like a municipal bankruptcy are clear. The European treaties state unequivocally that euro membership is irreversible unless a country decides to exit not just from the single currency but from the entire EU. That is also the political message that EU governments want to instill in their own citizens and financial investors.

    If Greece defaults, the EU will be legally justified and politically motivated to insist that the euro remains its only legal tender. Even if the Greek government decides to pay wages and pensions by printing its own IOUs or “new drachmas,” the European Court of Justice will rule that all domestic debts and bank deposits must be repaid in euros. That, in turn, will force a default against Greek citizens, as well as foreign creditors, because the government will be unable to honor the euro value of insured deposits in Greek banks.

    So a Greek default within the euro, far from allowing Syriza to honor its election promises, would inflict even greater austerity on Greek voters than they endured under the troika program. At that point, the government’s collapse would become inevitable. Instead of Greece exiting the eurozone, Syriza would exit the Greek government. As soon as Tsipras realizes that the rules of the game between Greece and Europe have changed, his capitulation will be just a matter of time.



  • Peak Population Growth?

    The total number of living humans on Earth is now greater than 7 billion. As Max Roser notes, this large world population size is only a very recent development, as around just 200 years ago the world population was less than 1 billion. 

    Since the 18th century, Roser continues, the world population has seen a rapid increase; between 1900 and 2000 the increase in world population was three times as great as the increase during the entire previous history of humankind – in just 100 years the world population increased from 1.5 to 6.1 billion. But, Roser concludes, this development is now coming to an end, and we will not experience a similarly rapid increase in population growth over the course of this century

    World history can be divided into three periods of distinct trends in population growth.

     

    The first period (pre-modernity) was a very long age of very slow population growth.

     

    The second period, beginning with the onset of modernity (with rising standards of living and improving health) and lasting until 1962, had an increasing rate of growth.

     

    Now that period is over, and the third part of the story has begun: the population growth rate is falling and will continue to fall, leading to an end of growth before the end of this century.

     

    Source: OurWorldInData.org

    While The United Nations (UN) sees world population continuing to rise until 2100, some, such as Deutsche's Sanjeev Sanyal, believe world population will peak at 8.7 billion people in 2055 and then decline to 8 billion by 2100… As Sanyal wrote previously, misrepresent underlying demographic dynamics – the future we face is not one of too much population growth, but too little.

    According to the United Nations’ Population Division, the world’s human population hit seven billion on October 31. As always happens whenever we approach such a milestone, this one has produced a spike in conferences, seminars, and learned articles, including the usual dire Malthusian predictions. After all, the UN forecasts that world population will rise to 9.3 billion in 2050 and surpass 10 billion by the end of this century.

     

    Such forecasts, however, misrepresent underlying demographic dynamics. The future we face is not one of too much population growth, but too little.

     

    Most countries conducted their national population census last year, and the data suggest that fertility rates are plunging in most of them. Birth rates have been low in developed countries for some time, but now they are falling rapidly in the majority of developing countries. Chinese, Russians, and Brazilians are no longer replacing themselves, while Indians are having far fewer children. Indeed, global fertility will fall to the replacement rate in a little more than a decade. Population may keep growing until mid-century, owing to rising longevity, but, reproductively speaking, our species should no longer be expanding.

     

    What demographers call the Total Fertility Rate (TFR) is the average number of live births per woman over her lifetime. In the long run, a population is said to be stable if the TFR is at the replacement rate, which is a little above 2.3 for the world as a whole, and somewhat lower, at 2.1, for developed countries, reflecting their lower infant-mortality rates.

     

    The TFR for most developed countries now stands well below replacement levels. The OECD average is at around 1.74, but some countries, including Germany and Japan, produce less than 1.4 children per woman. However, the biggest TFR declines in recent years have been in developing countries. The TFR in China and India was 6.1 and 5.9, respectively, in 1950. It now stands at 1.8 in China, owing to the authorities’ aggressive one-child policy, while rapid urbanization and changing social attitudes have brought down India’s TFR to 2.6.

     

    An additional factor could depress future birth rates in China and India. The Chinese census suggests that there are 118.6 boys being born for every 100 girls. Similarly, India has a gender ratio at birth of around 110 boys for every 100 girls, with large regional variations. Compare this to the natural ratio of 105 boys per 100 girls. The deviation is usually attributed to a cultural preference for boys, which will take an additional toll on both populations, as the future scarcity of women implies that both countries’ effective reproductive capacity is below what is suggested by the unadjusted TFR.

     

    Indeed, after adjusting for the gender imbalance, China’s Effective Fertility Rate (EFR) is around 1.5, and India’s is 2.45. In other words, the Chinese are very far from replacing themselves, and the Indians are only slightly above the replacement rate. The EFR stands at around 2.4 for the world as a whole, barely above the replacement rate. Current trends suggest that the human race will no longer be replacing itself by the early 2020’s. Population growth after this will be mostly caused by people living longer, a factor that will diminish in significance from mid-century.

     

    These shifts have important implications for global labor supply. China is aging very rapidly, and its working-age population will begin to shrink within a few years. Relaxing the one-child policy might have some positive impact in the very long run, but China is already past the tipping point, pushed there by the combined effect of gender imbalance and a very skewed age structure.

     

    The number of women of child-bearing age (15-49 years) in China will drop 8% between 2010 and 2020, another 10% in the 2020’s and, if not corrected, at an even faster pace thereafter. Thus, China will have to withdraw an increasing proportion of its female workforce and deploy it for reproduction and childcare. Even if China can engineer this, it implies an immediate outflow from the workforce, with the benefits lagging by 25 years.

     

    Meanwhile, the labor force has peaked or is close to peaking in most major economies. Germany, Japan, and Russia already have declining workforces. The United States is one of a handful of advanced countries with a growing workforce, owing to its relative openness to immigration. But this may change as the source countries become richer and undergo rapid declines in birth rates. Thus, many developed countries will have to consider how to keep people working productively well into their seventies.

     

    India, the only large economy whose workforce will grow in sufficient scale over the next three decades, may partly balance the declines expected in other major economies. But, with birth rates declining there, too, current trends suggest that its population will probably stabilize at 1.55 billion in the early 2050’s, a full decade ahead of – and 170 million people below – the UN’s forecast.

     

    Given this, it is likely that world population will peak at nine billion in the 2050’s, a half-century sooner than generally anticipated, followed by a sharp decline. One could argue that this is a good thing, in view of the planet’s limited carrying capacity. But, when demographic dynamics turn, the world will have to confront a different set of problems.

    *  *  *

    "The world is approaching a major turning point in its demographic trajectory and we think that the shift is likely to be sooner and sharper than mainstream projections suggest,"

    Just remember, it took Japan a very long time to realize the decline in fertility was not 'transitory'…



  • Dan Ariely: Why The Next Market Downturn May Quickly Become A Full-Blown Panic

    Submitted by Adam Taggart via PeakProsperity.com,

    Behavioral economist and author of Predictably Irrational Dan Ariely returns to explain the science underlying the continued mismanagement and mal-investment within our financial system, despite 7 years of opportunity to learn from and address the causal factors of the Great Recession.

    Behavioral science shows we are our own worst enemies in this story. In a realm where everything is so quantifiable, measurable and trackable, one would expect exceptionally good decision-making. But it's our human wiring, our proclivity for seeing things as we want them to be rather than as they truly are, that makes us vulnerable to influences we often aren't even conscious of. And the bad decisions — and bad outcomes — ensue:

    For me, as somebody interested in human behavior, there are two elements that worry me a lot. The first one is Conflicts of interest.

     

    Conflicts of interest is one of those things that get to us without us realizing how powerful it is. Imagine that you invite me to dinner, and you buy me a beer and a sandwich and we talk more and we become friends. To what degree am I going to be able to see the world in an objective way without taking your perspective into account? It turns out conflicts of interest are wonderful because they allow us to create friendship really quite quickly. You can buy someone a beer and a sandwich and they become your friend to some degree. Once you marry this with a complex system like the financial system, all of a sudden some not-so-good things can happen.

     

    I think we really haven't done much to address conflicts of interest in our financial system — there are lots of places where people get paid in all kinds of ways that have conflicts of interest. There are companies that have divisions within them that create tremendous conflicts of interest. And human nature doesn't help. What happens is that you look at yourself and you ask: Do I have conflicts of interest? You say: No. Of course, not. I evaluate everything objectively; therefore, we don't need regulation. But I think we do, and actually to a much higher degree.

     

    The second element that bothers me about which we have done to little is Trust. There are people who are active in the financial system and they understand it better. And there are people who are not. The people who are not have experienced this tremendous devastation. Many people lost lots of money, especially people close to retirement. Many people pulled out their money and basically have lost trust. Now the question is: Under what conditions will people regain this lost trust? This is extremely important for the financial system's long-term viability. If you think about the financial system as a way to accumulate wealth and be able to retire securely and so on, I think we've lost some of the capacity of that system to serve that function, because people are just not trusting anything.

     

    Imagine if we have another beginning of a catastrophe happening, not something as big as we had, but something smaller. Is people's sensitivity right now is going to be so high that they're going to panic very quickly? I think the answer is: Yes. So we haven't done much to eliminate conflicts of interest, and we haven't done anything to earn back trust. And because of that, I deeply worry.

    Click the play button below to listen to Chris' interview with Dan Ariely (41m:53s)



  • Chinese Firm Reveals World's First 3D-Printed Five Story Apartment Building

    While China’s stock market continues levitating at an ever more amusing pace, this is happening at the expense of China’s far more important housing market, which sadly for three-quarters of China’s population (in the US 75% of household assets are in financial products, in China: in real estate) continues to deflate at a rate faster than US housing in the aftermath of Lehman. And for better or worse, Chinese home prices are likely set to drop even more, and not due to something as arcane as glitches in fiscal or monetary policy, but something far more tangible: technological advances, and specifically – 3D printed houses.

    Meet WinSun: the Chinese company has been documented to print 10 complete houses in 24 hours, using a proprietary 3D printer that uses a mixture of ground construction and industrial waste, such as glass and tailings, around a base of quick-drying cement mixed with a special hardening agent. But while this in itself is impressive, the punchline is the cost: the houses can be produced for under $5,000, which means that if adopted widely, 3D printing can lead to a collapse in prices of new home construction across China, which while good for new buyers could be catastrophic for the economy and the banking sector where nearly $30 trillion in commercial loans are collateralized almost entirely by China’s overinflated housing sector.

     

    Not content with building single-family houses (and WinSun’s own office), WinSun recently made history when it demonstrated the world’s first entirely 3D-printed five-story apartment building and a 1,100 square metre (11,840 square foot) villa, complete with decorative elements inside and out, on display at Suzhou Industrial Park.

     

     

    According to CNET, while the company hasn’t revealed how large it can print pieces, based on photographs on its website, they are quite sizeable and ornate. A CAD design is used as a template, and the computer uses this to control the extruder arm to lay down the material “much like how a baker might ice a cake,” WinSun said. The walls are printed hollow, with a zig-zagging pattern inside to provide reinforcement. This also leaves space for insulation.

    This process saves between 30 and 60 percent of construction waste, and can decrease production times by between 50 and 70 percent, and labour costs by between 50 and 80 percent. In all, the villa costs around $161,000 to build.

     

    And, using recycled materials in this way, the buildings decrease the need for quarried stone and other materials — resulting in a construction method that is both environmentally forward and cost effective.

    WinSun hopes to use its technology on much larger scale constructions, such as bridges and even skyscrapers, which means this is just the beginning of not only conveyer houses, but of massive price deflation across China’s housing market, which judging by the relentless plunge in Chinese inflation and the hard landing the local economy has found itself in, may have come at the worst possible time.

    In conclusion, one can only hope that WinSun “Quality Control” checklist is a little broader than some of its Chinese peers whose rush to the finish, often times leads to unfortunate consequences.

    h/t Keith



  • How China Covered The World In "Liquidity Swap Lines"

    As we’ve discussed on a number of occasions and at great length, the market is periodically hit by systemic dollar shortages. For instance, in 2007 European commercial banks found themselves staring down a dollar funding gap on the order of several trillion (all in). Meeting USD funding requirements became immeasurably more difficult as the crisis intensified, necessitating what amounted to a Fed bailout via dollar liquidity lines to foreign central banks.

    Then, in November of 2011 (so right around the time when, just like today, the financial world was glued to Greece), the Fed extended its “temporary” swap lines with The Bank of Canada, the BoJ, the BoE, the ECB, and the SNB, and also lowered the price of dollar liquidity. 

    The most recent global USD funding shortage began to show up earlier this year and as we noted in March, has been ironically created by central banks themselves (for those interested in a detailed account of the conditions which lead to episodic dollar dearths, see the articles linked above).

    Central bank liquidity lines like those the Fed used to bailout the world seven years ago have become a fixture of the post crisis financial system and as you can see from the following maps, their growth since 2007 has been remarkable. Perhaps the most striking thing about the following graphics is the extent to which China has (literally) covered the world in renminbi swap lines. Essentially, China has used bilateral swap agreements to help embed the yuan in international trade in the the post-crisis era. As you’ll see below, counterparty countries have also tapped their yuan liquidity lines when they’re cut off from dollar funding, making China a critical lifeline for bolstering FX reserves and helping to alleviate shortages of imported goods.

    Click here for the full interactive map 

    Here’s more from The Council on Foreign Relations on the history of the Fed’s international dollar liquidity bailouts:

    During the crisis, banks became highly reluctant to lend to one another, owing to fears about the true financial condition of counterparts. This drove up the cost of borrowing, as lenders demanded higher interest rates to compensate for rising counterparty risk. While central banks could provide local currency to their domestic banks to lower the cost of borrowing in that currency, their ability to provide foreign currency was limited by the amount of foreign currency reserves they held. To address these foreign currency funding issues, developed-economy central banks agreed to provide swap lines to one another.

     

    On December 12, 2007, the Federal Reserve extended swap lines to the European Central Bank (ECB) and Swiss National Bank (SNB). European bank demand for dollars had been pushing up, and creating accentuated volatility in, U.S. dollar interest rates. The swap lines were intended “to address elevated pressures in short-term funding markets,” and to do so without the Fed having to fund foreign banks directly.

     

    On September 16, 2008, two days after the collapse of Lehman Brothers, the Federal Reserve Open Market Committee (FOMC) gave the foreign currency subcommittee the power “to enter into swap agreements with the foreign central banks as needed to address strains in money markets in other jurisdictions.” This enabled the subcommittee to extend swap lines to other central banks and to expand the size of the existing swap lines, without the need for the full FOMC to vote on it.


     

    In 2011, the Bank of Canada, Bank of England, European Central Bank, Bank of Japan, Federal Reserve, and Swiss National Bank announced that they had established a network of swap lines that would allow any of the central banks to provide liquidity to their respective domestic banks in any of the other central banks’ currencies. In October 2013, they agreed to leave the swap lines in place as a backstop indefinitely.

    If you needed further evidence of China’s growing influence, consider that Beijing has essentially blanketed the globe with yuan liquidity lines, inking swap agreements with nearly three dozen countries with the primary goal of increasing the degree to which the renminbi is used in international trade…

    Since 2009, China has signed bilateral currency swap agreements with thirty-one counterparties. The stated intention of these swaps is to support trade and investment and to promote the international use of renminbi.

     

    Broadly, China limits the amount of renminbi available to settle trade, and the swaps have been used to obtain renminbi after these limits have been reached. In October 2010, the Hong Kong Monetary Authority and the People’s Bank of China (PBoC) swapped 20 billion yuan (about $3 billion) to enable companies in Hong Kong to settle renminbi trade with the mainland. In 2014, China used its swap line with Korea to obtain 400 million won (about $400,000). The won were then lent on to a commercial bank in China, which used them to provide trade financing for payment of imports from Korea.

    …and in fact, Argentina used their swap agreement with Beijing as a bailout mechanism…

    In addition to using the swaps to facilitate trade in renminbi, China is also using the swap lines to provide loans to Argentina in order to bolster the country’s foreign exchange reserves. In October 2014, a source at the Central Bank of Argentina reportedly told Telam, the Argentine national news agency, that the renminbi Argentina receives through the swap would be exchanged into other currencies. Argentina has had difficulty borrowing dollars on international markets since it defaulted on its debt in July and has faced shortages on a range of imported goods as a result. Swapping renminbi into dollars enables companies to import more than they would be able to otherwise.

    We’ll close with the following two maps which display only swaps lines set up by China. As you can see, the evolution is quite remarkable…

    2009

    2015



  • The Deadliest Jobs In America

    The U.S. Department of Labor tracks how many people die at work, and why. The latest numbers were released in April and cover the last seven years. As Bloomberg reports, some of the results may surprise you.

    click images for large interactive versions…

     

     

     

    Source: Bloomberg



  • Billionaire Oil CEO Demands Scientists Terminated After Oklahoma Quake Study

    The billionaire CEO of Continental Resources told a dean at the University of Oklahoma that he wanted earthquake researchers fired. In one of the most transparently oligarchic tactics we have seen yet during this ‘recovery’, oil tycoon Harold Hamm demanded certain scientists be dismissed following their findings that fracking wastewater disposal was the cause of the spike in Oklahoma earthquakes. Despite his protestations recently that “I don’t try to push anyone around,” as the following email obtained by Bloomberg, exposes, “Mr. Hamm is very upset at some of the earthquake reporting to the point that he would like to see select OGS staff dismissed.”

     

    As we noted previously, no matter what other problems may or may not be linked to hydraulic fracturing, or fracking, the disposal of wastewater from oil and gas drilling almost certainly is primarily responsible for the recent spate of earthquakes in Oklahoma, normally a seismologically quiet state.

    That’s the conclusion of a report issued April 21 by the Oklahoma Geological Survey (OGS), in which the state geologist Richard D. Andrews and Dr. Austen Holland, the state seismologist, said the rate of earthquakes near major oil and gas drilling operations that produce large amounts of wastewater demonstrate that the quakes “are very unlikely to represent a naturally occurring process.”

     

    Andrews and Holland concluded that the “primary suspected source” of the quakes is not hydraulic fracturing, or fracking, in which water and chemicals are injected under high pressure to crack shale to free oil and gas trapped inside. It said the source is more likely the injection of wastewater from this process in disposal wells, because water used in fracking cannot be re-used.

     

    “The OGS considers it very likely that the majority of recent earthquakes, particularly those in central and north-central Oklahoma, are triggered by the injection of produced water in disposal wells,” the statement said. It warned that residents should prepare for “a significant earthquake.”

     

    Oklahoma recorded 585 earthquakes with a magnitude of 3 or greater, the equivalent of the force felt in Oklahoma City at the time of the terrorist bombing in 1995. This is a significant increase from 109 earthquakes of the same magnitude in 2013. Before 2008, when fracking became a popular drilling technique in the state, there were fewer than two earthquakes in Oklahoma each year, on average.

     

     

    Andrews’ and Holland’s report draws the same conclusions as a study last year by Katie Keranen, an assistant professor of seismology at Cornell University, who found that injecting fracking wastewater into underground disposal sites tends to widen cracks in geological formations, increasing the chances of earthquakes.

     

    Keranen’s study, in turn, reinforces similar conclusions in a previous study by the U.S. Geological Survey, which found that earthquakes in central and eastern parts of the United States between 2010 and 2013 also coincided with the disposal of fracking wastewater.

     

    What’s important about Andrews’ and Holland’s conclusion is that they represent the state of Oklahoma, where energy is an important industry, providing about one-quarter of the state’s jobs. Last autumn, Gov. Mary Fallin, a Republican, dismissed the problem as speculative and urged further study.

     

    But in a statement coinciding with Andrews’ and Holland’s report, Fallin said their ability to link wastewater disposal with earthquakes was significant and promised unspecified action. “Oklahoma state agencies already are taking action to address this issue and protect homeowners,” she said.

     

    The state’s energy industry also supports further study of the state’s recent uncharacteristic seismic activity. “Oklahoma’s oil and natural gas producers have a proven history of developing the state’s oil and natural gas resources in a safe and effective manner,” Kim Hatfield, regulatory committee chairman for the Oklahoma Independent Petroleum Association, said in a statement.

    And now, as Bloomberg reports, it is clear the elites were not happy with these findings…

    According to the dean’s e-mail recounting the conversation, Oil tycoon Harold Hamm told a University of Oklahoma dean last year that he wanted certain scientists there dismissed who were studying links between oil and gas activity and the state’s nearly 400-fold increase in earthquakes…

     

     

    He has vigorously disputed the notion that he tried to pressure the survey’s scientists. “I’m very approachable, and don’t think I’m intimidating,” Hamm was quoted as saying in an interview with EnergyWire, an industry publication, that was published on May 11. “I don’t try to push anybody around.”

     

    Kristin Thomas, a spokeswoman for Continental, says the company has no comment.

    Worse still the lies and deceit run deep…

    Catherine Bishop, the university’s vice president of public affairs and one of the recipients of Grillot’s 2014 e-mail, didn’t respond to requests for an interview, but she defended Hamm in an e-mail: “Mr. Hamm absolutely did not ask to be on the search committee or to have anyone from Continental put onto the committee, nor did he ask that anyone from the Oklahoma Geological Survey be dismissed,” she wrote.

     

    Asked about the difference between her statement and Grillot’s 2014 e-mail, Bishop responded: “Please note that the bottom line is that University of Oklahoma will not tolerate any possible interference with academic freedom and scientific inquiry.” She added in a subsequent message: “Neither Mr. Hamm nor anyone from Continental Resources served on the search committee.”

     

     

    Hamm has been a generous donor to the University of Oklahoma, including a 2011 gift of $20 million for a diabetes research center named after the oilman. University President David Boren, a former U.S. senator, sits on the board of directors of Hamm’s Continental Resources.

     

    In the e-mail he wrote about his meeting with Hamm, Grillot—who himself sits on the board of Pioneer Natural Resources, an Irving (Tex.)-based oil and gas company—noted that he saw Boren leaving Continental’s corporate offices before he went in to see the CEO.

    Profits – once again – it would appear come before public safety and while money may not be able to buy happiness, it seems to be able to buy pretty much everything else.



  • Lapdogs, Redux: How The Press Tried To Discredit Seymour Hersh’s Last Bombshell Report

    By Mark Ames, first posted in Pando Daily

    Lapdogs, Redux: How The Press Tried To Discredit Seymour Hersh’s Bombshell Reporting On CIA Domestic Spying

    Seymour Hersh found himself in the middle of an F-5 shitstorm this week after breaking his biggest blockbuster story of the Obama Era, debunking the official heroic White House story about how Navy SEALs took out Osama Bin Laden in a daring, secret nighttime raid in the heart of Pakistan.

    According to Hersh’s account, OBL was given up by one of his Pakistani ISI prison wardens—our Pakistaini allies had been holding him captive since 2006, with backing from our Saudi allies, to use for leverage. Hersh’s account calls into question a lot of things, starting with the justification for the massive, expensive, and brutal US GWOT military-intelligence web, which apparently had zilch to do with taking out the most wanted terrorist in the world. All it took, says Hersh, was one sleazy Pakistani ISI turncoat walking into a CIA storefront in Islamabad, handing them the address to Bin Laden’s location, and picking up his $25 million bounty check. About as hi-tech as an episode of Gunsmoke.

    The celebrated Navy SEAL helicopter raid and killing of OBL was, according to Hersh, a stage production co-directed by the US military and Pakistan’s intelligence agency, who escorted the SEALs to Bin Laden’s room, pointed a flashlight at the captive, and watched the SEALs unload hot lead on the old cripple, turning him into spaghetti bolognese. (Raising other disturbing questions—such as, why would the White House want to silence forever the one guy with all the names, the most valuable intelligence asset in the world… unless of course that was the whole point of slaughtering him in his Abbottabad cell? Which leads one to wonder why the US wanted to make sure Bin Laden kept his secrets to himself, should one bother wondering.)

    Hersh has pissed off some very powerful people and institutions with this story, and that means the inevitable media pushback to discredit his reporting is already underway, with the attacks on Hersh led by Vox Media’s Max Fisher, CNN’s Peter Bergen, and even some on the left like Nation Institute reporter Matthieu Aikins. Yesterday Slate joined the pile-on, running a wildly entertaining, hostile interview with Hersh.

    Such attacks by fellow journalists on a Sy Hersh bombshell are nothing new—in fact, he used to relish them, and probably still does. He got the same hostile reaction from his media colleagues when he broke his biggest story of his career: The 1974 exposé of the CIA’s massive, illegal domestic spying program, MH-CHAOS, which targeted tens, maybe hundreds of thousands of Americans, mostly antiwar and leftwing dissidents.

    Hersh is better known today for his My Lai massacre and Abu Ghraib exposés, but it was his MH-CHAOS scoop, which the New York Times called “the son of Watergate,” that was his most consequential and controversial—from this one sensational exposé the entire intelligence apparatus was nearly taken down. Hersh’s exposés directly led to the famous Church Committee hearings into intelligence abuses, the Rockefeller Commission, and the less famous but more radical Pike Committee hearings in the House, which I wrote about in Pando last year. These hearings not only blew open all sorts of CIA abuses, assassination programs, drug programs and coups, but also massive intelligence failures and boondoggles.

    They also revealed to the public for the first time the NSA’s secret programs targeting Americans, including co-opting all the major US telecoms and cable telex companies— AT&T, ITT, Western Union and RCA—in a program “vacuuming” all electronic communications, as well as “Project Minaret,” in which the NSA wiretapped hundreds or perhaps tens of thousands (depending on the source) of antiwar and leftwing American dissidents. Those hearings led briefly to some real reforms and some half-assed reforms in the intelligence community during the Carter years, all of which were undone as soon as Reagan came to power. (I wrote about the history of Hersh’s MH-CHAOS exposé for NSFWCorp here and here.)

    That is what effective journalism looks like. But if Hersh’s media peers at the time had their way, none of that would’ve happened. Rather than supporting Hersh, journalists across the spectrum, led by the Washington Post, did everything to discredit and undermine his reporting. “I was reviled,” is how Hersh later put it to UC Davis professor Kathryn Olmsted, author of the excellent “Challenging the Secret Government.”

    It was mostly thanks to the CIA director’s own admission in January 1975 that Hersh’s reporting was correct that other journalists backed off, and joined in the adversarial feeding frenzy. Yes: the CIA saved Hersh’s biggest scoop from the lapdog press. Times were strange.

    And it was the Washington Post that led the attacks on Hersh’s reporting. In early January 1975, the WaPo ran an editorial, “The CIA’s ‘Illegal Domestic Spying,’” attacking Hersh for relying on anonymous sources—this from the same paper that relied on the most famous anonymous source in history, Deep Throat. The WaPo editorial went on:

    “While almost any CIA activity can be fitted under the heading of ‘spying,’ and while CIA activities undertaken on American soil can be called ‘domestic spying,’ it remains to be determined which of these activities has been conducted in ‘violation’ of the agency’s congressional charter or are ‘illegal.’”

    The WaPo’s top intelligence reporter, Laurence Stern, took to the Columbia Journalism Review to attack Hersh in an article titled “Exposing the CIA (Again)”—alleging a “dearth of hard facts” in Hersh’s reporting, and a “remarkably febrile succession of follow-ups.” While in the Post, Stern alleged that it wasn’t the CIA that was keeping files on the 9,000 Americans that Hersh orginally reported, but rather the Justice Department—making it therefore legal. Pulitzer Prize winner Jack Anderson followed up in the WaPo confirming Stern’s false allegation, in a piece titled, “CIA’s Files Said to Support Denials”.

    The two major news weeklies, Time and Newsweek, piled on Hersh’s reporting too. Newsweek, in a piece headlined “A New CIA furor,” quoted a number of anonymous intelligence sources to discredit and downplay the significance of Hersh’s MH-CHAOS scoop: “There’s something to Hersh’s charges, but a hell of a lot less than he makes of it.” Time’s article, “Supersnoop,” snarked:

    “[T]here is a strong likelihood that Hersh’s CIA story is considerably exaggerated and that the Times overplayed it.”

    A common line of attack was to call Hersh’s series “overwritten and under-researched.” Gossip in the Washington press corps at the time claimed that WaPo’s famous editor Ben Bradlee denounced Hersh’s stories as “overwritten and under-researched”; and when Hersh was passed over for the Pulitzer that year, to everyone’s surprise, one columnist wrote Hersh didn’t deserve it anyway, calling his MH-CHAOS exposes “overwritten, overplayed, under-researched and under-proven.”

    Hersh might’ve been buried by his own press colleagues, who were only interested in discrediting his reporting, if not for CIA director William Colby’s testimony before the Senate in mid-January, 1975. Hersh himself reported it for the Times, which led:

    “William E. Colby, Director of Central Intelligence, acknowledged at a Senate hearing today that his agency had infiltrated undercover agents into antiwar and dissident political groups inside the United States as part of a counterintelligence program that led to the accumulation of files on 10,000 American citizens.”

    After the CIA chief’s confirmation of Hersh’s story, his media detractors had no choice but to grudgingly walk back their criticism. Quoting again from Kathryn Olmsted’s book, after Colby’s admission,

    “The Washington Post reported that Colby’s disclosure had ‘confirmed major elements’ of Hersh’s stories, and Newsweek agreed that Colby’s testimony had substantiated ‘many basic elements of the original story if not all the adjectives.’”

    Today we’re seeing some of the same grudging, qualified acceptance of Hersh’s Bin Laden bombshell from the establishment press.

    Later in 1975, the great Bill Greider—who was then an editor at the WaPo—summed up the attitude of the press to Hersh’s revelations:

    “the press especially tugs back and forth at itself, alternately pursuing the adrenal instincts unleashed by Watergate, the rabid distrust bred by a decade of out-front official lies, then abruptly playing the cozy lapdog.”

    My how we’ve grown so much in the 40 years since.



  • "When Enough Is Never Enough" – What Do Millionaires Want?

    The simple answer: moar.

    While hardly a scientific study, it should come as no surprise that in a recent poll of high net worth clients by UBS, the “recidivist” bank found that the more money a high net worth individual has, the more money that same individual needs to retire comfortably.

    Or, as the saying goes, “appetite comes with eating” even though according to that other saying: “the rat race has no exit.”

    UBS’ explanation:

    Satisfaction goes up as net worth increases, reaching 85% for those with $5 million or more. But enough is not enough for many millionaires to be fully satisfied, because lifestyle expectations rise along with net worth. Fifty-eight percent of millionaires say their expectations for their standard of living have increased in the last 10 years. Those whose wealth has increased significantly during this time period are even more likely to feel their standard of living expectations have gone up (64%). As a result, the majority of millionaires want more. Those with $1 million want $2 million; those with $10 million want $25 million.

    And those with $100 million want $1 billion; those with $1 billion want to move AAPL with a single tweet and to stop being so bored with their lives, and so on.

    The bottom line, when UBS asks “When is enough…enough?” and “Why the wealthy can’t get off the treadmill“…

    … the answer is: never.

    But there is good news, because all those overburdened millionaires now live in a crony capitalist system which rewards wealth above all else, and as a result the rich are assured of becoming even richer as the following summary of America’s record class divide explains.

    For the not so wealthy, well… this is your “chance” to get off the treadmill for the simple reason that when it comes to the US middle class becoming wealthy, the lights were turned off the day the Fed’s printed was turned on.



  • Jim Rogers On The Coming Water Wars

    Submitted by Erico Matias Tavares of Sinclair & Co.

    Water – An Interview with Jim Rogers

    Jim Rogers, Jr. is an American businessman, investor and author. He is currently based in Singapore. Rogers is the Chairman of Rogers Holdings and Beeland Interests, Inc. He was the co-founder of the Quantum Fund and creator of the Rogers International Commodities Index (RICI).

    Erico Tavares: Jim, thank for being with us today. We would like to talk about water and other agricultural inputs, something you have been very vocal about in recent years.

    To set the stage for today’s topic, a few years ago we worked on a biofuels project which took us all around the world. In a trip to Bolivia a pioneering Austrian engineer involved in the sector told us something very interesting. At that time the price of vegetable oils was much cheaper than diesel, prompting many people to start building biofuels facilities across Europe. He said this was crazy and in no way sustainable because crude oil is and always will be the lowest common denominator in an economy.

    He was right, and many biofuels today need government support in order to be viable. But looking at the world we can argue that the lowest common denominator is in fact water. Even crude oil increasingly depends on it, particularly in the US with all the fracking. You are known for being ahead of the curve in many markets. As you look at the water situation across the globe, what do you see?

    Jim Rogers: Water is one of the great opportunities of our times. If you look at the world there are some huge shortages developing in some parts but there is also a lot of water in other parts, just in the wrong place – like water in Siberia for instance, which is not where most people are.

    There are going to be wars in the Middle East over oil east of the Red Sea, but west of that there will be wars over water since there are serious water problems in that region. We will also have problems in the western parts of the US with the depletion of a big aquifer, from what I read.

    So we have a lot of water problems in a lot of places. California is making the news right now, but that is not the only place at risk. And if you can figure out ways to clean or transport or pump water you are going to do very well.

    ET: Let’s focus on China first, a country you know well. There are reports that a vast proportion of their pure water resources is contaminated, an unfortunate outcome of their rapid industrialization process. Do you have a view on the situation there? Is the Chinese government starting to address the issue?

    JR: China has got gigantic water problems. First they have the water in the wrong place and second the water is filthy, terribly polluted in many cases. So the Chinese know that and they are spending a lot of money trying to figure that out. So someone is going to make a lot of money in China helping them to solve their own water problems.

    That’s the opportunity right now. Figure out how to get the water from the wrong place to the right place, clean it up and you can get very rich.

    ET: We have been involved with companies that are developing innovative ways to do just that. However, one recurring issue is cost. Water ends up being much more expensive once you treat or transport it. So do you think we could actually face some constraints on how to improve access to that resource despite the significant opportunity?

    JR: There is no question that we are facing constraints. They are already here in many parts of the world. Water, I presume, is going to get very expensive or else we are going to move to where the water is. This is how societies and civilizations have developed. Once upon a time there was a lot of farming in the Sahara desert that we now know of. It is now a desert and everybody moved away because there is no more water there.

    Water is the single most important determination of civilization. I travelled around the world a couple of times and I have seen whole societies that disappeared because the water disappeared. People can survive recession and war, revolution and famine, plague, but they cannot survive without water. That ends the whole story, no matter how smart you think you are.

    We have to move or it becomes very expensive, but you have to move because you got to have the water.

    ET: Well here in Singapore it rains quite a bit so you guys might do OK.

    JR: Actually Singapore is one of the most advanced places for solving water problems, because they have to. They recycle water, figured out ways to capture the water. One of the worries is that if they go to war with Malaysia that would be the end of the story, because Malaysia would just cut off the water. Fortunately, they are not at war and Singapore has been hard at work – I believe that we are now 90% self-sufficient, but still, you got to have the water.

    ET: India has been one of the very bright spots in the emerging markets sector lately. Food is obviously very important there, given its weight on disposable income and so forth. A food security professor told us that he recently flew over a large agricultural area there, and salty spots were starting to become very apparent as a result of over-drainage from underground reservoirs. Once salt takes over those lands become unproductive, and this is being reported in other areas as well. Are you aware of this issue? More broadly, is food prices one of the things you track when considering investing in an emerging economy?

    JR: To repeat, if you don’t have water you can’t make it. I’m wildly bullish on China but if they don’t solve the water problem there’s no China story. Likewise India has a water problem, worse in fact. There’s no question that India will be in worse shape than China. Northern India has gigantic problems. And that’s a nation of a billion people. Add another 1.3 billion in China and you have a big water problem.

    There are great opportunities in water. I haven’t found one that is publicly listed as of yet. I am sure there are several, I am just too lazy to find them. But I would love to find water plays that are substantial and serious.

    The problem with water is that you can’t own it. Because if you do, when the crisis comes the politicians will hang you in the public square because you are exploiting Man’s God given right to water. And they will curse and scream at you. But if you find a way to solve the water problem they will build a monument for you. You will be very, very rich. But for goodness sake don’t own the water because if you do they will take it away from you, torture you and execute you.

    ET: It looks like California might have yet another dry year ahead. As we all know, the Golden State produces an incredible amount of all varieties of food, which will be impacted if they don’t start getting a lot of water soon. Major reservoirs are already at extremely low levels, and we may be seeing a reversion to a much drier period which actually has been prevalent over the last 1000 years in that region. Is this something that concerns you, not only as an American but also looking at global food supplies as a whole?

    JR: The whole Southwest is facing a serious water problem. The aquifer, based on what I read, is drying up out there. And not just in California but all over the Southwest. And if that happens America will have to absorb a gigantic change. If you have water and productive land you will be very, very rich. Because whether we like it or not – now this is not going to happen next year, I don’t think California is going to become a desert any time soon – it is a process which is going on, from what I can read.

    And from what I can see nobody in the government seems to know or care about it. The government of California is learning but they are not solving the problem, they are deliberating about the problem. But again it is just not the US, there many places in the world with problems – China, India, the Middle East, many places have big water problems.

    ET: Switching gears a bit, you are also a director of a fertilizer company. Do you see constraints developing on that side of the equation going forward?

    JR: Well, we all read the same thing, that the supply of phosphorous, which is a vital fertilizer, is not unlimited and will run out at some point in the future. I’m a director of a phosphorous fertilizer company.

    This is another reason for people to learn about farming and agriculture. You can farm without fertilizer, people have done that for a long time. But it is less efficient and if you start having phosphorous problems, fertilizer problems and water problems then, my God, there are 7 billion people in the world and there haven’t always been 7 billion people in the world. We may have gigantic changes again.

    Civilization shifts again. Not might, we will. This is something that has been going on since the beginning of time. If you see where Mankind has lived over the centuries, I mentioned the Sahara, you mentioned California. There will be great investment opportunities; but longer term there are staggering implications.

    ET: You have spoken about the advanced age of many farmers in key countries around the world, such as in the US, Canada, Great Britain and Japan. The demographics in this sector look particularly appalling. What needs to happen so that young people start getting more interested in this activity? Technology development? Higher prices? Do you see a shift occurring here in all your discussions around the world?

    JR: There is very little shift. Farming has been a terrible business for 30 years. And when that happens people go to where the money is. They go to Wall Street, wherever the money is.

    In America the average age of farmers is 58 because nobody wants to be a farmer anymore. There are farms in Japan that are empty because there is nobody to farm them; they are even experimenting bringing in workers from China, and they don’t like foreigners at all but they have little choice. The average age in Australia is 58. Canada has the oldest age for farmers in recorded history. In the UK the highest rate of suicide is in agriculture. I guess we all know that millions of Indian farmers commit suicide because things are so terrible.

    More people in America study public relations than agriculture, because it has been a terrible business. The only that is going to change is for it to become very profitable and for young people to see the farmers getting rich. Of course they will say “those guys are driving Lamborghinis and I want one too so I will become a farmer”.

    But it’s not going to happen until it becomes an exciting and profitable business. The Soviets tried to make people farm, they had all these coops or whatever they called them; Mao Tse Tung tried the same thing and eventually ruined Chinese agriculture by forcing people to become farmers. It doesn’t work.

    The only way it works is for people to become motivated to become farmers and that will only happen when they get rich. There have been many periods in history where farmers got rich and powerful. It will happen again.

    ET: Given all the issues that we have discussed, if these trends persist we will see higher food prices, perhaps significantly so. How can people hedge against this? Should they start growing their own food, purchase the appropriate securities in the markets, buy water treatment companies…?

    JR: That’s why you should become a farmer. Buy some land and become a farmer if you like the outdoors. Otherwise you can lease it to a farmer. Make sure you buy land where it is going to rain and that you lease it to a competent farmer, otherwise you will suffer.

    There are many ways. You can invest in seed companies, or you can become a tractor salesman, or set up restaurants for the farmers because they will have a lot more money down the road. Buy yourself a second home by a lake in the farm belt, in the places where the farmers are going to be.

    There are many ways to participate and to get involved – to hedge if you will. Becoming a stockbroker is not the best way. Farming is the way of the future. But don’t do it unless you like it. If you don’t like it you will find out it’s a lot of hard work and will go broke, like many other farmers. Certainly many have gone broke, committed suicide and so forth over the last 30 years.

    Instead you can become a journalist covering the farming sector. Depends on what your skills and interests are. As you look at your life, figure out a way to orient it towards agriculture. If you want to sell, sell something to the farmers.

    ET: A quick comment on possible macro implications. The US Federal Reserve excludes food from its core inflation definition, but if prices rise quickly there could be repercussions on the rest of the economy. It seems that Western central banks have spent so much time and effort printing money to avoid deflation that when they finally start getting inflation, driven by a food crisis or any other shock, they will be in a very weak position to tackle it. For one, raising interest rates will put a lot of pressure on government finances given the huge debt loads that they are now carrying. What do you think could happen here?

    JR: Throughout history we have had economic slowdowns every four to seven years, every so often. Always have, and always will. Nobody has solved that problem, not even the central banks. We are going to have another one in the world. We are going to have more I should say, and they will get worse because the debt situation is higher and higher. We hear all this talk about austerity and cutting back but every country in the world has higher debt now than it had last year and will have higher debt next year.

    The buildup of debt in the US alone is staggering; Japan is staggering, everywhere is staggering. So the next time we have an economic slowdown it is going to be much worse than the last time, and if the world survives that one, the one after that is going to be worse and worse.

    Because as you point out, if interest rates go higher – and they will; this current level of interest rates is not only abnormal but absurd, it has never been so low anywhere in the world – with the gigantic amount of debt we are going to have gigantic problems worldwide: more turmoil, we will probably have wars, governments fail, countries fail. This is going to be a mess.

    So buy yourself a farm. Be prepared! It’s going to be a serious mess. And hopefully your farm will be far away from the marauding hordes.

    ET: Final question. You are also known as the “investment biker”, after driving thousands of miles around the world. Is this how you have generated your best investment ideas, being on the ground and seeing what was actually happening? These days, how do you keep close tabs on the markets?

    JR: I drove around the world not for investing but for adventure. Because of who I am, when I go some place I do look around, I do observe. And in my travels I would see opportunities just by the nature of who I am. If I saw something changing I would pursue it.

    And that’s a good way to do it. If you have the time and the money to go around the world in a car or a motorcycle do it. It’s a great adventure, at least for me. I’ve done it twice. The investing was a sideline.

    But just walking down the street, if you can be observant you can find investment ideas. Sometimes I missed them but other times not, and I capitalized on it. And I read a lot. I don’t know much about basketball but I know what’s going on around the world because I read and that’s my passion.

    Start with what interests you. Find the changes in the industry you like and figure out ways to invest and profit from it. This will you put you ahead of Wall Street because this is your passion, so you can get in before anybody else. You can also get out sooner, because Wall Street is always late in getting out.

    Over the course of your life you can spot 25 or so good investment opportunities. Concentrate your efforts on understanding them rather than jumping around and you will do very well.

    ET: Jim, thank you very much for sharing your knowledge on these important topics. We’ll go drink some water and eat an apple while they’re still cheap!

    JR: All the best to you.



  • If Numbers Don’t Lie Then…

    Authored by Mark St.Cyr

    If Numbers Don’t Lie Then…

    There’s an old saying that “numbers don’t lie.” However, when we apply simple common sense to the way we hear numbers spun across the financial media what doesn’t add up is precisely that: the numbers.

    Once again I was left slack-jawed countless times as I heard one after another economist, analyst, chief investment big bank guru, et al tout their reasoning and pontificate why we’re on the verge of breaking out of this stagnant economic malaise of sub 1% GDP prints.

    The reasonings were laughable when applying common sense rather than math skills to the arguments. Yet, as I’ve stated and wrote before. When it comes to this set of supposed number mavens: “They can add – but they can’t put two and two together.”

    One argument now being proposed to help bolster the projections that Q2 will be closer to 3% as opposed to the abysmal print of Q1 is (even as the Atlanta Fed. is now predicting the same if not worse) that this jump will be fueled by (wait for it…) “Cap-ex spending relating to the bump up in crude prices over the recent weeks…” (insert rimshot here)

    This wasn’t coming from some ancillary small fund manager. This line of thought and analysis was coming from one of our “too big to fail” taxpayer-funded bail-out houses of financial acumen.

    As this “insight” was simultaneously broadcast throughout television and radio, heralded as “This is why we have people like you on – for exactly this type of insightful analysis and perspective.” I couldn’t help myself but to agree. For this is what “financial” brilliance across the financial media now represents: Financial spin.

    My analysis? With analysis like this? Taxpayers better get ready – again!

    This objective “seasoned” analysis is being professed by one of the same that expected the prior GDP print to show “great improvement” based on “the gas savings made possible from lower crude prices.” The result? If the build in inventory hadn’t been “adjusted” in formulations Pythagoras would marvel at – the print would have been negative.

    So now you’re being led to believe with the recent rise in crude prices: drillers, refiners, etc., etc., are going to load up on cap-ex only months after many have scuttled rigs, buildings, employees, and more? Again, soon enough to effect Q2?

    If cap-ex can be effected that soon, and to that degree as to pull GDP prints from near negative to 3% in a single quarter all by itself – as every other macro data point is collapsing? Why would lower gas prices have ever been wanted let alone touted as “good for the economy?”I’ll just remind you that this “insightful analysis” was coming from one of the many who loved to tout endlessly how the U.S. economy is based on “consumer spending” and “more money in consumers wallets based on lower prices at the pump was inevitable.” All I’ll ask is: when does “inevitable” materialize? Before? Or, after the next revisions?

    Again, now since it’s been shown that the “inevitable consumer” spent nothing of their gas savings to help prop up the prior GDP. (sorry I forgot, yes they did in higher health insurance costs) Where the case was made to bludgeon any doubters of their analysis: i.e., “lower crude prices resulting in lower gas prices = more consumer spending.” We are now supposed to embrace the inverted narrative where: “GDP for Q2 will show growth of around 3% based on higher crude prices resulting in increased cap-ex?”

    Maybe it’s just me since some in the financial media refer to people like myself who question their reasoning as “idiots.” Doesn’t that calculation (as well as the conflicting narrative) render their previous argument they’ve professed ad nauseam: GDP growth in a consumer based economy is hindered by high gas prices – moot?

    For if higher GDP expectations is now predicated on higher crude – than higher prices paid by the consumer at the pump is the answer to our whoa’s – not the other way around. Is it not? Oh yes, plus the added driver of increased insurance premiums. No additional car required. Remember: It’s not math – It’s magic!

    Again, using the logic chain espoused by the so-called “smart crowd” the afore example is absolutely well within their “reasonable expectations of analysis.” My analysis? Sure, as long as it’s your money at risk – not theirs.

    The above math is not erroneous. However, when it’s used to obfuscate the true meaning of those numbers where deception is more in line rather, than explaining the true calculations? Then my saying of “If the numbers don’t lie then…” takes on far more “truth in numbers” than the projections as well as their quantitative analysis would portend.

    If you doubt this; just change the premise (or narrative) but keep the numbers the same. i.e., “We calculate and project GDP growth to triple from here. Up from under 1% nearer to 3%…” to “We miscalculated and our projections were wrong for Q1 by as much as 300% in the wrong direction, from a projected 3% print to a now less than 1% with possible revisions to negative” and you are far closer to the truth. For that is where, “The numbers didn’t lie.” Because if the truth be told, for Q1 – that’s precisely what happened.

    As egregious to the sensibility of entrepreneurs, business people, and others everywhere. It’s far from the only example. And for my money one of the worst offences used is: The relevance to past data sets and their implied meanings to today’s since the emergence of QE.

    This is when I have my most imaginative sessions of imitating Elvis. No, not on stage. Rather, when he took his frustrations out while watching a television.

    Here is where “cherry picking” numbers takes on a whole new meaning nevermind qualitative “apples to apples” relevancy.

    Of all the data points used across the financial media, the rationale to compare one set of data points (e.g., comparing numbers from any prior multi-year period to today) is so outrageously comical, it borders on near criminal assault to one’s common sense.

    I hear one after another so-called “brilliant economist” or “top-tier analyst” tout data points, or sets such as, “Well back in the 70’s from 1972 thru 1978 this metric was identical to where we are now and then we rocketed higher in GDP growth, employment, blah, blah, blah.” (You can use any data sets you like for example; they’re all the same. i.e., If not the 70’s it’s the 80’s, or 50’s, or 20’s, or 30’s etc., etc.)

    Before the advent of QE these data sets were relative to extract some quantitative analysis. Today? Rubbish. They’re like comparing cherries to pineapples. Sure they are both fruit, but other than that they are far from anything “similar,” And using them in a form of “quantitative” analysis without mentioning nor adjusting for “relevance in qualitative” objective analysis is just outright malfeasance in my opinion.

    Before QE and the outright intervention of monetary policy directly influencing stocks – people bought stocks reflective of the economy. Today? Central Banks across the globe are now openly manipulating markets as a “matter of policy.”

    The dwindling volume along with the capital outflows that has continued since the beginning of the financial crisis as the markets once again set new all time historic records proves prima facie, without adjusting for that metric alone (e.g., QE) and it’s quantitative, as well as qualitative impact (if it could be calculated) all – and I do mean all – relevance to prior economic examples is outright “junk science.” Or better yet: Outright bunk. Period.

    Who cares (except for one whose salary is based on the commission paid if one buys in) what the numbers were in any given data set relative to the advent of QE? They are meaningless.

    Just like a 5.4% print in unemployment is outright “voodoo economics” when used when trying to extrapolate what an economy did when 5.4% was measured at any time prior without the qualitative adjustment of what 5.4 today actually means relative to 5.4% ten, twenty years ago, let alone even further.

    This type of extrapolation I hear now so often is insulting. And this comes from people touted as “smart” while they proclaim us as “idiots.”

    Here we are, once again at “never before seen in human history” highs. Yet, since the ending of QE last November – the markets have virtually gone nowhere.

    Over this same period GDP expectations have not only been ratched down, they’ve been revised from prints of abysmal – to pathetic.

    Various social media stocks that were touted as the bastion of “everything is awesome” indicators have dropped like “dead canary’s” overnight after reporting “earnings.” Some losing near 30% and have yet to find any buyers at these now “On Sale” bargain prices.

    What was once touted as “bad for the markets” (e.g., falling macro data points) is now touted as “great for stocks!” i.e. The Federal Reserve wouldn’t dare raise rates now.

    Less real people making trades, and more HFT algorithmic front running means ever more “liquidity and stability” by those more involved with protecting their “cut” rather than the stability of our financial markets.

    Just remember that other well-worn bromide they like to use when one ever questions their math: “It’s different this time.” And for their sakes as well as commissions – they had better hope so. Because, if we exclude relevant numbers as well as their qualitative measures. How does one square the circle today with the announcement as we once again hit never before seen heights in the markets – AOL™ is back in the news where merger, synergies, eyeballs, and ad revenues are once again the focus?

    Do we use quantitive, qualitative, or both to figure out the implications for such a deal? Should we be nervous? Or, is once again: “Different this time?” And the “numbers” truly do add up.



  • When The Class Divide Gets Too Wide: Another Look At The French Revolution

    Two months ago, legendary trader and investor Paul Tudor Jones, when observing the growing chasm between the 1% and the rest of America, and between the US and the rest of the world, said that this gap “cannot and will not persist” and ominously added that “historically, these kinds of gaps get closed in one of three ways: by revolution, higher taxes or wars.”

    And while the US government is doing its best to push both the war and higher tax “mandate”, it is the revolution that nobody expects, and everyone is shocked when it happens, despite what is clearly an unprecedented level of class, wealth, religious, educational, age, gender and – after a quick stroll through St. Louis or Baltimore – racial division.

    It is therefore appropriate that the following documentary reminder of what happens when the class divide gets too wide, in this case captured by the French Revolution, carries the following words of caution: “no one could have foreseen the turbulent times ahead on one spring day in 1770. The shadow of Versailles is packed to its gilded rafters with the glittering crowds of the royal court.”

    Replace Versailles with modern day Monte Carlo, New York or St. Barts, and the “crowds of the royal court” with the “0.001%”, and one can easily see why ‘nobody’ can foresee that which in retrospect will have been all too obvious, only not 250 years ago, but this very moment.

    So for those who would prefer to learn from the past which they may have forgotten as they follow every tick higher in the stock ‘market’, here is NatGeo’s documents on the French Revolution.

     



  • Final Pillar Of Bull Market Showing Cracks?

    By Dana Lyons, partner at J. Lyons Fund Management and founder of My401kPro.com

    Final Pillar Of Bull Market Showing Cracks?

    We have repeated ad nauseam the litany of concerns we have regarding the longer-term fate of the U.S. stock market. These concerns include metrics pertaining to price proximity to trend, valuation, sentiment, investor allocation, investor leverage, corporate profligacy and on and on and on. Our biggest problem with these conditions are that such excesses of the prior secular bull market, in our view, were not adequately corrected in the subsequent secular bear market. Thus, we find it a reach to consider that the necessary conditions were in place to support a new sustainable secular bull market – particularly one in which many of the same excesses have so hastily reemerged. That said, we have also taken great care to emphasize the one factor which has remained favorable and which trumps all of the concerns above: price action. Unfortunately for the bulls, this last and most crucial pillar of the bull market is now too potentially showing signs of vulnerability.

    The most bullish thing stocks can do is go up, especially to an all-time high. And as recently as last month, many of the broad stock averages were continuing to make new highs, including the Russell 2000 small cap index, the NYSE Composite, the S&P 500 Equal-Weight Index and even the NYSE Advance-Decline Line. This was important as it showed that the persistence of the bull market rally was evident across a wide range of stocks, not just a few top-heavy large cap indexes.

    Another broad index at new highs was the Value Line Geometric Composite (VLG). The VLG is an unweighted index of approximately 1700 stocks and is a favorite of ours in gauging the level of participation among the broad universe of stocks. We posted a piece on it July 2 of last year noting the fact that it was bumping against the same level that saw the index top out at in both 1998 and 2007. Sure enough, the VLG peaked the very next day, setting up the makings of a possible but most improbable 26-year triple top. That July peak held until February when the index finally broke above the triple top level. After a test of the breakout level in March, the index moved to new highs again in April. However, over the last few weeks, the VLG’s triple top breakout has shown initial signs of cracking.

     

    The recent bout of market weakness has hit the small cap stocks especially hard. This has had an impact on the VLG. Not only has the index now lost the level signifying the 26-year triple top, it has also violated the up trendline from the October low of last year.

     

    Now of course this weakness is very short-term and does not guarantee the longer-term failure at these levels. That is why we say it is showing “initial” signs of cracking. Who knows, the index could be up 4% next week to an all-time high and this development will be irrelevant. However, considering the level at which this weakness is occurring as well as the list concerns already in place, the risk is that this too will develop into trouble of a longer-term nature. It would also put the 26-year triple top potential back on the table considering the possible false breakout.

    This, again, is just a preliminary breakdown in price. However, it is concerning as positive price action has been the one remaining pillar supporting the bull market – and the only one that can overcome all of the ancillary concerns pertaining to stocks. However, it too is potentially starting to show some cracks.



  • Belligerent US Refuses To Cede Control Over IMF In Snub To China

    One story that’s been covered extensively in these pages over the past several months is the emergence of the China-led Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank. The bank began to attract quite a bit of attention in early March when the UK decided, much to Washington’s chagrin, to make a bid for membership. The dominoes fell quickly after that and within a month it was quite clear that The White House’s effort to discourage its allies from supporting the new institution had failed in dramatic fashion. 

    Since then, China has been careful not to jeopardize the overwhelming support the bank has received. While Beijing is keen on expanding China’s regional influence and promoting the widespread use of the yuan, downplaying the idea that the new bank will become a tool of Chinese foreign policy is critical if it hopes to enjoy the long-term support of the many traditional US allies who have become early adopters so to speak. Similarly, China must be sensitive to the perception that the AIIB is the first step towards usurping the dollar as the world’s reserve currency and although Beijing has dispelled the notion of “yuan hegemony” as nonsensical, it’s clear that the renminbi will play a key role in loans made from the new bank. 

    So while the AIIB certainly represents an attempt on China’s part to realize its regional ambitions (what we’ve described as the establishment of a Sino-Monroe Doctrine) and carve out a foothold for the yuan on the global stage, it’s also a product of Washington’s failure to adapt to a changing world. That is, the establishment of new supranational lenders suggests the US-dominated multilateral institutions that have characterized the post-war world are proving unable (for whatever reason) to meet the needs of modernity.

    Nowhere is this more apparent than the IMF, where reforms aimed at making the Fund more reflective of its membership have been stymied by Congressional ineptitude for years. As Bloomberg reports, the US has apparently learned very little from the AIIB experience:

    The Obama administration signaled it won’t jeopardize the U.S. power to veto IMF decisions to achieve its goal of giving China and other emerging markets more clout at the lender, according to people familiar with the matter.

     

    That message was delivered at the International Monetary Fund’s spring meetings in Washington last month, the people said, where officials discussed how to overcome congressional opposition to a 2010 plan to overhaul the lender’s voting structure.

     

    A solution backed by Brazil would have enabled an end-run around Congress — while potentially sacrificing the veto the U.S. has held since World War II. With that option off the table, the people said, IMF member nations are considering a watered-down proposal that risks alienating China and India, which are already challenging the postwar economic order by setting up their own lending and development institutions…

     

    The 2010 plan calls for increasing the emerging markets’ sway through a doubling of the IMF’s capital, with the U.S. contribution subject to approval by Congress. Without that approval, the plan wouldn’t have the support of the required 85 percent of members’ voting shares, because the U.S. has 16.7 percent. Voting rights are proportional to capital shares at the fund.

     

    China, the world’s second-largest economy, currently ranks sixth in its voting shares at the IMF, behind Japan, Germany, France and the U.K. Under the 2010 plan, China would jump to third, while India would climb to eighth from 11th and Brazil would move up four spots to 10th.

     

    The option backed by Brazil and other countries would have pushed through the changes without requiring Congress to ratify them. The catch was that the U.S. veto over major IMF decisions may have been at risk if Congress failed to react by approving the 2010 plan, because America’s voting share would potentially fall below the 15 percent threshold needed to maintain the power…

     

    The fund is now considering a capital increase of just 10 percent, said the people familiar with the matter, who asked not to be identified because the discussions are confidential. Most of the boost would go to emerging nations that are underrepresented based on the size of their economies.

     

    The solution is unlikely to satisfy some emerging economies because the capital increase is too small, said Truman, now a senior fellow at the Peterson Institute for International Economics in Washington.

     

    In a column last month, former U.S. Treasury Secretary Lawrence Summers cited Congress’s failure to pass the IMF reforms as one of the reasons why China is pushing to reshape the global economic order with new institutions such as the Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank.

    *  *  *

    In many ways, the above represents everything that’s wrong in Washington. First, Congress’ famous inability to do what they were elected to do (i.e. legislate) is on full display. Second, the President is unwilling to bypass an ineffectual group of lawmakers in the name of accomplishing something worthwile because the end-around would require the US to give up absolute control over an institution that by its very nature should not be controlled by one nation. Finally, you have yet another example of the US learning absolutely nothing from egregious foreign policy mistakes even when they occurred less than two months ago. 

    This is all par for the course in Washington so we suppose the real question is what this means for China’s IMF SDR bid. That is, will Beijing simply lose interest if the US-controlled IMF can’t agree on a structure which reflects China’s growing influence on the world stage? 



  • Martin Armstrong Warns Of The Coming Crash Of All Crashes

    Submitted by Martin Armstrong via Armstrong Economics,

    Why are governments rushing to eliminate cash?

    During previous recoveries following the recessionary declines, the central banks were able to build up their credibility and ammunition so to speak by raising interest rates during the recovery. This time, ever since we began moving toward Transactional Banking with the repeal of Glass Steagall in 1999, banks have looked at profits rather than their role within the economic landscape.

    They shifted to structuring products and no longer was there any relationship with the client. This reduced capital formation for it has been followed by rising unemployment among the youth and/or their inability to find jobs within their fields of study. The VELOCITY of money peaked with our Economic Confidence Model 1998.55 turning point from which we warned of the pending crash in Russia.

     

    The damage inflicted with the collapse of Russia and the implosion of Long-Term Capital Management in the end of 1998, has demonstrated that the VELOCITY of money has continued to decline.

    Long-Term Capital Managment

     

    There has been no long-term recovery. This current mild recovery in the USA has been shallow at best and as the rest of the world declines still from the 2007.15 high with a target low in 2020, the Federal Reserve has been unable to raise interest rates sufficiently to demonstrate any recovery for the spreads at the banks between bid and ask for money is also at historical highs. Banks will give secured car loans at around 4% while their cost of funds is really 0%. This is the widest spread between bid and ask since the Panic of 1899.

    We face a frightening collapse in the VELOCITY of money and all this talk of eliminating cash is in part due to the rising hoarding of cash by households both in the USA and Europe.

    This is a major problem for the central banks have also lost control of the ability to stimulate anything.The loss of traditional stimulus ability by the central banks is now threatening the nationalization of banks be it directly, or indirectly.

    We face a cliff that government refuses to acknowledge and their solution will be to grab more power – never reform.



  • Is This The Chart Of A Healthy Stock Market?

    Submitted by Charles Hugh-Smith of OfTwoMinds blog,

    If fundamentals like profits and sales no longer matter, then all that’s left is faith that central banks will never let stock markets fall ever again. 

    Is this the chart of a healthy stock market? The consensus view is either 1) yes, by definition, because charts don’t matter because the central banks will never let markets fall ever again, or 2) the market has been choppy due to a “soft patch” in the economy, which is about to start growing at 3% instead of .3%.
    Nice, but this chart says distribution to me: beneath the jolly surface of new highs, the smart money is selling to greater fools who believe the consensus.
     
    This chart is characterized by lengthy chop-fests in which wild gyrations up and down make a mockery of trends.December 2014 to January 2015 was such a chop-fest, and March to May has been another chop-fest in which Bulls have been unable to put together an uptrend of more than a few days.
    The script for insiders distributing (selling) shares to greater fools hasn’t changed in decades. First, juice the market higher with some big orders, then sell into that buying until the market weakens. Reverse the downtrend with another big order, and then resume selling.
    This process is even easier in the current era of high-frequency trading and machines executing most of the trades. A few big buy orders is all that’s needed to trigger more buy orders from the trading bots, which are essentially trend-followers, and the smart money can sell into that automated buying.
    Despite the occasional new closing high that’s notched to assure the greater fools who have been buying, the market has gone nowhere for months. Beneath the surface, many market internals have been weakening for months–for example, MACD and Chaiken Money Flow.
    Those selling into strength can always cherry-pick some market internal that supports the Bull case–if you were selling, wouldn’t you encourage buyers to take the shares you’re dumping off your hands?
    Wedges usually break big up or down The current wedge has been formed by the Bulls inability to break out decisively into a new uptrend and the distributors managing to limit any declines lest the herd of greater fools get spooked by the deteriorating fundamentals of stagnating profits, sales, etc. or the painfully obvious blow-off tops forming in global markets.
    If fundamentals like profits and sales no longer matter, then all that’s left is faith that central banks will never let stock markets fall ever again. Never, ever; that is of course the language of fairy tales.



  • Leading German Keynesian Economist Calls For Cash Ban

    It’s official: the world has gone central-planner crazy. 

    Monetary policy, whether in the form of “conventional” methods such as the micromanagement of policy rates or so-called “unconventional” measures such as QE, has proven utterly ineffective when it comes to both “smoothing out” the business cycle and reigniting economic growth in the wake of severe downturns. If anything, recent history has shown the exact opposite to be true. That is, the Fed helped to engineer the housing bubble and has now succeeded in inflating a similar bubble in stocks and fixed income. Meanwhile, the Japanese experience with QE has plunged the country into what we have affectionately dubbed “The Kuroda Zone”, wherein the BoJ has cornered both the stock and bond markets while failing to promote wage growth or meaningfully raise inflation expectations. In China, the PBoC has taken to cutting policy rates at the first sign of weakness in the stock market, helping to sustain what will perhaps go down in history as the second coming of the tulip bulb mania, while the ECB has taken the insane step of adopting a trillion euro bond buying program while simultaneously demanding fiscal discipline, meaning the central bank’s bond monetization efforts are set against a backdrop of meager supply.

    In sum, the collective actions of the world’s most influential central banks have done wonders when it comes to inflating asset bubbles but have done very little to revive robust economic growth. In fact, far from smoothing out the business cycle and resuscitating DM demand, post-crisis monetary policy has actually had the exact opposite effect: it has set the stage for an even more spectacular collapse while simultaneously creating a worldwide deflationary supply glut.

    At this stage, a sane person might be tempted to call it a day on the monetary experiments, especially considering that at this point, the limits have been reached. That is, there are literally no more assets to buy and rates have hit the effective lower bound where rational actors will eschew bank deposits in favor of the mattress. But not so fast, say folks like Citi’s Willem Buiter and economist Ken Rogoff: the world could always ban cash because if you eliminate physical currency and force people to use a debit card linked to a government controlled bank account for all transactions, you can effectively centrally plan everything. Consumers not spending? No problem. Just tax their excess account balance. Economy overheating? Again, no problem. Raise the interest paid on account holdings to encourage people to stop spending. So with Citi, Harvard, and Denmark all onboard, we bring you the latest call for a cashless society, this time from German economist and member of the German Council Of Economic Experts Peter Bofinger.

    Via Spiegel (Google translated):

    Coins and bills are obsolete and only reduce the influence of central banks. This position represents the economy Peter Bofinger. The federal government should stand up for the abolition of cash, he calls in the mirror…

     

    The economy Peter Bofinger campaigns for the abolition of cash. “With today’s technical possibilities coins and notes are in fact an anachronism,” Bofinger told SPIEGEL.

     

    If these away, the markets for undeclared work and drugs could be dried out. In addition, it would have the central banks easier to enforce its monetary policy.The teaching in Würzburg economics professor called on the federal government to promote at the international level for the abolition of cash. “That would certainly be a good topic for the agenda of the G-7 summit in Elmau,” he said. (Click here to read the full interview in the new mirror .)

     

    Even the former US Treasury Secretary Larry Summers and economist pleaded for an end to the already cash . Likewise, the US economist Kenneth Rogoff . He also argued that the interest rates of central banks have less clout when banks or consumer credit rather than hoard cash.

     

    Critics warn, however , such debates would only distract from the real problems of the current monetary policy.

    Yes, the “real problems” with current monetary policy. Like the fact that by design it can’t possibly work (but it can and will push stocks to unprecedented highs). Paging Mr. Weidmann, your countrymen are going Keynesian crazy.



  • A PiCTuRe OF THe FuTuRe…



Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News May 17, 2015

  • Central Planning Goes Global As UN Unveils Major Sustainable Development Agenda "For The Good Of The Planet"

    Submitted by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    The UN plans to launch a brand new plan for managing the entire globe at the Sustainable Development Summit that it will be hosting from September 25th to September 27th.  Some of the biggest names on the planet, including Pope Francis, will be speaking at this summit.  This new sustainable agenda focuses on climate change of course, but it also specifically addresses topics such as economics, agriculture, education and gender equality.  For those wishing to expand the scope of “global governance”, sustainable development is the perfect umbrella because just about all human activity affects the environment in some way.  The phrase “for the good of the planet” can be used as an excuse to micromanage virtually every aspect of our lives.

    So for those that are concerned about the growing power of the United Nations, this summit in September is something to keep an eye on.  Never before have I seen such an effort to promote a UN summit on the environment, and this new sustainable development agenda is literally a framework for managing the entire globe.

    If you are not familiar with this new sustainable development agenda, the following is what the official United Nations website says about it…

    The United Nations is now in the process of defining Sustainable Development Goals as part a new sustainable development agenda that must finish the job and leave no one behind. This agenda, to be launched at the Sustainable Development Summit in September 2015, is currently being discussed at the UN General Assembly, where Member States and civil society are making contributions to the agenda.

     

    The process of arriving at the post 2015 development agenda is Member State-led with broad participation from Major Groups and other civil society stakeholders. There have been numerous inputs to the agenda, notably a set of Sustainable Development Goals proposed by an open working group of the General Assembly, the report of an intergovernmental committee of experts on sustainable development financing, General Assembly dialogues on technology facilitation and many others.

    Posted below are the 17 sustainable development goals that are being proposed so far.  Some of them seem quite reasonable.  After all, who wouldn’t want to “end poverty”.  But as you go down this list, you soon come to realize that just about everything is involved in some way.  In other words, this truly is a template for radically expanded “global governance”.  Once again, this was taken directly from the official UN website

    1. End poverty in all its forms everywhere

    2. End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition, and promote sustainable agriculture

    3. Ensure healthy lives and promote wellbeing for all at all ages

    4. Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all

    5. Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls

    6. Ensure availability and sustainable management of water and sanitation for all

    7. Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all

    8. Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment, and decent work for all

    9. Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialisation, and foster innovation

    10. Reduce inequality within and among countries

    11. Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable

    12. Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns

    13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts (taking note of agreements made by the UNFCCC forum)

    14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas and marine resources for sustainable development

    15. Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems, sustainably manage forests, combat desertification and halt and reverse land degradation, and halt biodiversity loss

    16. Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, provide access to justice for all and build effective, accountable and inclusive institutions at all levels

    17. Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalise the global partnership for sustainable development

    As you can see, this list goes far beyond “saving the environment” or “fighting climate change”.

    It truly covers just about every realm of human activity.

    Another thing that makes this new sustainable development agenda different is the unprecedented support that it is getting from the Vatican and from Pope Francis himself.

    In fact, Pope Francis is actually going to travel to the UN and give an address to kick off the Sustainable Development Summit on September 25th

    His Holiness Pope Francis will visit the UN on 25 September 2015, and give an address to the UN General Assembly immediately ahead of the official opening of the UN Summit for the adoption of the post-2015 development agenda.

    This Pope has been very open about his belief that climate change is one of the greatest dangers currently facing our world.  Just a couple of weeks ago, he actually brought UN Secretary General Ban Ki-moon to the Vatican to speak about climate change and sustainable development.  Here is a summary of what happened…

    On 28 April, the Secretary-General met with His Holiness Pope Francis at the Vatican and later addressed senior religious leaders, along with the Presidents of Italy and Ecuador, Nobel laureates and leading scientists on climate change and sustainable development.

     

    Amidst an unusually heavy rainstorm in Rome, participants at the historic meeting gathered within the ancient Vatican compound to discuss what the Secretary-General has called the “defining challenge of our time.”

     

    The mere fact that a meeting took place between the religious and scientific communities on climate change was itself newsworthy. That it took place at the Vatican, was hosted by the Pontifical Academy of Sciences, and featured the Secretary-General as the keynote speaker was all the more striking.

    In addition, Pope Francis is scheduled to release a major encyclical this summer which will be primarily focused on the environment and climate change.  The following comes from the New York Times

    The much-anticipated environmental encyclical that Pope Francis plans to issue this summer is already being translated into the world’s major languages from the Latin final draft, so there’s no more tweaking to be done, several people close to the process have told me in recent weeks.

    I think that we can get a good idea of the kind of language that we will see in this encyclical from another Vatican document which was recently released.  It is entitled “Climate Change and The Common Good”, and it was produced by the Pontifical Academy of Sciences and the Pontifical Academy of Social Sciences.  The following is a brief excerpt

    Unsustainable consumption coupled with a record human population and the uses of inappropriate technologies are causally linked with the destruction of the world’s sustainability and resilience. Widening inequalities of wealth and income, the world-wide disruption of the physical climate system and the loss of millions of species that sustain life are the grossest manifestations of unsustainability. The continued extraction of coal, oil and gas following the “business-as-usual mode” will soon create grave existential risks for the poorest three billion, and for generations yet unborn. Climate change resulting largely from unsustainable consumption by about 15% of the world’s population has become a dominant moral and ethical issue for society. There is still time to mitigate unmanageable climate changes and repair ecosystem damages, provided we reorient our attitude toward nature and, thereby, toward ourselves. Climate change is a global problem whose solution will depend on our stepping beyond national affiliations and coming together for the common good. Such transformational changes in attitudes would help foster the necessary institutional reforms and technological innovations for providing the energy sources that have negligible effect on global climate, atmospheric pollution and eco-systems, thus protecting generations yet to be born. Religious institutions can and should take the lead in bringing about that change in attitude towards Creation.

     

    The Catholic Church, working with the leadership of other religions, can now take a decisive role by mobilizing public opinion and public funds to meet the energy needs of the poorest 3 billion people, thus allowing them to prepare for the challenges of unavoidable climate and eco-system changes. Such a bold and humanitarian action by the world’s religions acting in unison is certain to catalyze a public debate over how we can integrate societal choices, as prioritized under UN’s sustainable development goals, into sustainable economic development pathways for the 21st century, with projected population of 10 billion or more.

    Under this Pope, the Vatican has become much more political than it was before, and sustainable development has become the Vatican’s number one political issue.

    And did you notice the language about “the world’s religions acting in unison”?  Clearly, the Vatican believes that it has the power to mobilize religious leaders all over the planet and have them work together to achieve the “UN’s sustainable development goals”.

    I can never remember a time when the United Nations and the largest religious institution on the planet, the Catholic Church, have worked together so closely.

    So what will the end result of all this be?

    Should we be concerned about this new sustainable development agenda?



  • How Japan Became The Benchmark For America's Fraudulent "Jobs Recovery"

    It was one month ago when we showed how, thanks to a lot of statistical sleight of hand, Japan had completely “revised” one year of increasing nominal base wages to declining or flat at best, confirming that all the much-touted wage “improvements” heading into the Japanese election of late 2014 in which Abe was reelected by a wide margin had been purposefully fabricated to give the impression that Abenomics is working, when in reality it was… well, see the pre- and post-revision data for yourselves:

     

    If that had been the full extent of Japan’s labor data fabrication we would speak no more of it, however the rabbit hole goes much, much deeper.

    As a reminder, in Japan where the Nikkei has been soaring ever since the Bank of Japan decided to crush the Japanese Yen the one missing component from the promised Abenomics recovery has been wage growth, because without rising wages there can be no sustained benign inflation of the kind that the Keynesian brains behind Abenomics require to proclaim success.

    This is how Goldman summarized what the virtuous feedback loop of rising wages should look like:

    The BOJ’s ultimate goal is to realize the following positive cycle: Increase in actual prices -> rise in inflation expectations -> wage hikes -> boost to consumer spending / improvement in corporate earnings -> inflation -> rise in inflation expectations -> sustained wage hikes in the corporate sector. The underlying notion is that the pursuit of both high wage growth and high inflation expectation ensures stable inflation

    That’s the theory. The reality is far different because some two years after the start of Abenomics and the launch of Japan’s QE, nominal wages are about where they were when Abenomics started, while indexed real wages have never been lower!

    The paradox of Japan’s lack of wage increases become particularly glaring when one considers that just like in the US, Japan recently reported a post-Lehman low unemployment rate of just 3.4%, in fact in Japan this was  the lowest print since 1997. As the following employment indicators suggest, the Japanese labor market should be tighter than at any point in the 21st century, suggesting wage inflation should be rampant:

    In the US the most recent unemployment rate was 5.4%, about as close to full employment as possible, and yet neither in Japan nor in the US has there been any wage improvement.

    So how does one explain the paradox of a labor market that at least quantitatively has no further slack and yet where real wage growth has never been lower. Simple, and incidentally the explanation is one which Zero Hedge provided all the way back in 2010 when we charted “America’s Transformation To A Part-Time Worker Society.”

    It turns out that in Japan the answer is the same, only when one peeks beyond the merely quantitative and into the qualitative, it is worse. Much, much worse. As the following chart shows, virtually all the job growth in Japan since the great financial crisis has been thanks to part-time jobs!

     

    This is Goldman’s explanation which comes 5 years after our own:

    As Exhibit 4 demonstrates, growth in the number of full-time permanent workers has more or less leveled off since the 2008 Global Financial Crisis, whereas the number of part-time workers in Japan has risen consistently over the last decade. Having accounted for 20.3% of Japan’s workforce in 2005, part-timers made up 25.1% of the labor market in 2014 (this substantial increase contrasts with far weaker growth in the ratio of nonpermanent full-time workers such as contingent and temporary staff, to 11.5% from 10.3%).

     

    Japan’s part-time worker ratio now exceeds that of the US and the EU average; nevertheless, the Japanese labor market had been characterized by the high fraction of permanent workers in the past. What this essentially means is that growth in part-time workers has persistently depressed Japan’s average wage over the last decade. Exhibit 5 … illustrates that the decline in average wages due to the shift to part-time labor began in the mid-1990s at the latest and continues to this day. We calculate that growth in part-time labor depresses the average wage by 0.5pp a year.

    As a reminder, in the most recent BLS report, part-time jobs in the US once again surged, and have been the only source of incremental job growth since the start of the last recession in December 2007. As we showed, full-time jobs have yet to recover their prior cycle peak, which is the glarinly obvious answer for anyone still surprised why there is no wage gains in the US.

     

    But if you thought the US was bad, in Japan things are – as one would expect of any economy approaching a state of terminal, demographically-facilitated collapse – far, far worse. Back to Goldman:

    If companies have been hiring more part-timer workers simply to cut labor costs in line with a slowing economy, then the ratio of part-time workers should in theory fall as the economy recovers, lifting overall wages. In the US, the part-time worker ratio correlates closely with the macro economy (Exhibit 6). In Japan, however, the ratio of part-time workers has risen more or less consistently, suggesting that besides the economic cycle, structural factors are also playing a part.

     

     

    At this point Goldman’s economists do the usual thing and spend days of research investigating an answer that is so simple a five year old can figure it out after a few seconds of contemplation. And sure enough, the primary reason why companies prefer to hire part-time workers over full-timers is, drumroll, they are cheaper.

     

    Finally, recall another persistent theme which sadly only Zero Hedge appears to be focusing on: namely that all the hiring since the Financial Crisis has been for workers 55 and older.

     

    The apologists consistently, and erroneously, explain this with “demographics”, even though the participation rate of young workers has collapsed, suggesting it is the younger who simply no longer have a motive or a desire to remain in the work force, while that of old workers has remained largely flat since 2007 as more and more old Americans realize they will never be able to retire under ZIRP and as a result will have to work until their death.

     

    Well, now we have confirmation that the surge in hiring of older, part-time workers has little to do with demographic transitions and everything to do with the simplest possible explanation: they are cheap!

    Enter the case of Japan, where Goldman finally has a long, long overdue epiphany:

    What drew our attention in Exhibit 8 are two responses that rose between the 2006 and 2011 surveys: The re-employment of retirees, and the re-employment of full-time staff who left for family reasons, most likely getting married or having children (the number of businesses that cited labor cost savings as a reason for hiring part-timers has declined considerably).

     

    This suggests to us a change in the structure of part-time employment in recent years. Employers generally recruited part-time staff in the past as a means of reining in labor costs. However, Exhibit 8 reveals that more recently, part-time hiring is increasingly being used as a means of employing senior citizens or re-employing housewives. In Exhibit 9, we see that the increase in part-time hiring over the last decade has been largely driven by senior citizens and housewives entering the labor market.

     

    Here is Goldman’s admission that Zero Hedge was correct about what lay in store for America some 5 years ago, by looking at the labor dynamics in Japan:

    We attribute this trend to three factors. First is a shift to part-time labor among the elderly generation as Japan’s population ages. Baby boomers – the generation of Japanese born in 1947-1949 – began to turn 60 in 2007 and started retiring around the same period, raising concerns about the so-called “2007 problem” namely a labor shortage in the corporate sector. In the event, major turmoil in the labor market was averted as companies extended employment beyond 60. Five years later, however, the “2012 problem” arose as the same baby boomers turned 65.

     

    Having raised the pensionable age, Japan passed an amended Act on Stabilization of Employment of Elderly Persons in April 2013 that requires companies to offer employment through to 65 for those seeking to work beyond 60. When extending the period of employment, however, companies are under no obligation to offer the same terms that existed before. With the agreement of the employee and employer, companies can switch to a non-permanent arrangement in the form of short-time, contract, or part-time employment (most companies re-employ retirees on non-permanent contracts to reduce their wage bill).

     

    Second – and also linked to the aging population – is that both elderly men and women are remaining in the labor market to supplement a decline in income due to cuts in pension payments. Japan began raising the pensionable age in the early 2000s, meaning that the current generation of people in their 60s faces fewer pension payments. Pension cuts have gained further traction since April 20134, and the labor participation rate among people in their 60s has accordingly risen at a faster rate over the past two years. For senior citizens aged 65-69, the labor participation rate has reached 42% (FY2014 average, versus a FY2000 average of 37%). How this generation is employed has also changed notably over the past 15 years: whereas in 2000 around 50% of people aged 65-69 were self-employed/family workers, by 2014 the ratio of employees had reached almost 75%.

     

    Third, female labor participation rates are rising in all age groups except women under 25, as Womenomics manifests itself. Exhibit 9 shows a marked increase in part-time female workers in their 40s and 60s. A key factor is the impact of a rise in the labor participation rate within this more populous generation (of baby boomers and junior baby boomers).

    To summarize the Japanese economic recovery under Abenomics (and before): all the labor growth has been thanks to senior citizens and housewives. And this comprises the bulk of the surge in part-time jobs, which as shown above, is the only component of Japan’s employed workers that has grown. As a result, Japan’s real wages are the lowest in history.

    And now to summarize the US labor picture as well: more part-time workers, and more old workers.

    In other words, Japanification is truly coming to the US, and unfortunately in the one place where it hurts the most: the labor market. And not just any labor market, but one which is touted by the press as improving which while perhaps true quantitatively, is absolutely false qualitatively: in fact, if one extends the Japanese comparison to its logical conclusion, real wages in the US are due to tumble in the coming months and years as the Japanese economic and demographic reality is unrolled in the US.

    Precisely as we warned in 2010.

    But the biggest problem is not that the underlying economics is devastating when one looks behind the populist headlines. It is that both in Japan and in the US, the mainstream economists – who we can only hope are not all idiots, and can figure out what even Goldman now sees – are engaging in open fraud when spinning disastrous labor trends into what the mainstream press touts is a “labor recovery.”

    But at least we know the reason: recall that for Janet Yellen the only “data-dependent” economic indicator which holds back a rate hike is the lack of wage growth. And as long as there are no rate hikes, the Fed and other central banks will continue flooding the global markets with trillions in liquidity while keeping rates at 0% or negative, pushing global stock markets and asset prices to ever recorder highs.

    Who benefits from this fraud? Why the 1% of course, because while the hope for 99% of the population – and the lie – remains that wage growth is just around the corner – a story repeated in 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014 and 2015… and which will be repeated in the coming years without a doubt – who benefits from this fraudulent status quo here and now? Those who could care less if the average wages for everyone continue crashing, does care very much that the S&P 500 hits another record high tomorrow and the day after.

    And as long as the fraud behind wage growth, and the lack thereof, remains, they will get precisely what they want, with the blessings of every central bank in the world.



  • Not ISIS? Saudi Arabia To Execute & Display Beheaded Body Of Political Activist In Public "Crucifixion"

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    Screen Shot 2015-05-15 at 12.16.55 PM

    One of the ways that the U.S. government most clearly expresses its deep dedication to global human rights, democracy and decency across the globe is via its unwavering support for the feudal, inhumane tyrannical monarchy of Saudi Arabia. A monarchy that also increasingly seems to have played a key role in the attacks of September 11, 2001.

    The Saudis have received a lot of bad press as of late due to it consistently breaking its own records for beheadings, but sometimes a simple beheading isn’t sufficient. In a punishment known as “crucifixion,” the executed person’s beheaded body is placed on public display for three days. Currently facing this fate are three political activists, including two children. We learn from Reprieve.org that:

    Saudi Arabia has been urged to spare the lives of two juveniles and an ageing political activist, after plans emerged to execute at least one of them this Thursday (14th).

     

    Sheikh Nimr Baqir Al Nimr, a 53-year old critic of the Saudi regime, and two juveniles, Ali Mohammed al-Nimr and Dawoud Hussain al-Marhoon, were arrested during a 2012 crackdown on anti-government protests in the Shiite province of Qatif. After a trial marred by irregularities, Mr Al Nimr was sentenced to death by crucifixion on charges including ‘insulting the King’ and delivering religious sermons that ‘disrupt national unity’. This week, it emerged that the authorities plan to execute him on Thursday, despite protests from the UN and Saudi human rights organizations.

     

    The planned execution of Mr Al Nimr has prompted fears for the safety of the two juveniles, who were both 17 when they were arrested and eventually sentenced to death on similar charges. Both teenagers were tortured and denied access to lawyers, and faced trials that failed to meet international standards. All three prisoners, including Mr Al Nimr, have not yet exhausted their legal appeals.

     

    Saudi Arabia has carried out executions at an unprecedented rate since the coming to power of King Salman in 2015. On May 6th 2015, the Kingdom carried out its 79th execution of the year, and it is already close to surpassing its 2014 total of 87 executions. Human rights organization Reprieve has urged the European Union to intervene with Saudi Arabia to prevent the killings.

    It isn’t clear whether or not this execution has happened. As Vox notes:

    Saudi Arabia is set to behead a man and publicly display his headless body (a practice called “crucifixion” in Saudi law) — for nothing more than speaking his mind. Sheikh Nimr Baqir al-Nimr, an internationally respected Shia cleric, was sentenced to death for “disobeying the ruler,” “inciting sectarian strife,” and “encouraging, leading and participating in demonstrations.” His actual crime: participating in nonviolent protests and calling for the fall of the house of Saud.

     

    It’s not clear when the Saudis plan on executing al-Nimr: the country has a habit of both postponing executions and carrying them out without very much warning. But the case illustrates a basic fact about one of America’s closest allies in the Middle East: its system of capital punishment is one of the cruelest on earth.

    Meanwhile, publicly at least, the U.S. government remains as committed to the Saudis as ever. We learn the following from National Journal:

    CAMP DAVID, Md.—Of the six Arab leaders invited to the summit, one was too busy, two called in sick, and a fourth skipped it to go to a horse show instead.

     

    The Gulf Cooperation Council conference was nevertheless “the beginning of a new era of cooperation,” President Obama declared Thursday after a daylong series of meetings.

     

    Obama laid out five points of agreement among all the countries, top among them a commitment by the United States to respond to an “external threat” to any of the nations’ territorial integrity, which could include the use of military force, as well as the development of a ballistic-missile defense for the Gulf nations. “And let me underscore, the United States keeps our commitments,” Obama said.

    The Saudi highlight reel is a long one.

    Here are a few examples:

    The New York Post Reports – FBI is Covering Up Saudi Links to 9/11 Attack

    New Saudi King Unveils Internal Power Shake-up in Desperate Pivot Toward Increased Authoritarianism

    Already 45 Beheadings in 2015 – Saudi Arabia on Pace to Easily Beat 2014’s Decapitation Level

    Saudi Arabia Sentences 3 Lawyers to Jail for Tweets

    Record Beheadings and the Mass Arrest of Christians – Is it ISIS? No it’s Saudi Arabia

    How the NSA is Actively Helping Saudi Arabia to Crackdown on Dissent

    Saudi Arabia Passes New Law that Declares Atheists “Terrorists”



  • Europe Explained (In 1 Image)

    But, but, but… Q€…

     

     

    Source: Investors.com



  • One Gauge Of Investor Sentiment Just Hit A 6-Year High

    Via Dana Lyons' Tumblr,

    There’s no question that the general level of stock investor sentiment is at historically high levels at this time. However, I think it’s probably safe to say that much of this bullishness has accrued gradually due to the cumulative stock market gains over the past 6 years. What has largely been absent, though, despite the elevated sentiment are examples of veritable investor euphoria. We are talking about bursts of frenzied, “get-me-in-at-all-costs” type of buying behavior. We did see traces of it over the past 2 years, especially in early 2013, but nothing consistent. Yesterday, however, we did see a possible example of this type of euphoria from the International Securities Exchange.

    We have mentioned the ISE several times over the past year as their options ratios have become favorites of ours in gauging short to intermediate-term investor sentiment. The ISE “Equity” Call/Put Ratio has been especially helpful, at times, in identifying extremes in short-term sentiment. This series has decent volume and behaves in an orderly, “normal” fashion that renders its extremes particularly valid as accurate measures of sentiment. The “Index & ETF” Call/Put Ratio (the ISE uses call volume in its numerator as opposed to the denominator like most sources do) has at times been helpful as well. However, it has mostly been too erratic to be consistently reliable. That said, the reading of this ratio yesterday was so extreme that we thought it was worthy of today’s Chart Of The Day.

    Specifically, the ISE Index & ETF Call/Put Ratio registered its highest reading (228) in over 6 years. 

     

    image

     

    At 228, the reading means that call volume at the ISE was more than double put volume. In the last 6 years, that is just the 4th time that has occurred. These are the dates of all of the readings above 180 since 2009, along with the aftermath in the S&P 500.

    • July 20, 2011 The S&P 500 hit a high the following day before dropping 16% over 12 days.
    • November 28, 2011 The exception as the S&P 500 was jumping off a short-term low and would rally 6% over the next week.
    • September 7 & 14, 2012 The S&P 500 hit a high on the 14th and proceeded to drop nearly 8% in the next 2 months.
    • January 22, 2015 The S&P 500 hit a high that day before dropping 3.3% over 6 days.

    So one can see why yesterday’s reading would make us take notice. It hasn’t been unanimous, but 3 of the 4 other readings above 180 in the past 6 years led to immediate selling pressure, some mild and short-term and some more serious and over the intermediate-term.

    Now, there are some obvious asterisks we would place on this study. For one, the November 2011 event led to more buying instead of selling. Secondly, as we mentioned, this series has been very erratic throughout the years and thus, hard to depend on. And third, consider the last time this indicator flashed readings this high: March 9 & 11, 2009. Of course, that was THE exact cyclical market low. So what gives? We’re not sure. The ETF’s that received the highest volume on those days were essentially the same as those from yesterday. Perhaps this particular exchange was used by unique market participants or for alternate options strategies at the time that reflected non-contrarian sentiment extremes instead.

    Whatever the reason, over the past 4 years, the ISE Index & ETF Call/Put Ratio has typically been a contrarian indicator, when at extremes. Thus, yesterday’s most bullish reading in 6 years is likely not a welcomed sign for stock market bulls. It could be an example of the euphoric type of investor behavior that has been mostly missing from the general bullish sentiment picture. A few more of these examples and we would really be concerned about stocks in the immediate-term.



  • What Goldman Is Telling Its Clients: Sell In May And Don't Come Back For One Year

    While Goldman gives the following explicit warning in all of its public research pieces: “Our asset management area, our proprietary trading desks and investing businesses may make investment decisions that are inconsistent with the recommendations or views expressed in this research”, the reality is that in recent months Goldman’s chief equity strategist David Kostin has been getting increasingly “toppish” if not outright bearish on stocks. In his latest report he now openly warns that “the market will rise to 2150 by mid-year but fade after the Fed raises interest rates in September for the first time in nine years.” As a result Goldman’s “year-end forecast is 2100 and its 12-month target equals 2125.”

    Which is where the S&P 500 closed on Friday. In other words, sell in May and come back until next May.

    Here is what else Goldman is telling its buyside clients:

    During the last 50 years, dividends accounted for nearly 80% of the total return generated by US equities. The proportion fell to 45% during the past 25 years and 35% for the past decade. However, since the 2009 financial crisis lows, price return has accounted for more than 80% of the total return of the S&P 500 as the P/E multiple soared from 10.1x to 17.3x. Looking ahead, the market implies 46% of the total return for stocks during the next decade will be generated by dividends, in-line with the past quarter-century.

     

     

    The median S&P 500 stock trades at a P/E of 18.2x, the 99th percentile of historical valuation, and has limited scope for further upward expansion. Investors are looking to enhance performance by buying stocks returning cash to shareholders. We forecast S&P 500 firms will return $1 trillion to investors during 2015 via dividends and buybacks. Cash dividends will total $400 billion, a 7% increase from 2014, while buybacks will climb by 18% to $600 billion. The median S&P 500 stock trades with a 1.9% annualized dividend yield, slightly below the ten-year US Treasury note yield of 2.2%.

     

    In addition to high dividend yields, investors are also looking to boost returns by finding stocks growing dividends at a rapid pace. The median S&P 500 stock is expected to grow its dividend by 8% annually during the next two years. However, with record levels of cash on corporate balance sheets, many firms are increasing dividends at a much faster clip.

     

    The dividend swap market foreshadowed by more than six months the underperformance of shares in our dividend growth basket. The rebound in the dividend swap market at the start of 2015 presaged by two months the recent rally in our dividend growth basket.

     

    At the sector level, Telecom and Utilities offer the highest dividend yields at 4.8% and 3.7%, respectively. Information Technology and Financials account for the largest proportion of gross S&P 500 dividends paid, each at 15% of the index total. The fastest dividend growth is found in Financials, Health Care, and Consumer Discretionary, each with a 13% pace.

     

     

    The historical relationship between the cyclically-adjusted P/E multiple (currently 23.4x) and forward equity returns suggest the prospective 10-year annualized total return for the S&P 500 will be 5%. Dividend levels implied by the swap market suggest that 46% of the total return during the next ten years will be derived from dividends, and 54% from price gain.

    Which means annualized capital appreciation (i.e., price increases) over the next decade will be just about 2.5%. And that is assuming record central bank intervention. One wonders: what happens if and when the central planners finally pull the plug?



  • Chinese Hacker Spies Take Over Penn State Engineering Department, School Says

    Late last month we highlighted the US Department of Defense’s new “Cyber Strategy.” In a new directive, the Pentagon outlined the circumstances it says may warrant the deployment of cyberweapons and, taking things a step further, indicated that the use of cyberattacks as offensive weapons wasn’t out of the question. Here’s how the DoD sums up its cyber mission:

    As we noted at the time, the countries named as potential cyberadversaries come as no surprise:

    Unsurprisingly, the list of cyber adversaries is indistinguishable from what might fairly be called Washington’s “usual suspects.” The villains are: Russia, Iran, China, and North Korea. In fact, Defense Secretary Ashton Carter says the Pentagon was recently the target of a Russian “cyber intrusion” which he claims was quickly detected by a government “crack team.” 

    That “crack team” has apparently not been on the case at Penn State over the past 24 or so months, because as Bloomberg reports, Chinese hackers have apparently been perusing sensitive information stored on computers at Penn State’s College of Engineering for years. Here’s more:

    Penn State University, which develops sensitive technology for the U.S. Navy, disclosed Friday that Chinese hackers have been sifting through the computers of its engineering school for more than two years.

     

    One of the country’s largest and most productive research universities, Penn State offers a potential treasure trove of technology that’s already being developed with partners for commercial applications. The breach suggests that foreign spies could be using universities as a backdoor to U.S. commercial and defense secrets.

     

    The hackers are so deeply embedded that the engineering college’s computer network will be taken offline for several days while investigators work to eject the intruders.

    The breach, which the school’s president calls “an incredibly serious situation,” was allegedly perpetrated by what Bloomberg calls “state-sponsored hackers” acting as “foreign spies” and was reportedly uncovered by the FBI late last year. After a lengthy investigation (which cost the university millions) school officials are now concerned that information from Penn State’s Applied Research Laboratory (which has worked with the US Navy for the better part of a century) may have been compromised in the operation:

    Among Penn State’s specialties is aerospace engineering, which has both commercial and defense applications important to China’s government. The university is also home to Penn State’s Applied Research Laboratory, one of 14 research centers around the country that work mainly for the military.

     

    While the lab is not part of the College of Engineering, Jones said experts there have been alerted to the breach and are investigating whether the hackers could have moved there from those networks.

     

    Bennett said the lab’s computers are separated from the engineering college by “network-based controls,” and its personnel use different passwords. The Applied Research Lab has been doing work for the Navy since 1945 and specializes in undersea propulsion and navigation.

     

    That the hackers were in the network undetected for more than two years raises the possibility that they used connections between computers to move into more highly guarded networks, including defense contractors, government agencies or the Navy, according to the person familiar with the investigation.

    If all of that isn’t conspiratorial enough for you, then consider this:

    In addition to online activities, the Chinese have sent legions of graduate students to U.S. schools and have tried to recruit students, faculty members and others at both universities and government research facilities, several recent law-enforcement investigations show…

     

    University provost Nicholas Jones said Penn State hopes to use its experience to help other universities that are also likely targets for advanced cyberspies and other intruders, providing information on the hack as well as advanced security measures the university is putting in place.

     

    “We don’t think we’re alone,” Jones said.

    If Ashton Carter and the DoD needed an excuse to launch a cyber offensive on the way to “convincing a potential adversary that it will suffer unacceptable costs if it conducts a [cyber] attack on the United States,” we suppose this is it, because apparently, China has not only employed a vast network of sophisticated hacker spies in order to steal the blueprints for unmanned military drones and submarines from the computers of university engineering departments, but has also sent “legions” of operatives posing as graduate students to infiltrate America’s higher education system. This represents a remarkable step up the cyber attack accusation ladder compared to Washington’s attempt to blame North Korea for cyber-sabotaging James Franco and Seth Rogen.

    We will let readers determine the extent to which any of the above is grounded in reality, but if indeed China does intend to use students as instruments of espionage, we have the following message for Beijing: given the inexorable rise in US college tuition rates and your $28 trillion debt pile, China may become insolvent on the way to procuring US military secrets. 



  • The Secret Fed Paper That Advocated a "Carry Tax" on All Physical Cash

    Many commentators have noted that mainstream economists are calling to do away with cash entirely.

     

    It would be easy to scoff at these proposals as completely insane if the Fed hadn’t published a paper back in 1999 suggesting the implementation of a “carry tax” or taxing actual physical cash using an expiration date if depositors aren’t willing to spend the money.

     

    The author of this lunacy is a visiting scholar with the ECB, the Fed, the IMF, and the Swiss National Bank. The fact that two of those groups have already imposed negative interest rates (ECB and SNB) should give warning that these sorts of ideas are actually taken very seriously by Central Banks.

     

    The paper, written 16 years ago, suggested that if the Fed were to find that zero interest rates didn’t induce economic growth, it could try one of three things:

     

    1)   A carry tax (meaning tax the value of actual physical cash that is taken out of the system)

    2)   Buy assets (QE)

    3)   Money transfers (literally HAND OUT money through various vehicles)

     

    Regarding #1, the idea here is that since it costs relatively little to store physical cash (the cost of buying a safe), the Fed should be permitted to “tax” physical cash to force cash holders to spend it (put it back into the banking system) or invest it.

     

    The way this would work is that the cash would have some kind of magnetic strip that would record the date that it was withdrawn. Whenever the bill was finally deposited in a bank again, the receiving bank would use this data to deduct a certain percentage of the bill’s value as a “tax” for holding it.

     

    For instance, if the rate was 5% per month and you took out a $100 bill for two months and then deposited it, the receiving bank would only register the bill as being worth $90.25 ($100* 0.95=$95 or the first month, and then $95 *0.95= $90.25 for the second month).

     

    It sounds like absolute insanity, but I can assure you that Central Banks take these sorts of proposals very seriously.  QE sounded completely insane back in 1999 and we’ve already seen three rounds of it amounting to over $3 trillion.

     

    No one would have believed the Fed could get away with printing $3 trillion for QE in 1999, but it has happened already. And given that it has failed to boost consumer spending/ economic growth, I wouldn’t at all surprised to see the Fed float one of the other ideas in the coming months.

     

    Indeed, JP Morgan has already begun implementing a similar scheme by forbidding the storage of cash in its safe deposit boxes.

     

    As of March, Chase began restricting the use of cash in selected markets, including Greater Cleveland.  The new policy restricts borrowers from using cash to make payments on credit cards, mortgages, equity lines, and auto loans.  Chase even goes as far as to prohibit the storage of cash in its safe deposit boxes .

     

    In a letter to its customers dated April 1, 2015 pertaining to its "Updated Safe Deposit Box Lease Agreement,"  one of the highlighted items reads:  "You agree not to store any cash or coins other than those found to have a collectible value."  Whether or not this pertains to gold and silver coins with no numismatic value is not explained. 

     

    https://mises.org/blog/chase-joins-war-cash

     

    Here is the single largest bank in the US, forbidding depositors from storing cash in a storage box or safe deposit box at their bank. And virtually no one even responded in outrage.

     

    Again, the Fed has declared a War on Cash, and a “carry tax” is coming.

     

    If you’ve yet to take action to prepare for the second round of the financial crisis, we offer a FREE investment report Financial Crisis "Round Two" Survival Guide that outlines easy, simple to follow strategies you can use to not only protect your portfolio from a market downturn, but actually produce profits.

     

    You can pick up a FREE copy at:

    http://www.phoenixcapitalmarketing.com/roundtwo.html

     

    Best Regards

    Phoenix Capital Research

     

     

     

     



  • The War On Cash Destroys A Small Entrepreneur

    Submitted by Joseph Salerno via Mises Canada,

    Lyndon McClellan is a small entrepreneur who owns and operates L & M Convenience Mart in Fairmont, North Carolina.

    L & M comprises a gas station, convenience store, and a small restaurant serving hot dogs, hamburgers, and catfish sandwiches.  One day last July, more than a dozen federal, state and local law enforcement agents swarmed Mr. McClellan’s business, including agents from the FBI and the North Carolina Alcohol and Law Enforcement agency—and they were “asking” for him.  When Mr. McClellan arrived, he was escorted by two federal agents into his stock room for a private chat.  The agents showed him paperwork indicating that he had made two cash deposits totaling $11,400 within a 24-hour period in his bank account at the Lumbee Guarantee Bank.  They informed him that the papers also indicated that he had a history of “consistent cash deposits” of less than  $10,000, which was a violation of the the Federal law against “structuring.”  They also informed him that the IRS had seized all of the $107,702.66 in L & M’s bank account.

    What Mr McClellan did not know was that it was against the law to make cash deposits of lessthan $10,000.  Banks are legally obligated to report any deposit of more than $10,000 to the U.S. Treasury Department.  But if an individual makes several cash deposits of less than $10,000 over an unspecified period of time that total more than $10,000, then he is presumed to be a money launderer or drug trafficker who is committing the dastardly crime of structuring, that is, seeking to circumvent the bank’s reporting requirement and maintaining the privacy of his financial affairs Thus banks are also required to file “suspicious activity reports” on cash deposits of less than $10,000.   Based on these reports, if one is merely suspected–not convicted–of structuring, his bank account is seized by the IRS under “civil asset forfeiture” laws, which permits seizures of money or other property suspected of being related to a crime.

    Government agencies have a financial incentive to invoke civil asset forfeiture laws because the law permits the seizing agency to keep the assets and use them to expand  their activities without an appropriation from Congress.  In its insatiable hunger for funds, the IRS even  “deputizes”  state and local law enforcement agencies to go through “suspicious activities reports” in exchange for a cut of the loot subsequently seized by the IRS.  This is probably how a small entrepreneur like Mr. McClellan living peacefully in a sleepy hamlet was targeted for destruction in the War on Cash.

    Months after the seizure of his bank account, the federal government offered Mr. McClellan 50 percent of his money back if he agreed to a settlement.  He heroically refused and intends to pursue the matter in court.  Unfortunately, under the oppressive and despotic “civil asset forfeiture” laws, he bears the burden of proving his innocence.  But as he puts it:

    It’s not fair to the American people who work for a living that one day they can knock on the door, walk in their businesses, and say, ‘We just took your money’ … I always thought your money was safe in the bank, but I wouldn’t say that now.

    Neither would I!



  • Caught On Tape: Unequal Opportunity Policing In America

    Same laws, same gun, same street. What is the difference between these two Americans walking with an AR-15?

     



  • The Economist "Buries" Gold

    Submitted by Pater Tenebrarum via Acting-Man.com,

    A Proven Contrary Indicator

    In early May, the Economist has published an editorial on gold, ominously entitled “Buried”. We wanted to comment on it earlier already, but never seemed to get around to it. It is still worth doing so for a number of reasons.

    The Economist is a quintessential establishment publication. It occasionally gives lip service to supporting the free market, but anyone who has ever read it with his eyes open must have noticed that 70% of the content is all about how governments should best centrally plan the economy, while most of the rest is concerned with dispensing advice as to how to expand and preserve Anglo-American imperialism. We are exaggerating a bit for effect here, but in essence we think this describes the magazine well. In other words, its economic stance is essentially indistinguishable from that of the Financial Times or most of the rest of the mainstream financial press.

     

    gold

     

    Keynesian shibboleths about “market failure” and the need to prevent it, as well as the alleged need for governments to provide “public goods” and to steer the economy in directions desired by the ruling elite with a variety of taxation and spending schemes as well as monetary interventionism, are dripping from its pages in generous dollops. It never strays beyond the “acceptable” degree of support for free markets, which is essentially book-ended by Milton Friedman (a supporter of central banking, fiat money and positivism in economic science, who comes from an economic school of thought that was regarded as part of the “leftist fringe” in the 1940s as Hans-Hermann Hoppe has pointed out). Needless to say, the default expectation should therefore be that the magazine will be dissing gold – and indeed, it didn’t disappoint.

    Another reason is that the magazine has one of the very best records as a contrary indicator whenever it comments on markets. If a market trend makes the cover page of the Economist, it is almost as good as if it were making the front page of the Mirror or the Daily Mail. If you do the exact opposite of what an Economist cover story prediction indicates you should do, you can actually end up being set for life.

    A famous example was the “Drowning in Oil” cover story which was published about two months after a multi-decade low in the oil price had been established, literally within two trading days of the slightly higher retest low. The article predicted that crude oil would soon fall from then slightly over $10/bbl. to a mere $5/bbl. – a not inconsiderable decline of more than 50%. Instead it began to soar within a few days of the article’s publication and essentially didn’t stop until it had risen nearly 15-fold – a gain of almost 1,400%.

     

    Covers of the Economist

    One of the most ill-timed cover stories of all time – the Economist’s early March 1999 cover “Drowning in Oil”. In the article it was argued that there was such a huge oversupply of oil on the market, that a 50% price decline to $5 per barrel was highly likely.

     

    1-WTIC

    From the “what really happened” department: within days of being left for dead by the Economist, oil embarked on a 1,400% rally – click to enlarge.

     

    The Economist’s Disjointed and Irrelevant Musings on Gold

    Unfortunately gold hasn’t yet made it to the front page, but the Economist has sacrificed some ink in order to declare it “dead” (or rather, “buried”). We hasten to add than during the recent trading range, every time we have written something mildly positive about gold, it usually felt as though we had jinxed it, often within hours. It is no secret that we are favorably disposed toward gold in the medium to long term, but we do as a rule inject some objectivity by mentioning the potential short to medium term downside risks that could become manifest should important support levels give way. It doesn’t seem very likely to us that this will happen (we believe a lengthy bottoming process is underway), but obviously the probability isn’t zero.

    The Economist article is a typical “after the fact” denouncement – we wouldn’t have seen such an article appear in August/September 2011, when gold was still trading near its highs. It is also a disjointed mess, with many irrelevant arguments and non-sequiturs – basically a hit piece. However, since some of these arguments are at times mentioned by both bulls and bears, we thought it worthwhile to discuss their merit (or the lack of same). The article begins:

    “Uncertainty is supposed to lift the gold price. But neither upheaval in the Middle East, nor the travails of the euro zone, nor startlingly loose monetary policy in the rich world is brightening the spirits of those who swear by bullion. After a big rally during the financial crisis, the price has sagged to about $1,200 an ounce, a third below its peak in 2011. Little seems likely to turn it round. “We’ve seen everything gold bugs could hope for: endless money printing, 0% interest rates (both short-term and long-term adjusted for inflation), rising debt and debt ratios in the public and private sectors…So where’s the damn hyperinflation?” asks Harry Dent, a newsletter publisher, in a recent blog post.”

    (emphasis added)

    We would submit that with developed market stock markets at one of their most overvalued levels in history and government bond yields recently trading at absurdly low and even negative yields, there are exactly zero signs of “uncertainty” in the financial markets. The St. Louis Fed’s financial stress index is presently at one of its lowest levels in history. As we have mentioned previously, gold has primarily lost its “euro break-up premium”. The question should actually not be “why is gold down one third from its highs”, but “why is it still up by 400% from its 1999 lows?

    The sentence “little seems likely to turn it around” is, well, golden in a sense. When a market trend changes, is always seems as if nothing could possibly turn the market around. Of course that doesn’t necessarily mean that a market turn in gold is imminent – we merely want to point out that the phrase used by the Economist perfectly describes the conditions found near major market turns. The above discussed “drowning in oil” article from early 1999 is a very good example of just such a situation.

     

    2-Financial Stress Index

    Uncertainty? There is none – the “financial stress index” is near the lowest levels in the history of the data series. The faith of market participants in central banks and their policies is close to an all time high. One should ask why gold is still trading at such high levels, not why it is down from the euro crisis peak – click to enlarge.

     

    The remark by Harry Dent is downright bizarre. Where was the “hyperinflation” when gold rose from $250 to $1,900? There wasn’t even a single mild inflation scare over the entire period. Is this meant to indicate that Dent believes “hyperinflation” is required for the gold price to rise? If so, then he should really refrain from commenting on the gold market. Although the true US money supply has increased by a chunky 265% since the year 2000, it would be ludicrous to expect “hyperinflation” anytime soon. The probability that we will experience hyperinflation over the next several years is so extremely low, it is hardly worth mentioning.

    However, the process that historically ends with hyperinflation has always begun in a very similar manner: government debt rises to such an extent, that debt monetization by central banks is initiated. For many years, nothing happens. Occasionally, the pace of debt monetization is slowed down again, only to speed up again a short while later. Eventually, the price effects of the enlarged money supply begin to migrate from capital goods and asset markets to consumer goods (especially if the economy’s structural integrity becomes severely compromised by incessant credit expansion). At this point, it is still possible for the authorities to arrest the inflationary trend by abandoning the inflationary policy. Only when they consistently fail to do so, will the public’s confidence in the currency be suddenly lost. The actual “hyperinflation” process usually plays out in just a few short months – as the final conflagration in a process that takes many years, sometimes even decades, to play out. So we would advise Mr. Dent to be patient. Hyperinflation does not seem likely from today’s perspective, but a time may come when it does become likely. You will almost certainly read about it here if/when that should happen. In the meantime, rest assured that gold can easily rise to much higher prices than today’s, even if “CPI inflation” remains perfectly tame.

     

    3-Gold vs. Inflation

    Gold vs. the y-y change rate in CPI – the direction of the latter seems to matter empirically (see “In Gold We Trust” by Ronnie Stoeferle and Mark Valek) – falling rates of inflation (“disinflation”) tend to be gold bearish, rising rates as well as “deflation” tend to be bullish. Hyperinflation is not required at all – click to enlarge.

     

    The Economist continues:

    “The biggest pressure on the gold price comes from the expectation that interest rates in America will rise later this year. Matthew Turner of Macquarie, a bank, says that low interest rates cut the opportunity cost of owning gold. Higher interest rates, by contrast, raise the cost of holding non-interest-bearing assets. Mr Turner thinks expectations of rising rates are already built into the gold price; if they do not materialize as quickly as expected, there could even be a rally.

    While it is true that the opportunity cost of holding gold is an important factor influencing its price, nominal rates are irrelevant – only real interest rates count. The idea that fear of Fed rate hikes exert the “biggest pressure on gold prices” is largely a myth however (even though Mr. Turner may turn out to be correct that if the Fed fails to hike rates soon, gold could rally for a while). If the Fed were to raise rates by 15 or 25 basis points, they would still be at levels that are among the lowest in history. Moreover, if inflation expectations rise by a similar amount, absolutely nothing would change for gold. If they were to rise at a faster pace than the Fed’s rate hikes, then the real interest rate backdrop would turn increasingly bullish for gold. As Steve Saville has recently pointed out though, if one looks closely at when the gold price has put in lows and reversed upward since 2013, it turns out that whenever an announced tightening of Fed policy (tapering, end of QE3) became reality, the gold price has started to rise instead of falling further.

    Why is this so? The explanation is that the gold market is very much a forward-looking market. It senses trouble long before anyone becomes consciously aware of it. If one looks closely at the final phases of stock market bubbles in recent years, the gold price always stopped falling even while the stock market was still rising (at times sharply), but closing in on its peak. Anything that is bad for “risk assets” will be good for gold. Many people buy gold as “insurance” (even Ray Dalio has a sizable percentage of his personal assets in gold, if we can believe what he recently stated in a Q&A at the CFR). These people represent a steady stream of demand, that is usually buttressed by strong reservation demand that tends to surge whenever “bubble talk” with respect to other markets becomes prevalent. In short, because certain percentage of market participants recognizes the danger posed by the bubble, a floor is put under the gold price.

    In order to understand the reasoning of gold buyers and gold holders who don’t sell at current prices, we only have to gauge our own demand for bullion, including our reservation demand, and consider what motivates it. Would we sell any bullion here? There isn’t a snowball’s chance in hell of that happening. What is the motive? We regard the monetary experiments performed by central banks in recent years as extremely dangerous. Furthermore, we believe that most of the Western world is suspended in a state of “pretend solvency”.

    A giant confidence game is underway, in which a critical mass of people still pretends that governments are fiscally sound and that the banking system is in fine fettle. It seems to us that the reality is a tad more sobering, and while we have a lot of faith in the ability of what remains of the market economy to generate real wealth, we doubt it will suffice to stave off a less than happy outcome. On the day a sufficiently large number of people stops keeping up the pretense, we will have reached a fork in the road: either much of the world will get the “Cyprus treatment”, or we will indeed see hyperinflation emerge. It will be a default either way. Is there any possibility to hedge against such an outcome, or even a slightly less apocalyptic one, that still involves a great deal of financial and economic distress? If anyone has a better idea than gold, we’d love to hear it.

    The Economist continues:

    “That cannot come soon enough for gold producers. Nikolai Zelenski, the boss of Nordgold, which has mines in Africa and the former Soviet Union, says that half of all producers have negative cashflow. Some are heavily indebted, too. If the price does not rise, production could fall on a scale not seen since the two world wars.”

    That is of course irrelevant for the gold price, but we would point out that gold producers somehow survived the bear market from 1980 to 1999 as well, and their production actually surged rather dramatically that time period. What Mr. Zelenski seems to be forgetting is that mining margins are a moving target. They depend not only on the gold price, but also on input costs.

    The Economist continues:

    “Gold bugs are determinedly optimistic. Gold is priced in dollars, so the fact that it stayed stable while America’s currency was rising (making gold more expensive for buyers in foreign currencies) is cause for cheer.”

    With closed-end bullion funds trading it discounts of almost 10% to NAV, we have our doubts about the size and importance of this allegedly “determinedly optimistic” group. Anecdotal evidence actually suggests that most “gold bugs” are at best frustrated at this point. It is however true that it is a bullish sign when gold stays strong in the face of a strengthening dollar.

    “Chinese consumers are buying more gold, after a sharp decline sparked partly by an anti-corruption campaign. So are Indians, the world’s biggest consumers of gold, after the government removed restrictions on imports last year. Yet the fact remains: gold is in a rut.”

    This is one of the points often made by gold bulls: see how much gold China is importing! This is however at best of tangential importance, roughly on a par with the ups and down in mine supply. Gold is not an industrial commodity, it is a monetary commodity (for an explanation of the difference between the two see our previous missive “Misconceptions About Gold”). When gold moves from COMEX warehouses to warehouses in Shanghai, it is not a bullish event, but a completely irrelevant event. Having said all that, we do believe that Chinese investors could play a role in the eventual blow-off move we expect to occur a few years down the road. However, this is just speculation on our part.

    The assertion that “gold is in a rut” is clearly a matter of perspective. It is certainly back in a bull market both in euro and yen terms, while going sideways in dollar terms. The chart below illustrates the current situation. Note that both in euro and yen terms, it is impossible to not see that a textbook technical bottoming process has taken place. Of course, the Economist hasn’t exactly lost its magic touch either: Since the article appeared, gold has risen by $45 in USD terms as well.

     

    4-Gold-currencies

    Whether one thinks that gold remains in a “rut” clearly depends on where one happens to reside. Could it be that all that money printing in the euro area and Japan does have an effect on the gold price after all? Just asking – click to enlarge.

    The Economist continues:

    “One reason may be that investors have so many more options nowadays. Humble citizens who distrust their own currencies can buy assets ranging from shares to bitcoins. Laurence Fink, the chairman of BlackRock, the world’s biggest asset-management firm, said in March that gold had “lost its lustre”, thanks to the wider availability of property and even contemporary art. “It’s become much more accessible for global families worldwide to store wealth outside their country.”

    Obviously, the chairman of Blackrock is at odds with the chairman of Bridgewater, which is another one of those “largest asset management firms” in the world. Judging from what Fink says, we actually doubt that he has any expertise with respect to gold. Shares and Bitcoins? Property and contemporary art? Three of these four asset classes are in egregious bubbles, which clearly depend on confidence being maintained. The fourth is at the moment pretty much a burst bubble (Bitcoin has declined from $1,200 to a little over $200, so if people indeed see it as an “alternative to gold”, it has proved to be a rather poor one). It is in principle true that all these asset classes compete with gold to some extent, but it is a bit misleading to call stocks, property and works of art an “alternative” to gold. Gold is sought after when these assets are not – it is not merely an “alternative” to them, it is their antithesis.

     

    5-Bitcoin

    Bitcoin – a bubble that has burst for now (it may well make a comeback though, and as we have previously noted, Bitcoin is likely here to stay) – click to enlarge.

    Gold is currently dormant precisely because people are confident enough to pay absolutely ludicrous prices for assorted “risk” assets (recently a Gauguin painting sold for a record $300 million – a sign that some sectors of the economy are indeed displaying almost “hyperinflationary” characteristics by now). At the same time, the fact that these bubbles have grown to such exorbitant heights (there are countless breath-taking property bubbles underway around the world along with those in contemporary art and stocks) is a major reason why it makes sense to hold gold as insurance.

    Gold is akin to money – although it is currently not money in the strict sense, as it doesn’t serve as the general medium of exchange, the market “knows” that it would be money if the market were free and treats it accordingly. So Fink’s statement is simply yet another non-sequitur. People were able to buy stocks and art works between 2000 and 2011 as well, and yet gold was the preferred asset in most of that time period, because confidence frequently faltered.

     

    gauguin1

    Gauguin’s “Will You Marry Me” – certainly a nice picture, but 300 million smackers? Come on…

    Finally, the Economist cannot fail to get one last dig in, by letting us know that only the evil Vladimir Putin and his henchmen in Moscow are buying gold (either they are stupid, or it is a sign that gold is only bought by foaming-at-the-mouth crazies, take your pick!):

    “The main exception to the trend is Russia, where the central bank has been a notable buyer of gold, tripling its holdings since 2005. It bought 30 tonnes in March alone, bringing its hoard to 1,238 tonnes. The Kremlin’s growing stockpile does not so much reflect a belief in gold’s prospects, however, as a distaste for the American dollar. Whatever Vladimir Putin’s other qualities, most investors would hesitate to take him on as a financial adviser.”

    First of all, neither the Economist nor anyone else can properly judge Putin’s qualities as a “financial advisor”. Russia’s central bank may have very good reasons for buying gold. As Alan Greenspan once remarked, gold it is the only form of payment that will always be accepted. He dissuaded the US treasury from selling its hoard, precisely because extreme situations can arise when gold ownership can prove very useful. We would assume that strategic reasons are the Russian government’s main motive for buying gold as well – we doubt it cares much about where gold trades next week, next month or even next year.

    Secondly, just because the Russian central bank is one of the few known big official gold buyers certainly doesn’t mean one has automatically hired Putin as one’s financial advisor when investing in gold. Incidentally, what Russia’s central bank is doing is not directly relevant to the gold price. What it buys in an entire year trades in London and Zurich in a few hours every trading day. It is a pittance compared to the total supply of gold.

    Lastly, we still remember how Bloomberg, another viciously statist mainstream financial medium that disses gold at every opportunity, tried to scare less well informed would-be gold buyers by asserting that Russia would be forced to sell its gold reserves! See “Will There be Forced Official Sellers of Gold” for our assessment at the time. We have so far been proved right, but obviously we can’t win, because now Putin is our “financial advisor”!

     

    putin

    Meet our evil new financial advisor, Vladimir Putin.

    Conclusion

    We enjoy picking on the Economist of course, but our main motive for dissecting its editorial on gold was to show that the gold market remains widely misunderstood. Moreover, given the Economist’s record as a contrary indicator, it might prove to be a useful marker, although we don’t want to make too much of this (if it had been a cover story, we’d recommend mortgaging the house and renting a vault). In the meantime, the fundamental backdrop for gold remains largely in neutral, with some factors improving and others not. However, buyers seem to be willing to step in every time gold dips below the $1,200 level. Technically it remains in no-man’s land in dollar terms, but continues to look encouraging in euro and yen terms. Maybe the Economist has managed to ring the bell after all? Stay tuned …



  • Stephen King Warns "The Second Great Depression Only Postponed, Not Avoided"

    Reading like his name-sake's horror novels, HSBC's Chief Economist Stephen King unleashes a torrent of truthiness about the Titanic-like economic ocean liner that is headed for an iceberg except this fragile ship doesn’t have lifeboats. As ValueWalk's Mark Melin notes, what is different with this economic recovery is that, unlike most, "the recovery phase has not marked a return to economic growth," nor has it ushered in a return to policy "normality." From King’s point of view, the normal recovery “typically allows policymakers to rebuild their stocks of ammunition, providing them with room to fight the next economic battle.” Problem is, under the regime of quantitative easing, the central bank central planners are now out of bullets as the economic recovery and the stock bull market is long in the tooth.

     

    Stephen King: Economy is like Titanic except without lifeboats

    In his research piece titled “The world economy’s titanic problem: Coping with the next recession without policy lifeboats,” King notes it has been six years since the last recession. Without specifically saying it, those who follow quantitative market probability note that bullish stock market environments last, on average, 67 months. The current bullish economic environment, depending on where you call the low point, is nearly 72 months old.

     

     

    What is different with this economic recovery is that, unlike most, “the recovery phase has not been marked a return to economic growth,” nor has it ushered in a return to policy “normality.” In a normal environment interest rates have risen, tax revenues have rebounded, welfare payments shrunk, and government deficits have declined – “and, on some occasions, have even turned into surpluses.”

    Stephen King: In QE-driven economic recovery, policymakers are out of ammunition

    From King’s point of view, the normal recovery “typically allows policymakers to rebuild their stocks of ammunition, providing them with room to fight the next economic battle.” Problem is, under the regime of quantitative easing, the central bank central planners are now out of bullets as the economic recovery and the stock bull market is long in the tooth.

     

     

    Quantitative easing has not built a a “real” economic foothold other that instilling a four letter word for investors: hope. “The higher value of financial assets have not translated into decent economic growth,” he said, and then documented what many hedge fund managers and economic analysis points out, that quantitative fairy dust isn’t driving sustainable economic growth:

     

    It may be that QE has merely driven a wedge between financial hope and economic reality. Worse, if the next recession simply provokes more QE, are investors already beginning to believe that, once again, they are to be continuous beneficiaries of what was once affectionately known as the “Greenspan put”? This was the belief – held most strongly during the late-1990s tech bubble – that the Fed would stand ready to offer support in the event of economic weakness, inevitably encouraging even more in the way of risk-loving behavior.

     

    Stephen King: We are closer to the next recession with few bullets remaining

    King says that “if history is any guide, we are probably now closer to the next one (recession),” as he points out that the QE recovery has not accomplished what previous recoveries have: enabled monetary and fiscal policymakers to replenish their ammunition. In fact, the QE recovery has “been distinguished by a persistent munitions shortage.”

     

    King goes on to outline solutions to a potential forthcoming recession, which is difficult to predict in an environment where debt is literally “out of control” and economic central planners have few bullets available to them.

     

    These include 1) reducing the risk of recession; 2) reverting to quantitative easing; 3) moving away from inflation targeting; 4) using fiscal policy to replace monetary policy; (v) using fiscal and monetary policy together in a bid to introduce so-called “helicopter money”; and 5) pushing interest rates higher through structural reforms designed to lower excess savings, most obviously via increases in retirement age.

     

    “We conclude that only the final option is likely to lead to economic success,” he said. “Politically, however, it seems implausible. As a result, we are faced with a serious shortage of effective policy lifeboats.”

    Stephen King: The Second Great Depression Only Postponed, Not Avoided Altogether

    Knowing that central banks are potentially hooked on QE for the long term is, at best, likely to lead to the mis-pricing of financial assets. That, in turn, might lead to a deterioration in the quality of investment and, hence, lower productivity growth over the medium term. At worst, it may lead to a repeat of the asset price bubbles that have proved to be so disruptive to economic activity.

     

    In the absence of conventional policy ammunition, an addiction to QE could ultimately mean that the second great depression was only postponed, not avoided altogether.

    Source: ValueWalk's Mark Melin

    *  *  *

    In his own words…

    *  *  *

    King's full letter below…



  • Just Sold For $37,100,000 – Capital Misallocation Perhaps?

    StealthFlation.org

    The unhinged misallocations of capital engendered by a systematically suppressed interest rate monetary regime are simply astounding.

     

    Until the cows come home……………

     

    Got Gold?


    Check out: ABX (Allocated Bullion Exchange)

    .




  • Leading German Keynesian Economist Calls For Cash Ban

    It’s official: the world has gone central-planner crazy. 

    Monetary policy, whether in the form of “conventional” methods such as the micromanagement of policy rates or so-called “unconventional” measures such as QE, has proven utterly ineffective when it comes to both “smoothing out” the business cycle and reigniting economic growth in the wake of severe downturns. If anything, recent history has shown the exact opposite to be true. That is, the Fed helped to engineer the housing bubble and has now succeeded in inflating a similar bubble in stocks and fixed income. Meanwhile, the Japanese experience with QE has plunged the country into what we have affectionately dubbed “The Kuroda Zone”, wherein the BoJ has cornered both the stock and bond markets while failing to promote wage growth or meaningfully raise inflation expectations. In China, the PBoC has taken to cutting policy rates at the first sign of weakness in the stock market, helping to sustain what will perhaps go down in history as the second coming of the tulip bulb mania, while the ECB has taken the insane step of adopting a trillion euro bond buying program while simultaneously demanding fiscal discipline, meaning the central bank’s bond monetization efforts are set against a backdrop of meager supply.

    In sum, the collective actions of the world’s most influential central banks have done wonders when it comes to inflating asset bubbles but have done very little to revive robust economic growth. In fact, far from smoothing out the business cycle and resuscitating DM demand, post-crisis monetary policy has actually had the exact opposite effect: it has set the stage for an even more spectacular collapse while simultaneously creating a worldwide deflationary supply glut.

    At this stage, a sane person might be tempted to call it a day on the monetary experiments, especially considering that at this point, the limits have been reached. That is, there are literally no more assets to buy and rates have hit the effective lower bound where rational actors will eschew bank deposits in favor of the mattress. But not so fast, say folks like Citi’s Willem Buiter and economist Ken Rogoff: the world could always ban cash because if you eliminate physical currency and force people to use a debit card linked to a government controlled bank account for all transactions, you can effectively centrally plan everything. Consumers not spending? No problem. Just tax their excess account balance. Economy overheating? Again, no problem. Raise the interest paid on account holdings to encourage people to stop spending. So with Citi, Harvard, and Denmark all onboard, we bring you the latest call for a cashless society, this time from German economist and member of the German Council Of Economic Experts Peter Bofinger.

    Via Spiegel (Google translated):

    Coins and bills are obsolete and only reduce the influence of central banks. This position represents the economy Peter Bofinger. The federal government should stand up for the abolition of cash, he calls in the mirror…

     

    The economy Peter Bofinger campaigns for the abolition of cash. “With today’s technical possibilities coins and notes are in fact an anachronism,” Bofinger told SPIEGEL.

     

    If these away, the markets for undeclared work and drugs could be dried out. In addition, it would have the central banks easier to enforce its monetary policy.The teaching in Würzburg economics professor called on the federal government to promote at the international level for the abolition of cash. “That would certainly be a good topic for the agenda of the G-7 summit in Elmau,” he said. (Click here to read the full interview in the new mirror .)

     

    Even the former US Treasury Secretary Larry Summers and economist pleaded for an end to the already cash . Likewise, the US economist Kenneth Rogoff . He also argued that the interest rates of central banks have less clout when banks or consumer credit rather than hoard cash.

     

    Critics warn, however , such debates would only distract from the real problems of the current monetary policy.

    Yes, the “real problems” with current monetary policy. Like the fact that by design it can’t possibly work (but it can and will push stocks to unprecedented highs). Paging Mr. Weidmann, your countrymen are going Keynesian crazy.



  • This May Just Be The Start Of The Oil Price War Says IEA

    Submitted by Andy Tully via OilPrice.com,

    Saudi Oil Minister Ali al-Naimi may be one of the most powerful individuals in the global oil industry. After all, as the top oil official in arguably the world’s most influential oil-producing country, he has enormous influence.

    But for all his power, is he the most ingenious? That question arises from the release of two reports on the current state of the oil industry that look at whether or not OPEC’s strategy of forcing US shale to cut back is succeeding.

    The first, issued on May 12 by OPEC, says, in essence, that Saudi Arabia’s effort to keep its own oil production at near-record highs is succeeding in wresting market share back from US producers of shale oil, also called “light, tight oil” (LTO). The second, issued a day later by the International Energy Agency (IEA), agrees, but only up to a point.

    “In the supposed standoff between OPEC and U.S. light tight oil (LTO), LTO appears to have blinked,” the IEA reported. “Following months of cost cutting and a 60 percent plunge in the U.S. rig count, the relentless rise in U.S. supply seems to be finally abating.”

    But the report from the Paris-based IEA, which advises 29 industrialized countries on energy policy, also pointed to a rebound in oil prices that could benefit US shale producers.

    As both the OPEC and IEA reports point out, the decline in US shale oil output has somewhat reduced the oil glut and led oil prices to rally up to about $65 per barrel. And the IEA adds that this brings LTO back above the threshold where its production becomes profitable again.

    But that, evidently, isn’t good enough for both domestic and foreign shale drillers in the United States, and this is where ingenuity enters the picture. “Several large LTO producers have been boasting of achieving large reductions in production costs in recent weeks,” the report said.

    For example, Statoil, Norway’s huge state-owned energy company, is trying out new techniques of hydraulic fracturing, or fracking, in Texas’ Eagle Ford shale field. They include using different grades of sand to mix with water and chemicals, and drilling at varying depths, to increase oil yields.

    “There’s a proverb in Norway that says necessity teaches the naked woman how to knit,” Bjorn Otto Sverdrup, a Statoil vice president, told The New York Times, during a tour of the company's shale operations in Kennedy, Texas.

    Evidently this mother of invention is showing some success. Statoil may have cut the number of its rigs at Eagle Ford from three to two in 2014, but its production from the shale field is up by one-third. The new fracking method has also cut the cost of extraction from an average of $4.5 million per well to $3.5 million, in part because it’s been able to reduce drilling time from an average of 21 days to 17.

    Against this backdrop, then, it’s not surprising that the IEA isn’t so sure that OPEC in general, and al-Naimi in particular, have the upper hand – yet. “It would thus be premature to suggest that OPEC has won the battle for market share,” the agency’s report said. “The battle, rather, has just started.”



  • Greece Will Default On June 5 Without Deal, IMF Leaks

    Another week came and went with no breakthrough in negotiations between Greece and its creditors. The IMF is now fed up and has reportedly refused to be a part of any new bailout program for Greece, after Athens drew down its SDR reserves to makes its latest payment to the Fund. That money will now need to be repaid and in a move that surely marks the new gold standard for absurd circular funding schemes, Greece will likely look to use the next tranche of IMF money to payback its IMF SDR reserve which it tapped to pay the IMF. The country’s public sector employees live in limbo, not knowing from one week to the next whether they will be paid and commuters are now subjected to a 50 second looped highlight reel of the Nazi occupation meant to rally the country behind the government’s quarter trillion euro war reparations claim (they might as well just ask for a ‘gagillion’) on Germany which has now become the symbol of tyranny and debt servitude for many Greek citizens. 

    Given the situation, one would be inclined to think that Alexis Tsipras would be falling all over himself to cut a deal with creditors because while giving up on campaign promises to voters isn’t ideal, it’s better than going down in history as the PM who sent the country careening into a drachma death spiral, and besides, giving up on campaign promises is something most politicians do all the time (it’s a job requirement for the US presidency). Alas we were back to the now ubiquitous ‘red line’ rhetoric on Friday as Tsipras continued to employ the “tell EU officials one thing behind close doors and tell the public the exact opposite a day later” negotiating technique. Here’s more from Bloomberg:

    Greece won’t cross its red lines in negotiations with international creditors just because time is pressing to close a deal, Prime Minister Alexis Tsipras said.

     

    “Those who think that our red lines will fade as time goes on would do well to forget it,” Tsipras said at a conference in Athens late Friday. “I want to assure the Greek people that there’s no way the government will back down on the issue of pension and wage cuts,” he said. “A deal must be reached but it must be mutually beneficial.”

    Europe is once again set to take the stalled negotiations down to the wire as it now appears the next serious round of talks will come in Riga (the site of an epic Varoufakis meltdown that saw the FinMin tweeting out melodramatic FDR quotes after he was forced to have dinner by himself while his EU counterparts attended a gala) when Tsipras will try to close a deal by the end of the month.

    Tsipras will address the standoff in bailout negotiations on the sidelines of a meeting of European Union leaders to be held May 21-22 in Riga, Latvia, according to a Greek government official who asked not to be identified as the diplomacy is not public.

    If a deal isn’t struck by the end of May, it is truly game over. Here’s the ECB’s Yves Mersch:

    “We are in an end game in Greece where the situation is grave. This situation is not tenable. There has been an accord between Europe and Greece to go through a program. This hasn’t been the case since December last year, because the new government said it doesn’t want to have anything to do with the program. But then they can’t demand money that was attached to that program either. In the meantime, they haven’t managed to bring other measures to the table that could lead to the same goal as foreseen in the first program. Greece is convinced it can play along the line of other rules than” the other 18 euro-area members.”

    Despite the obviously dire circumstances, the Syriza government still insists it will somehow scrape together cash to meet its obligations…

    “Greece Will Pay Wages, Pensions, Varoufakis Tells Skai TV”

    …while EU officials (who one imagines are at this point completely amazed at how obtuse the Greek government has proven to be) are left with no option but to remind Greece that Brussels is still waiting on a list of reforms…

    “Dombrovskis Reminds Greece to Submit Reform List, Bild Reports”

    ….and at the end of the day, here is the reality (via Bloomberg)…

    “Greece won’t be able to make IMF repayments, beginning with a June 5 payment, unless an agreement is reached with international partners, U.K.’s Channel 4 reports, citing a leaked IMF memo dated May 14.”

    *  *  *

    As a reminder, here is the IMF procedure for a default and a matrix which outlines what a missed IMF payment would mean in terms of accelerated payment rights for Greece’s other creditors:




  • Inside China's Insane IPO Market: Full Frontal

    We’ve said it before and we’ll say it again: China’s equity mania truly is the gift that keeps on giving, and not just for those who are riding the wave, but also for those who, like us, appreciate the humor in a giant, margin-fueled bubble that’s captivated millions upon millions of semi-literate housewives and banana vendors turned day traders. 

    While there are some signs that the bubble in Chinese stocks may be set to peak — such as brokers looking to curb margin trading — rest assured that the PBoC is on the case, cutting policy rates twice in a month in an effort to ensure the country’s stock market miracle continues to overshadow a bursting real estate bubble and a decelerating economy in the minds of Chinese investors. 

    One area that’s been particularly hot this year is the Chinese IPO market, which has spawned companies like the now famous Beijing Baoefung Technology which, until Thursday, had traded limit-up every single day since its March IPO. Here to shed some light on just how ridiculous the IPO market in China has become is Morgan Stanley:

    Since January 1, 2014, a total of 225 companies have IPO’d in China’s A share markets. The mean performance since IPO is 418%, with trailing P/E currently at 92x and EV/EBIT at 105x. Mean yoy EPS growth in the year prior to IPO was 4%. Total market cap is now over US$500bn.

     

    We have used an ‘interstellar’ metaphor before to discuss China’s A share markets. In this context the IPO markets are Blue-White, the hottest stars in the A-share universe…

     

     

    In every industry group except the two IPOs in Energy, performance on the IPO date was between 43% and 44%. What this means is that for the vast majority of the other 223 of 225 IPOs, the stock rose limit up (20%) at the open and then by the additional limit restriction to a 20% gain during the day.

     

    To put it mildly, this suggests a market that has not been discriminating in relation to pricing, at least early on.

    It also explains the huge subscription volumes for IPOs and the surge in new account openings since China allowed individuals to open more than one account in mid-April. Investors have come to see IPOs as a sure-fire way of making high returns over a short period of time.

     

     

    Performance over longer time horizons has been more variable. The average return has been 418%, since the date of IPO (itself an eye-opening number). However, energy IPOs have lagged, returning “only” 160%. Media (773%), and Software and Services (1125%) are way out in front.

     

     

    The mean trailing P/E is 92x trailing, with no sector trading below 50x trailing. The most expensive industry groups are Software (311x), Media (140x) and Retailing (134x); the cheapest are Diversified Financials (53x) and Semiconductors (53x).

     

    We also provide in the Exhibit historical EPS growth for 2014 yoy vs 2013. The mean EPS growth for the stocks that have IPO’d is just 4%. The only industry groups with double-digit historical EPS growth at the time of IPO are Food & Staples Retailing and Diversified Financials (securities firms helped by strong stock market volumes). In seven sectors, the mean EPS growth was negative in the year prior to IPO.

     

     

    *  *  *

    In sum: since the beginning of 2014, the 225 companies that have gone public in China have returned an average of 418% on their way to an average P/E of nearly 100X while growing earnings by an average of just 4%. Most absurd of all, software IPOs have returned 1,124%, have an average P/E of 311X on earnings growth of -5%. 

    But remember, HSBC’s Head of China Equity Strategy Steven Sun “wouldn’t call [Chinese stocks] a bubble.”



  • Sovereign Debt: You Cannot Go Unprepared into This

    By Chris at www.CapitalistExploits.at

    A recent conversation I had with an exasperated parent of a teenager showed me how horribly things can turn out if parents have no discipline when raising kids. If parents have been spoiling poor little “Johnny Snotbrat” for most of his life and let him get away with murder at some point he may actually do just that.

    This teenager is now causing serious harm to family, acquaintances and the police. I’ve seen this happen before.

    The parents – in their desire to keep the calm – let “Johnny” get away with bad behavior. This is somewhat manageable when Johnny is still small. But quite quickly Johnny grows in size and brattiness, and becomes a truly unruly brute who threatens to do serious damage. Every scuffle has always resulted in letting Johnny have his way, appeasing and keeping the calm.

    Now, fast forward a few years later and Johnny is 6 ft 5, has hair on his chest and is out of control!

    I’ll do my best to keep out of the way of Johnny Snotbrat but there is another event brewing and this one is going to have a vastly greater impact on us all.

    Central bankers, the proud parents of the largest debt bubble this world has ever seen, have tried to spoil and appease the markets when they deserved to be disciplined. Instead of allowing the markets to correct themselves and showing discipline, central bankers flooded the world with liquidity and soaked up many problems.

    In doing so they’ve created a truly wild monster both in the sovereign debt markets directly, and indirectly in the corporate debt markets as market participants seeking some sort of yield (heck, any sort of yield) have been driven down the risk curve. I detailed this recently in a post discussing the terrible misconception that many people have about a so-called global deleveraging post 2008. It never happened!

    Central bankers have created this bastard of a neighbour punching, head-butting, sister shagging teenager which requires continuous feeding. But feeding him more just makes him more dangerous. The last few weeks have seen this wild creature flexing his muscles and when he truly gets out of control he’s going to start tearing people’s heads off.

    10 Year Yields

    Above you’ll see the last 10 years in the respective bond markets of the US, Germany and Japan – the most important bond markets in the world today.

    10 Year Yields 1

    Let’s now take a look at the above chart showing the same bonds since the beginning of this year.

    Bond yields are rising sharply on the long end of the curve (long duration bonds) in favour of the short end. This is a rational move. Liquidity is crashing on all the long dated maturities and as you can see yields are breaking out. It makes perfect sense to sell the long end of the yield curve given the fundamentals. What we’re witnessing is that cash flooding into the shorter duration maturities. I’m going to nab a quote which I used last week here, originally from Howard Marks of Oaktree Capital as it’s really critical to assessing risk.

    It’s often a mistake to say a particular asset is either liquid or illiquid. Usually an asset isn’t “liquid” or “illiquid” by its nature. Liquidity is ephemeral: it can come and go.

    Is this the beginning of the loss of faith in government paper?

    We’ve discussed at length how we believe the first move to be a rush to the US dollar. We detailed this in a special US Dollar Bull Market Report on our favourite ways to trade this trend.

    Since we first published the report some months back our positions have moved in our favour, though over the past few weeks there has been a pullback – something that is healthy and to be expected.

    When I look at the above graphs and the fact that volatility in many of the long dated option positions we recommended has dropped again I believe the market is offering us up another fantastic opportunity to add to these positions.

    The bond market is beginning to crack at the periphery (Greece and Italy) and is now showing stress on the long end of the curve.

    If there is one thing that I think I’ve learned when it comes to sell offs it’s that you can be an hour early to the party but never a minute late.

    There is a crisis coming and we’ll be sitting around watching each of the world’s central bankers attempting to deal with the fallout of their own creation. It promises to be entertaining:

    • The Brits, being British, will get all hot and flushed and then splutter and pardon with a few “crikey’s” and “goshes”
    • The Europeans will handle this by blaming each other, but mostly the Germans
    • The Germans, in turn will flush the sauerkraut with a large beer, don their lederhosen and get on with fixing the problem. This particular problem will be akin to wrestling a man eating tiger in a Japanese nuclear power station: impossible. Not even German technology will fix this!
    • The French will set up a committee to investigate how they may be able to tax individuals on losing money rather than making it, never acknowledging their own part in the fiasco.
    • The Japanese. Well, they’ll do the honorable thing and fall on their sword. Seppuku!
    • And the Americans will search the nation to find the man with the shiniest teeth, put him on Oprah where he’ll open his arms in an apology and reassure everyone that everything will be fine, even though it won’t.

    Let’s get ready for the show but for goodness sake make sure you’re prepared for it!

    – Chris

    “By failing to prepare, you are preparing to fail.” – Benjamin Franklin



  • Martin Armstrong Warns Of The Coming Crash Of All Crashes

    Submitted by Martin Armstrong via Armstrong Economics,

    Why are governments rushing to eliminate cash?

    During previous recoveries following the recessionary declines, the central banks were able to build up their credibility and ammunition so to speak by raising interest rates during the recovery. This time, ever since we began moving toward Transactional Banking with the repeal of Glass Steagall in 1999, banks have looked at profits rather than their role within the economic landscape.

    They shifted to structuring products and no longer was there any relationship with the client. This reduced capital formation for it has been followed by rising unemployment among the youth and/or their inability to find jobs within their fields of study. The VELOCITY of money peaked with our Economic Confidence Model 1998.55 turning point from which we warned of the pending crash in Russia.

     

    The damage inflicted with the collapse of Russia and the implosion of Long-Term Capital Management in the end of 1998, has demonstrated that the VELOCITY of money has continued to decline.

    Long-Term Capital Managment

     

    There has been no long-term recovery. This current mild recovery in the USA has been shallow at best and as the rest of the world declines still from the 2007.15 high with a target low in 2020, the Federal Reserve has been unable to raise interest rates sufficiently to demonstrate any recovery for the spreads at the banks between bid and ask for money is also at historical highs. Banks will give secured car loans at around 4% while their cost of funds is really 0%. This is the widest spread between bid and ask since the Panic of 1899.

    We face a frightening collapse in the VELOCITY of money and all this talk of eliminating cash is in part due to the rising hoarding of cash by households both in the USA and Europe.

    This is a major problem for the central banks have also lost control of the ability to stimulate anything.The loss of traditional stimulus ability by the central banks is now threatening the nationalization of banks be it directly, or indirectly.

    We face a cliff that government refuses to acknowledge and their solution will be to grab more power – never reform.



Digest powered by RSS Digest

IS WASHINGTON COMING TO ITS SENSES?

Washington has failed miserably to isolate Russia

Paul Craig Roberts

There is much speculation about US Secretary of State John Kerry’s rush visit to Russia in the wake of Russia’s successful Victory Day celebration on May 9. On May 11, Kerry, who was snubbing Russia on the 9th, was on his way to Russia, and Putin consented to see him on May 12.

As time passes we will find out why Kerry was snubbing Putin on May 9 and 3 days later was criticizing Washington’s puppet regime in Ukraine. For what is known at this time, a possible explanation is that Washington is coming to its senses.

If you watched the 1 hour 20 minute video of the Victory Day Parade, you are aware that the celebration sent a powerful message. Russia is a first class military power, and Russia is backed by China and India, whose soldiers marched with Russia’s in the parade.
So, while the increasingly irrelevant West, absorbed in its own self-importance, snubbed the celebration of the victory that the Red Army gave them over Hitler, the three largest countries in the world were present united. Russia has the largest land mass, and China and India, also large land masses, have the world’s largest populations.

The celebration in Moscow made it clear that Washington has failed miserably to isolate Russia. What Washington has done is to make the BRICS more unified.

With the President of China sitting at the right hand of Putin, the celebration also made it completely clear even to the morons in the Obama regime that Washington is no longer the Uni-power.

Consider now the impact on Washington’s vassal states in Europe, the crux of the American Empire. Europeans are aware that two of the most powerful military states in history did not survive their invasions of Russia. Napoleon lost the Grande Army in Russia, and Hitler lost the Wehrmacht in Russia. It has dawned on Europeans that they are being shoved into conflict with Russia in the interest of Washington’s claim to be the World Hegemon. Europeans are accustomed to obey Washington, but when it came to being forced into conflict with Russia, Europeans began to express dissent. Signs of an independent European foreign policy appeared with Merkel and Hollande’s meeting with Putin to resolve the Ukrainian crisis orchestrated by Washington.

Faced with the failure of its policy of isolating Russia and the emergence of an independent foreign policy in Europe, Washington sent Kerry as a supplicant to Putin to work out a way to de-escalate the Ukrainian crisis. Putin being a peacemaker will permit Washington to save face. But this will not please the neoconsevatives or the military/security complex. The former are invested heavily in claims of Amerika Uber Alles, and the latter are lusting for the abundant revenues from a new cold, or hot, war.

Obama, Kerry, and Cameron have to become magicians. They have to transition from demonizing Putin to working with him.

Having failed with force against Russia, the West is now employing seduction. If Western peoples hope to escape from the Police State that Washington has imposed on the entire Western World, we must pray that Putin does not fall for the seduction.

There is no world leadership in the West. There is only selfishness and hubris. Western “leadership” is exploitative. The West loots the non-West and is now turning on itself with its looting of Ireland and Greece, with Italy, Spain, and Portugal the next targets for looting. The American public itself has been looted of its jobs, career aspirations, and civil liberties.

The Western model of “democratic capitalism” turns out to be neither democratic nor capitalist, but a form of fascism ruled by an oligarchy. The United States is where regime change is most badly needed.

Today’s News May 16, 2015

  • Guest Post: How Big Government Kills The American Dream

    Authored by U.S. Rep. Jaime Herrera Beutler of Camas, Clark County, originally posted at The Seattle Times,

    Last week, Sen. Elizabeth Warren, D-Mass., and New York Mayor Bill de Blasio published their prescription for reviving the American dream. They are right to focus on the dream. They are wrong in their understanding of American history and the role government can play in restoring and fostering the dream.

    In an 872-word argument titled “How to revive the American dream,” the words “free” or “freedom” never appear. That’s a clue.

    They open with a chilling refrain: Opportunity for success for most Americans is hopeless. All but the rich are falling behind because the “game is rigged.” Their diagnosis: You can’t improve your situation by your own talents or effort. Their prescription: Don’t leave freedom in the hands of citizens. Only a massively larger central government, run by people like them, can help you.

    Respectfully, this has been the claim of every person in history who has ever sought to gain enormous power through government control over the daily lives of their fellow citizens.

    They say the American dream is nearly dead because the game is rigged. If so, your talent, hard work and dedication can’t help you, and your freedom to choose your own path in life isn’t worth much, is it?

    And if the situation is hopeless, the change has to be dramatic. “Bold” is their word. They aren’t trying to sell common-sense reforms. They are selling an entirely new American system that fundamentally changes the relationship between central government leaders and you. Thomas Jefferson wrote that the purpose of the government is to secure freedom. Warren and de Blasio’s government would take your freedom in order to protect you from freedom’s harmful effects.

    Their misreading of American history is frightening. The American system of free people and free markets created more opportunity and prosperity for more citizens than any economic system in human history. Most countries have tried to copy our economic model.

    Take China. Thirty years ago, the Chinese government abused and controlled every aspect of the lives of its impoverished people. The Chinese middle class did not exist. In the last two decades, the Chinese have moved from a totally government-controlled economy toward freer markets, and more than 300 million Chinese citizens now comfortably belong in the world’s middle class. Unfortunately, the Chinese government still allows egregious abuses of law and its people, but the old model was a complete disaster.

    The Warren and de Blasio answer for strengthening the American middle class would move us toward the old Chinese economic model. They propose having the government dictate wages, overtime, vacation and leave policies, child-care requirements, and how much men and women are paid. They would dictate tuition levels for colleges. While decrying cronyism, they want a central government empowered to decide which companies are “fair,” and only those would receive funding for research and development. According to them, rather than allowing a business to succeed — or fail — on its own merits, government should pick the winners and bail them out with the public’s money when they fail.

    They oppose free markets. Instead, they’d create “fair rules” in the marketplace. Let’s cut through the code words here. They don’t want you to be free to make economic decisions. Instead, they want the power to decide what is “fair” for you. Nowhere in their list of new government services and controls is any mention of a cost to us. We’re to believe only Bill Gates and a few of his friends would pay.

    Except we know that isn’t true. The cost of their policies would be paid in more debt, taxes and fewer jobs. Have they learned nothing from watching Greece?

    Warren and de Blasio aim their argument for a massive expansion of federal power at the goal of helping the middle class. The great American middle class was not created by government policies. Their prescription would crush working families and small business — the engine of the American dream.

    The debate here isn’t between a more powerful central government versus no government and a dog-eat-dog world where the strong eat the weak. A fair read of American history shows that wise government policies nurture an environment where the dream can grow through actions, such as funding of public infrastructure, scientific and technological research, and public education. And government regulation plays a necessary role in keeping America safe.

    To build their case that America today is in need of radical change, Warren and de Blasio make the incredible claim that America used to invest in our kids and in policies to build a strong middle class, but “we don’t anymore.” What are those government policies? Social Security, Medicare, free public education. We don’t invest in these policies anymore? Spending for these programs has risen from $195 billion in 1980 to just under $2 trillion today.

    If Warren and de Blasio limited their argument to the need for government assistance to help the poorest and weakest in our society, there wouldn’t be a debate. I would agree with that. But that is not their claim. They claim that a massive expansion of federal power would help the families in the middle. Their prescription requires middle America to surrender freedom. In exchange, they say government control would improve our situation in life more than exercising our own freedom will.

    Warren and de Blasio’s prescription is for killing the American dream rather than reviving it.



  • Only 22 Countries Have Never Been Invaded By Britain (For Now)

    While America may have troops in around 150 countries around the world, it still has not ‘officially’ invaded as many as Britain managed throughout its history… but there’s still time.

     

    Source: @MaxCRoser

    *  *  *

    Time to step up the American Empire game…



  • Birth Tourism: How 1000s Of Pregnant Chinese Women Visit The US To Give Birth (& Get A Passport)

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    Did you know there exists a highly lucrative business in America that consists of helping pregnant Chinese women get into the U.S. merely to give birth and get their children passports? Yep, neither did I.

    From Bloomberg:

    Fiona He gave birth to her second child, a boy, on Jan. 24, 2015, at Pomona Valley Hospital in Southern California. The staff was friendly, the delivery uncomplicated, and the baby healthy. He, a citizen of China, left the hospital confident she had made the right decision to come to America to have her baby.

     

    She’d arrived in November as a customer of USA Happy Baby, one of an increasing number of agencies that bring pregnant Chinese women to the States. Like most of them, Happy Baby is a deluxe service that ushers the women through the visa process and cares for them before and after delivery.

     

    There are many reasons to have a baby in the U.S. The air is cleaner, the doctors generally are better, and pain medication is dispensed more readily. Couples can evade China’s one-child policy, because they don’t have to register the birth with local authorities. The main appeal of being a “birth tourist,” though, is that the newborn goes home with a U.S. passport. The 14th Amendment decrees that almost any child born on U.S. soil is automatically a citizen; the only exception is a child born to diplomats. He and her husband paid USA Happy Baby $50,000 to have an American son. If they had to, she says, they’d have paid more.

     

    A week later, five men from Homeland Security Investigations, the sheriff’s department, and the fire department arrived. At first He thought they’d come from the homeowners’ association. Then she saw the bulletproof vests and handguns. They showed her a search warrant. She recognized the translator from the previous visit. “Then they asked me a lot of questions, and I became nervous,” she says.

     

    The HSI agents told He she wasn’t in trouble. That turned out to be only sort of true. They were investigating the owners of USA Happy Baby—Dong and her husband, Michael Liu—for suspected tax evasion, money laundering, and visa fraud. Although it’s legal to travel to the U.S. to give birth, it’s illegal to lie about the purpose of a visit—or coach someone to do so. For two hours the agents gathered documents, including the family’s passports, and made copies of He’s e-mails and texts. “They took my son’s immunization record, even the paper I used to record his milk time,” she says.

     

    Homeland Security and the IRS have been investigating the growing business of “birth tourism,” which operates in a legal gray area, since last June. The industry is totally unregulated and mostly hidden. Fiona’s apartment was one of more than 30 baby safe houses that HSI agents and local law enforcement searched in Southern California that day in March. They came with translators and paramedics, almost 300 people in all. The investigators focused on three agencies—USA Happy Baby, You Win USA Vacation Resort, and Star Baby Care—using a confidential informant, undercover operations, and surveillance, according to three affidavits.

     

    No one knows the exact number of Chinese birth tourists or services catering to them. Online ads and accounts in the Chinese-language press suggest there could be hundreds, maybe thousands, of operators. A California association of these services called All American Mother Service Management Center claims 20,000 women from China gave birth in the U.S. in 2012 and about the same number in 2013. These figures are often cited by Chinese state media, but the center didn’t reply to a request for comment. The Center for Immigration Studies, an American organization that advocates limiting the scope of the 14th Amendment, estimates there could have been as many as 36,000 birth tourists from around the world in 2012.

     

    The U.S. and Canada are the only developed countries that grant birthright citizenship. For those who believe U.S. immigration policies are too generous, birth tourism has become a contentious issue. “It’s like somebody giving birth in your living room and saying they’re part of your family,” says Ira Mehlman, the spokesman for the Federation for American Immigration Reform.

     

    After the March raids, 29 Chinese mothers and relatives were designated material witnesses and ordered to stay in Southern California until the federal court decided they could leave. Fiona He moved from her apartment in Rancho Cucamonga to one in another part of the Inland Empire. “I want my children to have the best they can,” she says. “But I had no idea I would have this trouble. We didn’t hurt anyone. We just found an easy way to stay here to give birth. Is that wrong?

     

    If a woman says she’s traveling to give birth, the consular and customs officers may request proof that she can pay for her hospital stay. (The same would be asked of anybody seeking medical treatment in the U.S.) “Keep every single one of your invoices as evidence that you didn’t use the public charge,” Zhai says, referring to Medicaid. “If you have receipts with big sums, such as a watch worth tens of thousands, or a diamond ring, save those too.”

    The consular and customs officers “may” ask for proof?

    There’s a lot of money to be made in laundering Chinese money into America, as well as in getting Chinese citizens a green card or residency.



  • UK PM David Cameron Proclaims: It’s Not Enough To Follow The Law, You Must Love Big Brother

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    It’s not just those domestic extremists and crazy “conspiracy theory” kooks who took serious issue with UK Prime Minister David Cameron’s recent overtly fascist language when it comes to freedom of expression in Great Britain. For example, in a post published today, the UK Independent describes the quote below as “the creepiest thing David Cameron has ever said.”

    Screen Shot 2015-05-14 at 11.52.20 AM

    This statement, and others like it, are a huge deal. This isn’t how the leader of a major civilized Western so-called “democracy” speaks to the citizenry. It is how a master talks to his slaves. How a ruler addresses his subjects. I think the following tweet by Glenn Greenwald earlier today sums up David Cameron’s attitude perfectly well:

    Those of us who are in disbelief over David Cameron’s recent language, don’t have to just point to the quote above. There’s a lot more to it than a simple quote. For example, the Guardian reports:

    The measures would give the police powers to apply to the high court for an order to limit the “harmful activities” of an extremist individual. The definition of harmful is to include a risk of public disorder, a risk of harassment, alarm or distress or creating a “threat to the functioning of democracy”.

    A “risk of public disorder,” or a “risk of harassment alarm or distress.” Think about that for a second. Pretty much 90% of all speech could be classified as posing a risk to all of those things. It’s basically banning any criticism the government doesn’t like. Truly remarkable. Now here’s how the magnificent “democracy” of Great Britain plans on dealing with such “extremists.”

    They would include a ban on broadcasting and a requirement to submit to the police in advance any proposed publication on the web and social media or in print. The bill will also contain plans for banning orders for extremist organizations which seek to undermine democracy or use hate speech in public places, but it will fall short of banning on the grounds of provoking hatred.

    Although I’m not a British citizen and have never lived in the UK, I have spent some time writing about the disturbing trends happening across the pond due to the historic, cultural, geopolitical and linguistic ties between the U.S. and Great Britain. I warned all about these dangerous trends last fall in the post, The UK’s Conservative Party Declares War on YouTube, Twitter, Free Speech and Common Sense. Here are a few excerpts:

    Teresa May wants to “ban non-violent extremist groups that fall short of the current threshold for being banned as terrorist-related organizations.” Think about that very closely. Essentially, she is saying non-violent groups that are currently not breaking any laws should be criminalized by creating new laws. Once this process begins, it will continue to be expanded and expanded until pretty much every form of expression other than government propaganda will be banned.

     

    Secondly, she notes that the new laws are necessary to combat groups that undertake activities “for the purpose of overthrowing democracy.” Considering that the U.S. government changes the meanings of words at a moment’s notice, such as claiming that “imminent” doesn’t really mean “imminent,” I argue that an official government definition of democracy is necessary. Moreover, what if the UK is like the U.S., a state that claims to be a democracy, but in reality is an oligarchy? What are the rules about calling for the removal of an oligarchy?

    Have fun mates.



  • Are You Ready For The Coming Debt Revolution?

    Submitted by Bill Bonner via Bonner & Partners,

    There is a specter haunting America… and all the developed nations of the world. It is the specter of a debt revolution.

    We left off yesterday talking about how the economy of the last 30 years – and especially that of the last six years – has favored the old over the young.

    “Rise up, ye young’uns,” we as much as said, “you have nothing to lose but your parents’ debts.”

    We showed how the value of U.S. corporate equity, mainly held by older people, had multiplied by 28 times since 1981.

    That was no honest bull market in stocks; it was a market sent soaring by an explosion of credit.

    But what did it do for young people whose only assets are their time and their youthful energy?

    Alas, the real economy has increased by only five times over the same period.

    A Grim and Menacing Specter

    And when you look more closely at work and wages, the specter grows grimmer and more menacing. Average hourly wages have barely budged in the last 30 years. And average household incomes have fallen – from $57,000 to $52,000 – in the 21st century.

    But as our fingers came to rest yesterday, there was one question hanging in the air, like the smoke from an exploded hand grenade: Why? Was this huge shift – of trillions of dollars of wealth from young working people to old asset holders – an accident?

    Was it just the maturing of a market economy in the electronic age? Was it because China took the capitalist road in 1979? Or because robots were competing with young people for jobs?

    Nope… on all three counts.

    First, old people, not young people, control government. Ultra-wealthy campaign funders like Sheldon Adelman and the Koch brothers were all born in the 1930s. The big money comes from wealthy geezers like these, eager to buy candidates early in the season when they are still relatively cheap. Old companies fund most Washington lobbyists, too. And old people decide elections: There are a lot of them… and they vote. They know where the money is.

     

    Second, the government – doing the bidding of old people – restricts competition, subsidizes well-entrenched industries, raises the cost of employing young people, and directs its bailouts, cheap credit, and contracts to the graybeards.

     

    Third, the credit-based money system increases the profits and prices of existing capital. It encourages borrowing and spending. This rewards the current generation while pushing the costs into the future.

    Grandparents Prey on Grandchildren

    None of this was an accident. None of it would have happened without the active intervention of the old folks, using the government to get what they could never have gotten honestly.

    This is not the same as saying they were completely aware of what they were doing and what consequences their actions would have. We doubt the Nixon administration had any idea what would happen after it tore up the Bretton Woods monetary system in 1971. It was behind the eight ball, fearing foreign governments would call away America’s gold.

    Few in the White House realized they had made such a calamitous mistake when the president ended the convertibility of the dollar into gold.

    And yet it created a world in which parents and grandparents could prey on their grandchildren… for the next 44 years. And it’s still not over.

    The new credit money – which could be borrowed into existence with no need for any savings or gold backing – was just what old people needed.

    We have estimated that it increased spending by about $33 trillion over and above what the old, gold-backed system would have allowed. That spending lifted the value of the geezers’ assets and increased their living standards. Meanwhile, the average 25-year-old reporting for work in 2015 can’t expect a single dollar more in real hourly wages than his father did in 1980.

    The total value of outstanding U.S. corporate bonds was 17% of GDP in 1981. Now, it’s $11.6 trillion – or 65% of GDP.

    What did corporations use that money for?

    Some of it went into capital investment that made companies more productive and more profitable. But much of it went where you would expect it to go: to buy back shares… to acquire other companies at inflated prices… and to pay off executives as the value of their share options went up!

    Who did this benefit? Mostly people over 50.

    Government debt is even worse. Unlike most personal debt, it doesn’t go to the grave with the person who borrowed it. It sticks around to burden the next generation – who got nothing from it.

    Federal debt in 1980 was less than $1 trillion. Today, it is $18 trillion. That money was used to fund federal programs – few of which provided any benefit to young people.

    An accident? A mistake? Partly. But old people must have known what they were doing.

    Their lobbyists asked for the spending. Their politicians voted for it. Their companies enjoyed the revenues. And they pocketed much of the money. When the economy threatened a correction, they demanded more credit on easier terms to keep the money flowing. And when their credit balloon popped in 2008, they whined to the feds to protect their ill-gotten gains.

    Honest capitalism? Not if they could prevent it.

    Creative destruction? Not on their watch.

    Pay for what you get? Not if they could put the bills on the next generation.

    Young people of the world, unite!



  • China Creates Perpetual Leverage Machine After Dropping Debt Directive

    China is in a tough spot and it’s starting to show up in what look like contradictory policy decisions. The problem — as discussed at length in “How China’s Banks Hide Trillions In Credit Risk” and in “China’s Shadow Banking Grinds To A Halt As Bad Debt Surges” — goes something like this. In the interest of curbing systemic risk and decreasing the percentage of TSF comprised of off-balance sheet financing, China has moved to rein in the shadow banking boom that helped fuel the country’s meteoric growth. The effort to deleverage a system laboring under some $28 trillion in debt is complicated by the fact that the export-driven economy is growing at the slowest pace in 6 years (and that’s if you believe the official numbers), a scenario which calls for some manner of stimulus. Unfortunately, the yuan’s dollar peg has served to further pressure China’s exports while rising capital outflows (plus an IMF SDR bid) make currency devaluation an undesirable tool for boosting the economy. Beijing has thus resorted to slashing policy rates, cutting the benchmark lending rate three times in six months and RRR twice this year (and they aren’t done yet). This of course flies in the face of attempts to deleverage the system. That is, lowering real interest rates encourages more leverage, not less, but Beijing has little choice. It must walk the tightrope, because at some point, the deceleration in economic growth will become so readily apparent that China will no longer be able to stick to the (likely) fabricated 7% output figure. 

    Consider the following graphics which do a good job of illustrating how China has too much leverage and not enough leverage at the same time. The first chart shows that credit creation in China far outstrips EM and G4 countries…

    …while the second graphic shows that the ratio of TSF to new bank loans is near one, meaning almost all of new credit creation is in the form of traditional loans suggesting the shadow banking complex (the engine that has helped drive expansion) has indeed ground to a halt…

    As we discussed on Thursday, the country’s local government debt dilemma is a microcosm of the challenges facing the broader economy. Local governments used shadow banking conduits to skirt borrowing limits, accumulating a massive pile of high-yield debt in the process. The total debt burden for these localities sums to around 35% of GDP and because a non-trivial portion carries yields that are much higher than traditional muni bonds, the debt servicing costs have become unbearable. To remedy the situation, Beijing is implementing a debt swap program which allows local governments to swap their high-yielding loans for long-term bonds with lower coupons. In order to create demand for the new issues, the PBoC is allowing banks that purchase the new bonds to post them as collateral for cash that can then be re-lent to the broader economy, presumably at a healthy spread. So while the program is designed to help local governments deleverage by cutting hundreds of billions from debt servicing costs, the PBoC’s move to allow the new LGBs to be pledged for cash by the purchasing banks, means that on net, the entire refi program will actually add leverage to the system as banks use the cash they receive from repoing their LGBs to make new loans.

    In the end, it’s the same dilemma: China is attempting to deleverage and re-leverage at the same time. 

    Local government bond supply is expected to come in at around CNY1.6 trillion for the year (that includes CNY1 trillion of new bonds issued in connection with the debt swap program and another CNY600 billion to fill budget gaps). While that’s four times last year’s issuance, the increase in supply is tolerable because it’s supposedly for a good cause. That is, the lion’s share of new supply is part of the debt swap program and will thus go towards helping issuing local governments reduce their debt service burden and thus deleverage. Of course, as we said above, these bonds ultimately end up creating more leverage when they’re pledged by the purchasing banks for cash that’s then re-lent, but we’ll focus just on the effect the program has on local government finances for now and if we take that narrow view, the refi effort should help. Unless of course the PBoC does something stupid like lift the ban on local governments accumulating the same type of off-balance sheet debt that got them into their current predicament. 

    Via WSJ:

    China is reversing course on a major effort to tackle its hefty local government debt problem, marking a setback for a priority reform aimed at getting its financial house in order.

     

    The move could provide the economy with some short-term help. But it restores a backdoor way that enabled local governments to load up on debt in recent years, providing a drag on growth at a time when Beijing is looking for ways to rekindle it.

     

    According to an announcement made Friday by the State Council, China’s cabinet, the authorities relaxed controls on the ability of local governments to raise money by allowing them to tap government-sponsored financing companies—the very entities that have been blamed for a rapid run-up in China’s local debt load over the past few years.

     

    The move undermines an October policy intended to prevent those financing firms from taking on new debt.

     

    It comes as China’s long push toward financial reform—part of its broader effort to make the economy rely less on big investments but more on consumer spending—increasingly bumps up against a more pressing national goal: boosting growth.

     

    The latest move comes as the world’s second-largest economy endures slower-than-expected growth. A barrage of monetary-easing measures since last year has proved insufficient to counter a real-estate downturn and flagging factory output…

     

    Beijing heavily restricts the ability of local governments to borrow. In response, local officials around China have created thousands of finance companies called local-government financing vehicles that can borrow on their behalf. Such borrowing—which totals about $4 trillion by some estimates—is responsible for one-quarter of the buildup in China’s overall domestic debt since 2008, according to analysts. The International

    Monetary Fund says China’s debt is growing more rapidly than debt in Japan, South Korea and the U.S. did before they tumbled into recessions.

     

    Under the rule issued in October, those local financing vehicles were barred from borrowing additional funds starting this year, as the government sought to close what it dubbed “the back door” for localities to borrow.

     

    Instead, all borrowing would be done by the local governments themselves and be appropriately disclosed and reflected in their budget plans. The purpose was to rein in runaway local-debt growth and make local borrowings more transparent.

     

    According to the latest directive, local financing firms can continue to get loans from banks to fund ongoing projects. If the local firms have trouble repaying their bank debts, the rule says, their loan contracts should be “renegotiated and extended.” 

    Here’s Deutsche Bank with more color:

    The Ministry of Finance (MoF), the PBoC, and CBRC issued a policy guideline on May 11 and loosened control on the financing of local government financing vehicles (LGFV). This policy guideline has been made public today. We take this as a significant policy easing signal. The growth slowdown in Q1 was partly due to a crackdown on LGFV financing by MoF and the State Council who issued the “document 43” guideline in late 2014. The new guideline will likely make “document 43” less effective. This development is in line with our expectation, and it is consistent with the pickup of fiscal spending in April (see our note China: April fiscal data show first sign of stimulus on May 15). It reinforces our view that growth may rebound slightly in H2. 

     

    The guideline released on May 11 focuses on the financing of ongoing LGFV projects. It specifies several issues, including: 1: Banks should not stop lending to ongoing projects which started before end of 2014. If the ongoing projects have trouble repaying banks, the loan contracts may be renegotiated and extended. (ZH: we discussed forced roll overs just yesterday; this is NPL ‘management’) 2: Encourage new financing through fund raising from private sources. For projects where financing is not sufficient, new financing should be included into local government budget and financed through government bonds. 3. Encourage spending in rural water projects, public housing, urban transportation projects. 4. Local governments now have more authority to spend fiscal funds flexibly before local government bonds are issued.

     

    Note what China has done. They justified the implementation of LTROs by pointing to the need to jumpstart the refinancing program for local government debt accumulated off-balance sheet. The LTRO program will have the effect of creating more leverage, as purchased LGBs are pledged for PBoC cash that’s then re-lent. The net increase in leverage could be justified by the hundreds of billions local governments will save on interest expense. Meanwhile, local governments would not be allowed to use LGFVs to take on more debt because after all, taking out off-balance sheet loans was what got them into trouble in the first place, so tapping those channels again while simultaneously participating in the debt swap program would render the entire refi effort useless. Now, Beijing has done a complete 180 and will not only allow, but encourage local governments to accumulate more of the very same type of debt they are now swapping, meaning that even as the newly-issued debt-swap bonds decrease local governments’ debt servicing costs, new financing via LGFVs will invariably carry higher rates just as it did before, meaning the whole program is a wash. 

    Actually it’s worse than that. Because as we noted above, inserting an LTRO program into the equation means that every new debt-swap bond ultimately ends up creating a new loan for the broader economy and now that local governments are free to go right back to accumulating the same high interest loans which necessitated the creation of the debt swap program in the first place, the end result is simply the original scenario (i.e. local governments gorging themselves on off-balance sheet financing) only with the addition of an LTRO program.

    Better (or worse) still, one is certainly left to wonder what stops Beijing from allowing newly-acquired off-balance sheet debt to be swapped for still more newly issued muni bonds. In other words, the current plan seems to be to segregate legacy high-yield loans from new LGFV financing, with the former eligible for the debt swap program and the latter ineligible. While the policy guidelines call for new LGFV loans to be rolled over by lenders in the event local governments get into trouble, it’s not clear what stops Beijing from simply saying that these loans are also eligible for the debt swap.

    Should that happen, local governments would be free to borrow cash from whoever will lend it, at whatever interest rate the lender wishes to charge, because they know that ultimately, these loans can be swapped for low yielding muni bonds which will then be pledged by banks for cash that is in turn used to make loans to individuals and businesses.

    And that, ladies and gentlemen, is how you create a perpetual leverage machine disguised as a deleveraging program.



  • Before You Buy That Rothko – How The CIA Covertly Nurtured Modern Art As A Cold War "Weapon"

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog, 

    For decades in art circles it was either a rumour or a joke, but now it is confirmed as a fact. The Central Intelligence Agency used American modern art – including the works of such artists as Jackson Pollock, Robert Motherwell, Willem de Kooning and Mark Rothko – as a weapon in the Cold War. In the manner of a Renaissance prince – except that it acted secretly – the CIA fostered and promoted American Abstract Expressionist painting around the world for more than 20 years.

     

    Because Abstract Expressionism was expensive to move around and exhibit, millionaires and museums were called into play. Pre-eminent among these was Nelson Rockefeller, whose mother had co-founded the Museum of Modern Art in New York. As president of what he called “Mummy’s museum”, Rockefeller was one of the biggest backers of Abstract Expressionism (which he called “free enterprise painting”). His museum was contracted to the Congress for Cultural Freedom to organise and curate most of its important art shows.

     

    The museum was also linked to the CIA by several other bridges. William Paley, the president of CBS broadcasting and a founding father of the CIA, sat on the members’ board of the museum’s International Program. John Hay Whitney, who had served in the agency’s wartime predecessor, the OSS, was its chairman. And Tom Braden, first chief of the CIA’s International Organisations Division, was executive secretary of the museum in 1949.

     

    – From the excellent Independent article published in 1995: Modern Art Was CIA ‘Weapon’

    Most of you will be aware of the oligarch bidding wars for high end art at recent auctions held by Christie’s and Sotheby’s. In fact, the feeding frenzy was so extreme, the top 10 lots accounted for almost $800 million alone. Some of these paintings are breathtakingly beautiful, such as Vincent Van Gogh’s, “L’Allée des Alyscamps.” Others, not so much. Such as this one by Mark Rothko, which sold for $46.5 million.

    Screen Shot 2015-05-14 at 10.17.39 AM

    Unsurprisingly, the paintings which seem to be least inspiring were by artists who were covertly pushed by the CIA in the 1950’s as part of its cold war strategy. Mark Rothko, for example, was born in the Russian Empire in 1903 (modern day Latvia) and ended up in America in 1913. Being a Russian artist in America made him the perfect CIA tool, and apparently his art served that purpose unbeknownst to him. The CIA program was originally set up in 1947, under the not so covert division called the Propaganda Assets Inventory. You really can’t make this up.

    In one of the most interesting articles I’ve ever read, we learn from the UK Independent in a 1995 article:

    For decades in art circles it was either a rumour or a joke, but now it is confirmed as a fact. The Central Intelligence Agency used American modern art – including the works of such artists as Jackson Pollock, Robert Motherwell, Willem de Kooning and Mark Rothko – as a weapon in the Cold War. In the manner of a Renaissance prince – except that it acted secretly – the CIA fostered and promoted American Abstract Expressionist painting around the world for more than 20 years.

     

    The connection is improbable. This was a period, in the 1950s and 1960s, when the great majority of Americans disliked or even despised modern art – President Truman summed up the popular view when he said: “If that’s art, then I’m a Hottentot.” As for the artists themselves, many were ex- communists barely acceptable in the America of the McCarthyite era, and certainly not the sort of people normally likely to receive US government backing.

     

    Why did the CIA support them? Because in the propaganda war with the Soviet Union, this new artistic movement could be held up as proof of the creativity, the intellectual freedom, and the cultural power of the US. Russian art, strapped into the communist ideological straitjacket, could not compete.

     

    The existence of this policy, rumored and disputed for many years, has now been confirmed for the first time by former CIA officials. Unknown to the artists, the new American art was secretly promoted under a policy known as the “long leash” – arrangements similar in some ways to the indirect CIA backing of the journal Encounter, edited by Stephen Spender.

     

    The decision to include culture and art in the US Cold War arsenal was taken as soon as the CIA was founded in 1947. Dismayed at the appeal communism still had for many intellectuals and artists in the West, the new agency set up a division, the Propaganda Assets Inventory, which at its peak could influence more than 800 newspapers, magazines and public information organisations. They joked that it was like a Wurlitzer jukebox: when the CIA pushed a button it could hear whatever tune it wanted playing across the world.

     

    This was the “long leash”. The centerpiece of the CIA campaign became the Congress for Cultural Freedom, a vast jamboree of intellectuals, writers, historians, poets, and artists which was set up with CIA funds in 1950 and run by a CIA agent. It was the beach-head from which culture could be defended against the attacks of Moscow and its “fellow travelers” in the West. At its height, it had offices in 35 countries and published more than two dozen magazines, including Encounter.

     

    The Congress for Cultural Freedom also gave the CIA the ideal front to promote its covert interest in Abstract Expressionism. It would be the official sponsor of touring exhibitions; its magazines would provide useful platforms for critics favourable to the new American painting; and no one, the artists included, would be any the wiser.

     

    Because Abstract Expressionism was expensive to move around and exhibit, millionaires and museums were called into play. Pre-eminent among these was Nelson Rockefeller, whose mother had co-founded the Museum of Modern Art in New York. As president of what he called “Mummy’s museum”, Rockefeller was one of the biggest backers of Abstract Expressionism (which he called “free enterprise painting”). His museum was contracted to the Congress for Cultural Freedom to organise and curate most of its important art shows.

     

    The museum was also linked to the CIA by several other bridges. William Paley, the president of CBS broadcasting and a founding father of the CIA, sat on the members’ board of the museum’s International Program. John Hay Whitney, who had served in the agency’s wartime predecessor, the OSS, was its chairman. And Tom Braden, first chief of the CIA’s International Organizations Division, was executive secretary of the museum in 1949.

    Modern art fame, like so much else, was brought to you by the CIA, mainstream media and the Rockefellers.

    He confirmed that his division had acted secretly because of the public hostility to the avant-garde: “It was very difficult to get Congress to go along with some of the things we wanted to do – send art abroad, send symphonies abroad, publish magazines abroad. That’s one of the reasons it had to be done covertly. It had to be a secret. In order to encourage openness we had to be secret.”

     

    In 1958 the touring exhibition “The New American Painting”, including works by Pollock, de Kooning, Motherwell and others, was on show in Paris. The Tate Gallery was keen to have it next, but could not afford to bring it over. Late in the day, an American millionaire and art lover, Julius Fleischmann, stepped in with the cash and the show was brought to London.

     

    The money that Fleischmann provided, however, was not his but the CIA’s. It came through a body called the Farfield Foundation, of which Fleischmann was president, but far from being a millionaire’s charitable arm, the foundation was a secret conduit for CIA funds.

     

    So, unknown to the Tate, the public or the artists, the exhibition was transferred to London at American taxpayers’ expense to serve subtle Cold War propaganda purposes.

    Of course, this stuff is still going on as much as ever, if not more so, and we can only begin to imagine how much modern American society is being covertly manipulated, duped and scammed by CIA propagandists. In case you need a few examples…

    U.S. Officials Panic About Seymour Hersh Story; Then Deny His Claims Using Jedi Mind Tricks

    Bankers for Hire – Former Bank of Baltimore CEO Admits He Worked for the CIA

    Revelations from the Torture Report – CIA Lies, Nazi Methods and the $81 Million No-Bid Torture Contract

    “Non-Official Cover” – Respected German Journalist Blows Whistle on How the CIA Controls the Media

    Remember Zero Dark Thirty? Turns Out it was a CIA Propaganda Film After All

    Of course, that’s just the very tip of the iceberg.

     



  • Artist's Impression Of Mainstream Media This Week

    “Distract”-gate…

     

     

    Source: Townhall



  • America's Pitiful "Choice"

    Submitted by Pater Tenebrarum via Acting-Man.com,

    A Look Ahead to the Next (S)election

    We realize we are jumping the gun a bit here, after all, it isn’t yet certain which candidates will win the primaries and become presidential candidates. However, we are taking an educated guess here, based on past elections and primaries. The Democratic Party usually has a relatively non-competitive field. One or two candidates are most likely to get the nomination from the outset. Left-of-field candidates like e.g. Bernie Sanders may take part, but have no chance anyway. Last time around, Hillary Clinton faced quite a formidable opponent in Barrack Obama, who undoubtedly was a far more appealing choice from the perspective of the Democratic base.

     

    Military_Industrial_Complex

    We present to you the likely winner of the next election …

     

    This time around, it is hard to see who could possibly stop Hillary, except perhaps herself. She is as scandal-ridden as a stray dog in the slums of Lagos is flee-ridden. So she might trip over one of her scandals, but not if the US mainstream press has anything to say about it. This is actually a bit of a word play in a sense, since she usually gets away with stuff precisely because the mainstream press isn’t saying much about it. We also know from occasionally watching the discourse on Democratic grassroots sites that they are all rooting for her this time (we admittedly can’t understand it, but there it is).

    With respect to the Republicans, it seems likely that the primaries will once again see a large field of candidates competing. The only somewhat offbeat choice on the menu is Rand Paul, who is a bit like a version of Ron Paul who has shed a lot of Ron in order to become “electable”. We cannot fault him for this strategy – if he were as fiercely principled as his father, he’d have no chance whatsoever. Rand Paul is the best chance the libertarian wing of the Republican party has had in a very long time indeed. We can be 100% sure though that he is not the preferred choice of the Republican establishment – the bland, war-mongering professional political clique that is always pushing for an equally bland candidate. To wit, Mitt Romney last time around – how much more uninteresting a candidate could they have possibly picked? So who is the Republican “establishment candidate” this time? Like Hillary, he is part of what America has instead of a nobility: Jeb Bush.

     

    Paul-Ran

    Rand Paul – the only possible candidate not utterly committed to statism and hence unlikely to get the nomination

    Photo credit: WTVQ

    The two major parties might as well be one party. Both are statist to the core, with only their emphasis slightly differing. The Democratic Party leans more toward welfare statism, the Republicans more toward warfare statism. A slight exception may be the small paleo-conservative and libertarian wings of the Republican Party, which would long have become a third party if the US were Europe. In the US the system is extremely stacked in favor of the two established parties though. It is extremely difficult to even get one’s candidates on a ballot as a third party – in fact, it is far easier for a non-establishment group to get onto the ballots in Russia (yes, allegedly “authoritarian” Russia) than it is in the US. Hence many of the more off-beat candidates are joining one of the two big parties, picking the one that seems ideologically the closest to their own views.

    So here is the most likely “choice” in the next presidential selection:

     

    Jeb-and-Hillary

    Hillary and Jeb

     

    We know one interest group in the US that is already rubbing its hands at the prospect of these two butting heads, because it will win no matter which one of them becomes president: the war racketeers, a.k.a. the military-industrial complex.

     

    war-is-hell-cartoon

    These guys are eagerly looking forward to a Hillary vs. Jeb election

     

    Hillary the Neo-Con

    Investigative journalist Glenn Greenwald, who writes for the “Intercept” these days, is philosophically sympathetic to the misnamed liberals, or let us rather say he isn’t averse to “progressive” ideology. We generally prefer to call it what it is, namely socialism. However, he has never once hesitated to criticize powerful Democrats with just as much verve as he displayed back when his main targets were G.W. Bush and Dick Cheney, and we like him for his consistency. If they are evil, he’s saying so. Anyway, as someone who is generally sympathetic to the Democrats, he may be uniquely qualified to provide us with a critical appraisal of Hillary. His assessment is certainly free of partisan bias as you will see below.

    The quote is taken from an interview Greenwald gave to GQ:

    Hillary is banal, corrupted, drained of vibrancy and passion. I mean, she’s been around forever, the Clinton circle. She’s a f*cking hawk and like a neocon, practically. She’s surrounded by all these sleazy money types who are just corrupting everything everywhere. But she’s going to be the ?rst female president, and women in America are going to be completely invested in her candidacy. Opposition to her is going to be depicted as misogynistic, like opposition to Obama has been depicted as racist. It’s going to be this completely symbolic messaging that’s going to overshadow the fact that she’ll do nothing but continue everything in pursuit of her own power. They’ll probably have a gay person after Hillary who’s just going to do the same thing.

     

    I hope this happens so badly, because I think it’ll be so instructive in that regard. It’ll prove the point. Americans love to mock the idea of monarchy, and yet we have our own de facto monarchy. I think what these leaks did is, they demonstrated that there really is this government that just is the kind of permanent government that doesn’t get affected by election choices and that isn’t in any way accountable to any sort of democratic transparency and just creates its own world off on its own.”

     (emphasis added)

    Greenwald is of course not the first person to notice that Hillary is not only surrounded by “sleazy money types”, but is a war-mongering harpy ideologically indistinguishable from the neo-cons. Note here that the latter are not only America’s biggest warmongers – among their philosophical/ideological heroes are people like Leo Strauss and Leon Trotsky (yes, the communist – Justin Raimondo has written extensively about their elitist and leftist roots), and they are in love with playing the role of “philosopher kings” who are constantly pulling the wool over the public’s eyes to get what they want. They are certainly not in favor of the free market. In fact, their position vis-a-vis the unwashed masses is that anything that keeps them docile is good, hence they support not only warfare statism, but welfare statism as well. Hillary fits right in, in every respect. Hell, even the New York Times has noticed.

     

    Clinton_072713

    Strident harpy Hillary

    Photo credit: AP

    Jeb Bush Still Likes the Iraq War

    We didn’t know very much about Jeb Bush, except for the fact that he’s surrounded himself with the usual neo-con advisors that seem to be the main choice of every Republican establishmentarian. However, he is not only rightly suspected of being indistinguishable from Hillary in the foreign policy department, he just proved that as long as he can somehow get a war, he will be all for it, no matter how idiotic the choice is – even in hindsight! He might as well have announced that his middle name is “stupid”. Here is a recent Reuters article on the topic:

    “Potential Republican presidential candidate Jeb Bush said he would have authorized the 2003 invasion of Iraq, just as his brother George W. Bush had done. The former Florida governor, in an interview taped to air on Fox News on Monday, acknowledged the United States made mistakes in managing Iraq after ousting President Saddam Hussein, including lack of post-war security for Iraqis.

     

    “By the way, guess who thinks that those mistakes took place as well? George W. Bush,” he said. “Yes, I mean, so just for the news flash to the world, if they’re trying to find places where there’s big space between me and my brother, this might not be one of those.”

     

    Bush has said that he is “my own man” and not tied too closely to the policies of George W. or their father, former president George H.W. Bush. He also has said his brother advises him on the Middle East.

     

    The United States invaded Iraq after making a case to the United Nations that said Saddam had biological weapons. That case turned out to have been based on flawed intelligence.

     

    “I would have [authorized the invasion] and so would have Hillary Clinton, just to remind everybody,” Bush told Fox News. “And so would almost everybody that was confronted with the intelligence they got.”

    (emphasis added)

    Anyone who paid even the slightest attention at the time knew the so-called “intelligence” was cooked up by an administration eager to go to war against a helpless third world tinpot dictator, who incidentally happened to sit atop a lot of oil. The intelligence wasn’t just “flawed” – they made it all up from day one. Today everybody knows of course that their “intelligence” consisted mainly of stuff like the lies they were told by con-men like Ahmed Chalabi (who ironically was basically an Iranian plant). US and UK secret services were told in no uncertain terms “to fix the intelligence around the policy”. The whole affair was so transparent from the outset though, that one required an IQ below room temperature not to see through it. Anyone who as naïve enough to believe even one word of Powell’s UN presentation is high on the list of people we’d love to meet at a poker table.

    It isn’t a big surprise that Hillary did indeed vote in favor of the war, but what Jeb Bush is basically saying above is that he too would have been naïve enough to have believed in this so-called “intelligence” at the time (we will refrain from insinuating that he would have been party to cooking it up, we simply don’t know enough about him to come to any conclusions in this respect). Meanwhile, the fact that his brother is “advising him on the Middle East” is downright terrifying.

     

    Conclusion

    It would be both funny and tragic if indeed Hillary and Jeb were to end up facing off against each other in the next election (personally we would classify it as a nightmare actually). What it definitely wouldn’t be is a proper choice. We haven’t yet completely given up on Rand Paul’s chances though, so at the moment there is still a sliver of hope, tiny as it is. Maybe the fat cat seen below can still be deprived of its prize.

     

    Military-Fat-Cat-Complex-Cartoon

     



  • Execution By Anti-Aircraft Gun: The Photographic Evidence

    North Korean defense minister Hyon Yong Chol made a mistake: he fell asleep at an official event at which Supreme Leader Kim Jong Un was present. 

    Kim, keen on sending a strong message amid rumors that his grip on absolute power may be slipping, reportedly decided that the appropriate punishment for napping during a rally is execution by anti-aircraft gun. 

    If true, this would mark the latest in a series of “purges” which seem to lend some credence to the notion that Kim’s family name is no longer sufficient when it comes to securing absolute power and universal admiration both from his inner circle and from North Koreans in general. At a more basic level, executing someone with a ZPU-4 pretty much ensures that nobody will ever be caught napping at official events ever again.

    Since the story broke there have been a few competing accounts of what fate ultimately befell General Chol, but according to the Committee For Human Rights In North Korea, satellite images from last October confirm the defense minister might well have met his fate at the hands of four 14mm heavy machine guns normally used to shoot down helicopters. 

    Via HRNK:

    While examining satellite imagery of an area near the North Korean capital city, the Committee for Human Rights in North Korea (HRNK) and AllSource Analysis, Inc. (ASA) may have come across evidence of a ghastly sight: the public execution of several individuals by anti-aircraft machine gun fire.

     

    A military training area generally known as the Kanggon Military Training Area is located approximately 22 km north of the capital city Pyongyang (Pyongyang-si). Given the size, composition, and location of the training facility, it is likely used by both the students and staff of the elite Kanggon Military Academy (6 km to the southwest) and units from either the Pyongyang Defense Command or the Ministry of State Security. Encompassing approximately 12km2, the training area is composed of a number of dispersed small facilities. One of those facilities, located 1.5 km northeast of the small village of S?ngi-ri, is a small arms firing range (39. 13 48.64° N, 125. 45 29.03° E). This firing range is approximately 100 meters long by 60 meters wide and consists of 11 firing lanes. A range control/viewing gallery and parking area are located immediately south of the firing range. A small drainage ditch horizontally bisects the firing range. This firing range is typical of many ranges throughout North Korea and is designed for small arms training and maintaining proficiency for weapons ranging from pistols to light machine guns, and chambered for 7.62mm (the standard AK-47 rifle round) or less.

    Sometime on or about October 7th, 2014, some very unusual activity was noted on satellite imagery of the Kanggon small arms firing range. Instead of troops occupying the firing positions on the range there was a battery of six ZPU-4 anti-aircraft guns lined up between the firing positions and the range control/viewing gallery. The ZPU-4 is an anti-aircraft gun system consisting of four 14.5mm heavy machine guns (similar to a U.S. .50 caliber heavy machine gun) mounted on a towed wheeled chassis.

    And would anyone in full possession of their faculties fire an anti-aircraft gun at this small arms firing range? 

    It is neither safe nor practical to use such weapons on a small arms range, as the combined weight of fire from the six ZPU-4 (a total of 24 heavy machine guns) would quickly destroy the downrange backstop and necessitate reconstruction.


    A few meters behind the ZPU-4s there appears to be either a line of troops or equipment, while farther back are five trucks (of various sizes), one large trailer, and one bus. This suggests that senior officers or VIPs may have come to observe whatever activity was taking place. Most unusual in the image, perhaps, is what appears to be some sort of targets located only 30 meters downrange of the ZPU-4s.

    In case you are still skeptical, here is why those “some sort of targets” were likely human beings who we assume committed “some sort of” treason in Kim’s estimation:

    The satellite image appears to have been taken moments before an execution by ZPU-4 anti-aircraft machine guns. Busing in senior officers or VIPs to observe a ZPU-4 dry-fire training exercise at a small arms range amidst North Korea’s fuel shortages would make no sense. If the ZPU-4s were brought to the range solely to be sighted in, conducting this exercise at a 100 meter small arms firing range would be impractical. A live-fire exercise would be even more nonsensical. Rounds fired by a ZPU-4 have a range of 8,000 m and can reach a maximum altitude of 5,000 m. Positioning a battery of six ZPU-4s to fire horizontally at targets situated only 30 m downrange could have no conceivable utility from a military viewpoint. The most plausible explanation of the scene captured in the October 7th satellite image is a gruesome public execution.

    Just out of morbid curiosity, how might an execution by anti-aircraft fire unfold?

    Anyone who has witnessed the damage one single U.S. .50 caliber round does to the human body will shudder just trying to imagine a battery of 24 heavy machine guns being fired at human beings. Bodies would be nearly pulverized. The gut-wrenching viciousness of such an act would make “cruel and unusual punishment” sound like a gross understatement.

    We’ll close be reiterating what we said earlier this week. Even if General Chol was indeed an unwilling participant in a recreation of the scene which HRNK claims played out last October at the Kanggon Military Training Area, it could have been worse. He could have merely had a visit from a lethal drone operated out of Nevada, and disappeared in an unsourced explosion, with the same effect. 



  • Global Trade Is "In The Doldrums", BofAML Says

    We’ve spent a considerable amount of time discussing trends in global trade lately, touching on slumping metals demand and collapsing exports in China, sharp decreases in dry bulk trade, a prolonged period of depressed freight rates, and the emergence of a worldwide deflationary supply glut. 

    For their part, Goldman thinks China’s transition to a consumption-led economic model will be a drag on trade for years to come. “There are no other markets large and/or dynamic enough to offset a slowdown in China in the foreseeable future, and we forecast trade volumes to stabilize in the period to 2018,” the bank said, in a note out earlier this month. 

     

    As a reminder, here is our summary of the situation in China:

    Meanwhile, we’ve exhaustively documented the laundry list of signs that point to dramtically decelerating economic growth in China, including falling metals demand, collapsing rail freight volume, slumping exports, a war on pollution that may cost the country 40% in industrial production terms, and, most recently, a demographic shift that’s set to trigger a wholesale reversal of the factors which contributed to the country’s meteoric rise. All of this means that the world’s once-reliable engine of demand is set to stall in the years ahead. 

    Supporting the notion that global trade is severly impaired— an assertion we made back in March after observing a double-digit decline in freight rates from Asia to Northern Europe — is a new note from BofAML who offers the following unambiguously bad assessment: “Global trade of goods and services has been in the doldrums, and the poor streak seems to be extending into the second quarter.”

    Here’s more:

    Global trade of goods and services has been in the doldrums, and the poor streak seems to be extending into the second quarter. First-quarter GDP reports in the US and Germany showed surprisingly weak export growth, and the healthier run in Japanese exports has also cooled. In emerging markets, real exports have been expanding faster in Eastern Europe and Latin America but have been treading water in Asia.

     

    Is global trade wobbling due to feeble activity growth, or are structural issues to blame? The question has been recurring since 2011, when the ongoing soft patch began. If mostly cyclical in nature, trade growth could be expected to pick up once global GDP accelerates. But if predominantly structural, then EM economies should not count on meaningful demand boosts coming from above-trend growth in DM. With Fed rate hikes looming, a jammed trade channel means less growth offsets to the anticipated tightening in financial conditions.

     

    The income elasticity of global trade has indeed been declining, pointing to diminished trade spillovers. In particular, there has been a marked change in Asian supply chains in response to a maturing Chinese economy. 

     


     

    And on import growth as a leveraged play on GDP growth:

    The 10-year average of world import growth as share of GDP growth reached 2.2 in 2000, but the ratio has since entered a sustained decline. In 2014, global imports picked up only 1.2 times as much as global GDP growth. Unfortunately for trade-sensitive economies, global trade is no longer amplifying the pace of global activity.

     

    What is behind the drop in the income elasticity of global trade? It could reflect the changed composition of global final demand, more reliant on consumption rather than on export-intensive capex growth. 

     

     

    What this appears to suggest is that DM demand may be structurally (i.e. permanently) impaired which is bad news for export-driven economies (like China) and serves to underscore what we’ve been saying for quite sometime — namely that global trade has slowed to a crawl and may soon stall out altogether. 



  • Massively Levered Beta: Tepper Adds $1.3 Billion, Or 33% Of Long Equity AUM, In SPY, QQQ Calls

    Back in February, some were surprised to find that in the quarter (Q4 of 2014) in which Tepper again called the end of the bond bull market (incorrectly), dismissed Bill Gross’ PIMCO exit as irrelevant (incorrectly, now that PIMCO is no longer the world’s biggest bond fund as a result of relentless billions in outflows) and most notably, proclaiming that that stocks were inexpensive and multiples not high, Tepper dumped some 40% of his portfolio, taking his net long AUM to only $4 billion by selling among other things his entire AAPL stake just as the company went on to surge on a new bout of wearable euphoria.

    The same Tepper kept very quiet throughout all of Q1, without any public appearance all the way until May when he spoke at the Ira Sohn Conference. Why was he silent? Perhaps because while the market was topping out, Tepper was actively adding to his bullish exposure, but not in the form of many new stock positions, when in fact he partially unloaded 15 of his 38 positions, while adding 12 new positions. It was 2 of these new additions that were particularly notable: just like in early 2014, Tepper is once again back to index investing, having added a whopping $939 million in notional-equivalent SPY Calls, and $413 million in notional-equivalent QQQ Calls.

    In other words, Tepper is once again making a very levered beta bet that the market will resume climbing, and he can capture the upside through SPY and QQQ calls.

    Incidentally this is almost a carbon copy of what Tepper did a year ago, just before he said was “nervous” and unlike now, said “not to be too freakin’ long.” Recall:

    As of March 31, Tepper’s largest position is no longer just the SPY, or S&P500 ETF, which amounted to $2.1 billion in value as of December 31 followed by $765 million in the Nasdaq ETF, the QQQs, but rather calls on the S&P500, which at March 31, 2014 represented a notional equivalent of a whopping $1.1 billion, or 6 million shares! And perhaps even more notable: Tepper’s 6th largest position at the end of Q1, after the SPY Call, a cash position in SPY in second place, followed by $815 million in QQQs, and $492 million in Google and $480 million in Citi, is a new position in Nasdaq (QQQ) calls, amounting to a just as whopping $438 million share notional.

    In short, a massively beta levered deja vu.

    As for all of Tepper’s other less relevant additions, reductions and liquidations, you can find the breakdown below.

    So with Tepper adding in Q1 when he said nothing, one wonders what he was doing in Q2, when he appeared at the Ira Sohn conference and told listeners not to “fight four Feds” and that the S&P is trading a little “cheap” just days before the Fed Chairwoman said the market is largely overvalued. Something tells us he wasn’t selling Treasurys…



  • 5 Things To Ponder: Reading While Waiting List

    Submitted by Lance Roberts via STA Wealth Management,

    This past week has been much the same as the last couple of months – boring. It has been more interesting trying to count carpet fibers in my office than watching the markets.

    However, there has been some excitement in domestic bond yields that have SURGED over the last couple of weeks. Well, as I discussed earlier this week, its a surge alright, you just need a magnifying glass to actually see it.

    "The chart below is a 40-year history of the 10-year Treasury interest rate. The dashed red lines denote the long-term downtrend in interest rates."

    Interest-Rates-Surge-051315

    "The recent SURGE in interest rates is hardly noticeable when put into a long-term perspective. After rates dropped to their second lowest level in history of 1.68%, only exceeded by the "great debt ceiling default crisis of 2012" level of 1.46%, the recent bounce to 2.26% was expected"

    There also has been the divergence in economic data, some good, but mostly not. This has been good for the stock market as "bad news" means the Federal Reserve has no reason to raise rates in the near future. This is particularly the case with first quarter's GDP printing negative and second quarter's falling below 1%.

    This leaves investors in a precarious position of remaining invested as the financial markets levitate away from underlying economic realities. In fact, as recently pointed out by Tyler Durden at Zerohedge, the deviation of the markets from the economic data is one of the largest since the turn of the century.

    zero-hedge-051415

    For now, however, we wait for the market to decide its next action. Will be a resumption of the "bull run" as the vast majority expect or will the contrarian side of the markets finally prevail? I think we will have that answer very soon.

    While we await that answer, I have compiled a this week's reading list to include a smattering of articles on everything from the markets, to investing, to the Fed to the economy.


    1) Bond Rout Puts Bears On Wrong Side Of Fed by Simon Kennedy via Bloomberg Business

    "Keeping monetary policy loose is still justified to economists at JPMorgan Chase & Co. They reckon global economic growth of 1.2 percent in the first quarter was the second weakest outside of a recession in the past 25 years and worldwide inflation of 0.4 percent was the lowest.

     

    Torsten Slok, chief international economist at Deutsche Bank AG, told clients that "the QE trade is not over" and yields should soon reverse their rise once markets stabilize.

     

    'What we have seen in markets over the past two weeks has been triggered by fear and not by a change in the outlook for economic fundamentals,' said Slok. 'I continue to see U.S. rates under downward pressure as a result of money printing abroad.'"

    Read Also: 4 Charts Why The Fed Not Likely To Raise Rates This Year via Streettalklive

     

    2) High Share of Part-Time Workers Explain Weak Wage Growth by Kathleen Madigan via WSJ

    "One possible explanation is that more companies have restructured their staffing to focus on part-time workers. Because of that, there is slightly more slack in the labor markets than the jobless rate indicates. And these part-timers have less bargaining power to negotiate higher wages.

     

    To be sure, most of the jobs created in this expansion (as reported in the household survey) are full-time positions. But part-time spots, less than 35 hours a week, now account for a larger share of total employment than they did before the recession. That's true for total part-time workers and for part-time workers who would prefer a full-time position."

    Employment-Slack

    Read Also: Riddle Me This: Difference Between Headlines & Reality by Streettalklive

     

    3) The Federal Reserve's Asset Bubble Machine by Ruchir Sharma via WSJ Opinion

    "At Morgan Stanley Investment Management, we have analyzed data going back two centuries and found that until the past decade no major central bank had ever before set short-term interest rates at zero, even in periods of deflation.

     

    To critics who warn that pumping trillions of dollars into the economy in a short period is bound to drive up inflation, today's central bankers point to stagnant consumer prices and say, 'Look, Ma, no inflation.' But this ignores the fact that when money is nominally free, strange things happen, and today record-low rates are fueling an unprecedented bout of inflation across asset prices."

    Read Also: What Equity Market Bubble by Scott Grannis via Califia Beach Pundit

     

    4) Even Among The Richest, Fortunes Diverge by Annie Lowrey via NY Times

    "It found that in 2012, the average household in the bottom 90 percent of the income distribution earned about $30,997. For the average household in the top 1 percent, the figure is $1,264,065, and for the top 0.1 percent, about $6,373,782.

     

    Put another way, our 0.1 percent household made about 206 times, and our 1 percent household about 41 times, what our average household did. That gap has yawned over time. In 1990, for instance, the same multiples were 87 and 21. In 1980, they were 47 and 14."

    Super-Rich-vs-Rich

    Read Also:  Consumer Recession Arrives As Retail Sales Fail To Emerge by Jeffrey Snider via Alhambra Partners

    Read Also:  How We Will Cope With Another Downturn by Buttonwood via The Economist

     

    5) The Cardinal Sin – Missing Out by Charlie Bilello via Pension Partners

    (Note: This could also be titled: Why you will be hammered during the next downturn)

    'The greatest fear in the investment management industry is not what one might expect. It is not losing money but the fear of not making enough money when the market is moving relentlessly higher. This "fear of missing out" strikes terror into the heart of portfolio managers as clients will simply not tolerate it; it is the cardinal sin of the business.

     

    The thinking was explained to me as follows. Lose money when the markets are going down and everyone else is suffering and you'll be just fine. But fail to capture maximum upside during a raging bull market and you'll soon be out of a job."

    Read Also: Bulls Should Not Expect Help From The Fed by Cam Hui via Humble Student Of The Markets


    OTHER INTERESTING STUFF

    A Dozen Things I Learned From Julian Robertson About Investing via 25iq

    "A colleague of Robertson once said: 'When he is convinced that he is right, Julian bets the farm.' George Soros and Stanley Druckenmiller are similar. Big mispriced bets don't appear very often and when they do people like Julian Robertson bet big. This is not what he has called a 'gun slinging' approach, but rather a patient approach which seeks bets with odds that are substantially in his favor. Research and critical analysis are critical for Julian Robertson. Being patient, disciplined and yet aggressive is a rare combination and Robertson has proven he has each of these qualities."

    What Peter Schiff Said To Ben Bernanke by Tyler Durden via ZeroHedge

     

    Moore's Law Turns 50 by Thomas L. Friedman via WSJ Opinion

    "But what an exponential it's been. In introducing the evening, Intel's C.E.O., Brian Krzanich summarized where Moore's Law has taken us. If you took Intel's first generation microchip, the 1971 4004, and the latest chip Intel has on the market today, the fifth-generation Core i5 processor, he said, you can see the power of Moore's Law at work: Intel's latest chip offers 3,500 times more performance, is 90,000 times more energy efficient and about 60,000 times lower cost."


    "If you think nobody cares if you're alive, try missing a couple of car payments." – Earl Wilson

    Have a great weekend.



  • Dear Bureau Of Labor Statistics, About Those Plunging Gasoline Prices…

    One of the major reasons for yesterday’s market surge to new record highs was the surprise drop and miss in the April wholesale inflation report, or rather make that deflation, when the BLS announced that PPI in April had dropped by 0.4%, far below expectation of a 0.1% increase, of which the BLS said “over 30 percent can be attributed to the index for gasoline, which decreased 4.7 percent.”

    The implication, of course, being that with the US drifting ever further from the Fed’s desired 2% inflation threshold, not only is the probability of a June rate hike negligible, but the last time US macro data was this bad, the Fed launched QE2 (and Operation Twist… and QE3).

    Which is all great, we just have one question for the BLS: just what “data” are you looking at?

    Because a quick reality check reveals April gasoline prices not only did not drop 4.7%, they rose by 8%!

     

    … leading to the following grtesque divergence between “data” from the US Department of Truth and, well, the real world.

     

    And just to put it in perspective, at this rate in a few weeks gasoline prices in America’s most auto-dependent state, California, will be at or above levels seen from last year. In fact, the surge in California gas prices in 2015 is the fastest on record. As Larry Kudlow would call it “unambiguously bad.

     

    So, dear BLS, we are all ears about that explanation.



  • Gold & Silver Surge As Bond-Buying Bonanza Stalls Stocks

    What goes up, must come down and while stocks have yet to factor in the Fed's anti-gravity gun will end one day, bond yields roundtripped in the most dramatic way in 2 years this week. Quite a ride…

     

    A reminder (after 5 macro misses today)

    And (h/t @ImpartialExamin) from "Money, Bank Credit, and Economic Cycles"…

    OK – with that off our chest. It was quite a week in general as consensus trades swinging around…

    • Silver 3rd best week in 15 months
    • Gold 2nd best week in 15 months
    • USDollar worst 5-week run since Oct 2010
    • WTI Crude was rescued last minute to its 9th up week in a row – first time since 1999
    • Bund yields up 4th week in a row (first time since June 2012)
    • 30Y Treasury yields dropped the most since Jan 6th in the last 2 days (2nd most in over 2 years)
    • Trannies in 2015 -5.9% worst start since 2009 (Down 11 of last 20 weeks, 5 of last 8)

    Volume was awful the last two days…

     

    After collapsing through Wednesday, bonds tore lower in yield today – all the way back to unchanged on the week...the biggest drop in yields in over 4 months.

     

    The plunge in bond yields appears to be  catch up trade from the anti-correlation yesterday… very odd

     

    Stocks held on to yesterday's volumeless gains but rolled over after OPEX struck early…

     

    Futures markets show the swings a little more effectively… from Friday's payrolls print…

     

    On the day, Trannies outperformed (after being the week's loser into that)…

     

    Shale stocks continue their slide – though bounced today…

     

    The momo names remain battered, squeezed, and bruised…

     

    The dollar tumbled on the week with today's wild swings – selling EUR in Europe's session then dumping USDs as US macro data disappointed… Bad data sparked USD selling…

     

    Commodities were all higher on the week led by Silver's surge…

     

    But crude was rescued off $59.50 support into the green for the 9th week in a row…

     

    This was odd though…

     

    Charts: Bloomberg



  • Stock Indicator Suggests Big Move (Lower?) Coming

    Via Dana Lyons Tumblr,

    We don’t talk too often (because we don’t use them) about traditional technical analysis indicators. We have nothing against them; it’s just that we have our own methodologies and processes that work for us. One indicator we do like to keep an eye on is the ADX, or Average Directional Index. It is essentially an indicator of the strength (or lack of strength) of the prevailing trend over a specified period, regardless of the trend’s direction. A high number indicates a strongly trending market and a low number reflects a lack of trend. The traditional default look-back period is 14 days so we tend to stick with that. Interestingly, recent readings of the 14-day ADX applied to the S&P 500 have been among the lowest of the last 65 years, indicating an extremely “trendless” market.

    Given the recent range-bound action in U.S. stocks (which we’ve covered extensively), this isn’t too much of a surprise. Indeed, it is another way of measuring the existence, and persistence, of a trading range. As mentioned, though, this lack of trend has been especially noteworthy. On several days over the past 2 weeks, the ADX reached a reading of 9. Since 1950, there have been just 42 total days – or ¼ of 1% – that saw the ADX that low. Expanding the net to readings of 10 or lower yields 145 days, still less than 0.9% of all days since 1950.

     

     

    What is the significance of ADX readings this low, besides obviously that the market has been trendless over the recent period? Well, they say that low-volatility markets beget high-volatility markets. And while that sounds like another trite Wall Street cliche, it does seem to have some validity. Witness the ultra-low volatility periods in the U.S. Dollar and the Shanghai Composite early last year which led to explosive moves. Therefore, a market wound this tightly – like a coiled spring – may be setting up for an especially big move, one way or another.

    We say one way or another, but a look the historical precedents suggests a strong possibility that the move will be lower. For while a low ADX signifies lack of trend in either direction, historically, the moves following such readings have been surprisingly skewed to the downside – or at least below average. Here are the returns in the S&P 500 following ADX readings of 10 or less since 1950 (138 instances before the recent readings).

     

    image

     

    What accounts for such poor returns following low ADX readings?  Well, it is probably a function of when such low ADX readings tend to occur rather than a byproduct of the low readings. That is, these trendless markets often occur near transitional “topping” periods. During these periods, volatility (or at least, movement) is extremely low in contrast with bottoming periods, which tend to be volatilie, whippy type affairs.

    We often filter these studies to look at the results for markets that were trading near the 52-week high. This study makes that extra step unnecessary as that characteristic is true for most of the readings. Of the 145 ADX readings of 10 or less since 1950, the median distance of the S&P 500 from its 52-week high was just 1.9%. And just 7 of the 145 days saw the S&P 500 further than 10% from its 52-week high.

    There were a few exceptions to the weaker-than-normal returns following these readings. Like many of the studies we’ve looked at recently, those exceptions came during the mid-1990′s and in the post-2013 era. The S&P 500 saw healthy gains after such instances. Again, though, those were the exception rather than the rule. Many more of the readings, historically, have come near tops of intermediate to cyclical significance, including 1956, 1959, 1969, 1976, 1981, 1983, 2000, 2001 and 2007. Thus, the weight of the evidence is heavily skewed to a negative outcome.

    The Average Directional Index, or ADX, is an indicator of “trend strength”, regardless of direction. Recently, coincident with the range-bound trade, the ADX registered among the lowest readings on record. This directionless coiling up of the market suggests that is is about to move one way or the other in perhaps a big way. Historical readings like this, however, have been more consistent in leading to poor performance in the S&P 500 rather than necessarily an out-sized move in some direction. The signal hasn’t been unanimous in foretelling weak performance, but it has certainly been the norm over the past 65 years, and to a statistically significant degree. Thus, we would consider this another negative facing the stock market at the present time.



  • Wall Street Demands Exemption From Punishment In Exchange For Guilty Pleas In FX Rigging

    Just three days ago in “Wall Street To Enter Hollow Guilty Plea On FX Rigging, Return To Business As Usual,” we lamented the fact that the Justice Department’s latest attempt to convince an incredulous public that the government is willing to prosecute white collar crime at TBTF institutions (which includes an amusing ‘crack down’ on UBS which we outlined herewill ultimately end in nothing more than the payment of a token fine before it’s back to business as usual. We also noted that there are actually SEC regulations in place specifically designed to ensure that so-called “bad actors” are punished in a way that is actually meaningful to them and as such serves to deter the type of behavior that results in the buildup of systemic risk and the rigging, fixing and manipulation of every market and -BOR on the face of the earth. Specifically, we said the following:

    Even after Wall Street firms essentially admit to committing egregious fraud by ponying up billions to settle allegations of manipulation, policies put in place to ensure that deep pockets don’t allow big banks to simply sweep scandals under the rug once settlements are doled out are systematically skirted. The latest example of this was Deutsche Bank, who, after paying $2.5 billion to settle allegations its traders conspired to manipulate all manner of -BORs, worked with the CFTC to have language inserted in the settlement agreement exempting the bank from a Dodd Frank rule that restricts so-called “bad actors” from taking advantage of exempt securities transactions.

    The excuse for allowing Wall Street to skirt the very penalties that were put in place as a result of the very things for which the banks are now being prosecuted is two-fold: 1) there’s the so-called ‘Arthur Andersen effect’ whereby the decade-old collapse of an accounting firm and the layoffs that accompanied it are somehow supposed to represent what would happen if a Wall Street bank were not able to claim seasoned issuer status, and 2) curtailing a major bank’s ability to issue capital “speedily and efficiently”, participate in private placements, and manage mutual funds represents a systemic risk.

    We’ll leave it to readers to determine the extent to which any of that is an accurate portrayal of what would happen if big banks were unable to obtain waivers, but rest assured the waivers will be obtained as the following from Reuters makes abundantly clear:

    Banks want assurances from U.S. regulators that they will not be barred from certain businesses before agreeing to plead guilty to criminal charges over the manipulation of foreign exchange rates, causing a delay in multibillion-dollar settlements, people familiar with the matter said…

     

    The banks are also scrambling to line up exemptions or waivers from the Securities and Exchanges Commission and other federal regulators because criminal pleas trigger consequences such as removing the ability to manage retirement plans or raise capital easily…

     

    Negotiating some of the waivers among the SEC’s five commissioners could prove challenging because many of these banks have broken criminal or civil laws in the past that triggered the need for waivers.

     

    Many of the banks want an SEC waiver to continue operating as “well-known seasoned issuers” so they can sell stocks and debt efficiently, people familiar with the matter said. Such a designation allows public companies to bypass SEC approval and raise capital “off the shelf” – a process that is speedier and more convenient.

     

    Several of the people said another waiver being sought by some banks is the ability to retain a safe harbor that shields them from class action lawsuits when they make forward-looking statements.

    The banks involved are also seeking waivers that will allow them to continue operating in the mutual fund business, sources said.

     

    The plea deals could be announced as soon as next week, two of the people said, adding that not all the penalties had been finalized yet.

     

    Peter Carr, a spokesman for the U.S. Justice Department, declined comment on the timing or reason for a possible delay of any agreements. Citi, JPMorgan, RBS and UBS did not respond to requests for comment. A Barclays spokesman declined to comment.

    Note that the original version of this story said that plea deals could be announced as soon as … well, as soon as two days ago, but just as we predicted, none of the banks will enter guilty pleas without a guarantee from the government that no actual penalties (because monetary fines don’t count when you’ve got access to cheap Fed cash) will apply.

    You can expect The Justice Department to cave to these demands in relatively short order because while we know that TBTF guilty pleas represent but a pyrrhic victory (at best) for a regulatory regime that fell asleep at the wheel and allowed Wall Street to run the entire financial system into the ground, there will be no shortage of fanfare and congratulatory handshakes when the DOJ ‘proves’ how very serious it is by sending a few TBTF logos (but no actual people) to prison.



  • "The People" Vs. Piketty

    Submitted by Erico Matias Tavares via Sinclair & Co.,

    Thomas Piketty is getting a lot of attention these days. The French economist has seen the recognition for his lifelong work on the study of inequality skyrocket after publishing “Capital in the Twenty-First Century” in August 2013. The book is a best-seller, which is quite an achievement for anything with 696 pages on economics (even if by some accounts the majority of readers don’t make it much beyond page 12).

    Here’s what Paul Krugman, the don of neo-Keynesian economics, had to say about Piketty’s book back in April 2014:

    “Other books on economics have been best sellers, but Mr. Piketty’s contribution is serious, discourse-changing scholarship in a way most best sellers aren’t. And conservatives are terrified. (…)The really striking thing about the debate so far is that the right seems unable to mount any kind of substantive counterattack to Mr. Piketty’s thesis.”

    That turned out to be incorrect. Barely a month after his glowing review of Piketty’s opus magnum, Krugman had to come out in his defense after several scholars and commentators highlighted some “clear errors” in facts and figures.

    And it wasn’t just from the right either. Yanis Varoufakis, economics professor turned finance minister of Greece – and self-proclaimed Marxist – is also a critic of Piketty’s work.

    Undeterred, Piketty has joined forces with other like-minded economists to come up with actual proposals to tackle the inequality issues he wrote so extensively about.

    As that brave intellectual effort takes shape, we would venture a sneak preview: assemble a huge ledger of all financial transactions, tax the “rich” and their unfair capital gains and make sure that they leave nothing for their kids.

    This of course is music to any politician’s ears. It provides an aura of tackling one of humanity's great problems, while providing yet another reason to tax private property.

    So in spite of all the publicity, there are two sides of the story here. Should we the People be in favor or against Piketty’s argument?

    Inequality and Economic Systems

    Where would you prefer to live: in a society with obvious economic and social inequalities but with an abundance of choices and opportunities, or in another with much greater equality and less choices?

    The answer greatly influences why societies end up adopting a particular economic and political system – although not always by choice. Of course there are societies that neither feature equality nor opportunity, but in most cases there is a prevalence of one over the other.

    To see why we can use a simple example that illustrates this dynamic. An economic system is in fact a set of incentives that drive behaviour, with varying degrees of personal input and liberty. Let’s assume that there are four tribes in a large forest (we did say it was simple) trying to get from point A to point B. Each tribe has the same mix of individuals with different physical and psychological attributes but decides to adopt a different economic system in pursuit of their goal:

    • The first tribe adopts capitalism in its “rawest” form: those who can run the fastest (or by sheer luck find a great shortcut) are allowed to get ahead quickly, while the others in spite of their efforts are progressively left behind. This is how inequality is measured in this example: basically the distance between those who are ahead versus hose who are behind. This tribe on the whole will cover a lot of ground, although very unevenly: the fast runners will get very far (possibly even well beyond point B, if they so desire), while the ones in the back hope that the trail which has been blazed before them will somehow help them get through.
    • The second tribe adopts similar principles, but with more inclusive incentives. People still largely run in accordance with their capabilities, but the fast runners are encouraged to help those further out in the back through social and financial rewards. They will likely not get as far as the fast runners of the first tribe, but the group as a whole will be much more compact.
    • The third tribe adopts socialism. Those who run fast must pay a penalty in favor of those further behind (they are just lucky to have those genes after all). Now the fast runners have to think twice about how fast they should run, because the quicker they run the bigger the penalty. They may end up resenting the slow runners as a result, who may resent them in turn because they should be doing more to help them move along. That tribe will move forward at a more even pace, although clearly slower than the first two tribes and arguably less harmoniously. It's unlikely that anyone will try to go past point B.
    • Finally, the fourth tribe adopts communism, where everyone is running in accordance with the same beat. There is no broad inequality since most cover the same ground. However, the fast runners must either accept a much slower pace or, if they dissent, “take one for the team”. The slow ones are not necessarily better off either. If the leaders (the guys beating the drums) want to enhance their collective pace to match the other tribes they may not be able to make it after all.

    This was a long way of saying that inequality arises in economic systems where individuals are largely given the freedom to act in accordance with their capabilities and desires. We can certainly force society to be more equal, but this will come at some cost to individual freedoms and opportunities in general.

    The fact is that we are all born with different capabilities and attributes. So when someone starts complaining about inequality, we need to understand what they are talking about. Is it because some are more capable than others? Luckier? More cunning? Are they obligated to bring everybody along?

    We can say it is unfair that some of us are world class football players, others Hall of Fame actors, and others top tier fund managers. We can complain that they make way too much money. But this is a consequence of the economic system we have adopted in the West. And we're not necessarily poorer because these folks are richer.

    In other societies they may have not fared as well. The best baseball players in Cuba are clearly much worse off on a relative basis in comparison to their peers in the US (and many are just as good). And since there are no savings (i.e. capital) there aren’t any fund managers either.

    So there, much less inequality, but would you want to live in Cuba?

    Piketty’s Argument

    Having seen that freer societies tend to have greater inequalities, let’s quickly review Piketty’s argument (especially if you also haven’t made it beyond page 12 of his book).

    As a disclaimer, for sure a lot of work went into the book and far from us wanting to oversimplify or denigrate what appears to be an honest attempt to tackle a recurring concern of society (over thousands of years in fact). On the whole Piketty comes across as a decent and sincere fellow.

    But being sincere does not mean he's right; anyone can be sincerely wrong. And because of the fame bestowed upon him, his ideas may get widely accepted without due scrutiny or, as we shall see, little basis on fact. Worse, they can serve as justification for some truly repressive and appalling economic policies, which should concern us all.

    So here’s the main thrust of Capitalism’s 696 pages: examining over 200 years of return on capital data in twenty Western world countries, Piketty concluded that because such returns have historically exceeded the rate of economic growth the holders of capital will get rich faster than anybody else.

    In other words, inequality does not stem from differences in individual ability and achievement as we have discussed above, but rather through the mere ownership of capital. The system is rigged. Moreover, because capital can be inherited, this inequality can persist over many generations.

    Piketty claims that the inevitable outcome from capitalism is perpetual misery, social violence and wars.

    Incidentally (or not), this is eerily similar to the argument that John Maynard Keynes put forward to advocate the euthanasia of the “rentiers” in the 1930s (a great example of a repressive economic theory that has been adopted by the world’s central bankers and is now causing misery to millions of people, particularly to our elderly). Plus ça change Monsieur Piketty.

    We would also have liked to pinpoint the similarities with Karl Marx's thinking (although his bag was mostly the perpetual exploitation of labor by capital, or something like that) but we also never got past page 12 of his book. Apparently a lot of pages are needed to explain something that should have been obvious to us all.

    In a June 2014 interview with the jovial Stephen Colbert, Piketty provided some context to his thinking. People like Colbert became rich because capitalism is unfair; and because he became rich Colbert is depriving others from the opportunity to also become rich. The rich are out to get us! Not to worry, the French economist has a solution: tax all earnings above US$500,000 at 80%.

    We can start getting a sense as to why Facebook and Spanx were created and mass-adopted in the “unequal” US and not “egalitarian” France, Piketty’s home country. Let's look at some facts.

    The Unequal Land of the Free

    Without even getting into the time-tested damage an 80% tax rate does to an economy, the US – the habitual poster child for inequality – provides robust evidence that inequality is oftentimes ephemeral and generally misunderstood. This is where facts start getting in the way of Piketty's grand vision for society.

    Thomas Sowell, the prominent American economist from the Chicago School, has extensively researched this topic. He found that 56% of US households will join the richest 10% at some point in their lives, usually when they are older. So much for the rich versus the poor; this is much more likely a debate with our own selves at different stages of our lives.

    When looking into the composition of the much vilified 1%, the statistics are even more revealing: over the course of a decade, the great majority of Americans only stay at that level for one year, and less than 13% for two years. Basically these are temporary spikes in wealth from things like asset sales. It certainly doesn’t seem like the wealthiest 1% are out to screw everyone else.

    We have also written about inequality in the past. The Pikettys of the world obsess about the dispersion of income levels, where we believe that a much better measure of general prosperity is the percentage of people earning above a minimal threshold that achieves the fulfilment of basic needs (and then some). Using this metric US prosperity peaked in 1999, but the subsequent decline is certainly not attributable to ownership of capital.

    History shows us that prosperity is best achieved in societies with a strong rule of law, enforceable property rights, good education and… access to capital!!! Try starting a business with no money and see how far you get. To vilify capital and the people who own it is truly myopic, not to say misguided.

    So what if dozens of new Mark Zuckerbergs and Sara Blakelys also emerge from that system and greatly distort the income statistics because of their phenomenal wealth? But according to Piketty, Zuckerberg’s “fair” compensation for co-founding Facebook, a social media vehicle used by over a billion people around the world, and Blakely for starting Spanx, which sells undergarments to millions of women, should be a little over US$500,000 per year. Does this sound fair to you?

    For all its virtues, we are not saying that the US is a perfect country. Many millions of people are still struggling after the last recession, and for them the American Dream is proving to be ever more elusive. Our point is that whatever valid grievances we may have with inequality, the ownership of capital is not the culprit. And hurting the people most likely to create it is not a solution either.

    The Poor vs Piketty

    One of the most robust critiques we have seen of Piketty’s work comes from Hernando de Soto, the Peruvian economist. His critique is not based on models or theory but rather on hard facts accumulated by his research team in the very countries where Piketty’s perpetual scourges of inequality – misery, social violence and wars – are prevalent.

    He used Egypt as an example, which in 2011 was undergoing a profound social change with the emergence of the Arab Spring movement. What better testing ground to assess people's grievances? His findings were the polar opposite of what Piketty contends: people in those countries “actually want more rather than less capital, and they want their capital to be real and not fictitious”.

    In fact, de Soto even points out that the very first "martyrs" of this movement were mostly small entrepreneurs desperate because they did not have access to the capital to sustain their businesses.

    Piketty did not have reliable data for developing countries, but rather than conducting his own on-the-ground research he merely extrapolated his findings to the whole globe using data from Western countries. And voilá!

    How was Muhammad Yunus able to improve the livelihoods of thousands of families in his native Bangladesh? By providing microcredit to them; in other words, access to capital.

    How did China become such an economic powerhouse? Certainly not by restricting its citizens' access to capital and taxing them at 80%. On the contrary, it sucked as much foreign capital and know-how as it possibly could. At the start of their great march towards prosperity in the 1980s, Deng Xiaoping (supposedly) proclaimed "to get rich is glorious". They were tired of Mao-Tse Tung wanting to make everyone equal.

    Piketty clearly knows something people in emerging markets don't. Or maybe what he was really describing is capital in the nineteenth century, not the twenty-first.

    Unintended but Predictable Consequences

    We have rich people, poor people, right-wing economists, left-wing economists and even revolutionaries, all contesting Piketty’s argument. It seems we the People do have a point against him. But will it prevail?

    We’re not optimistic on this one. It is far more likely that Piketty's ideas will gain traction rather than fade away. Why? Because it gives politicians and their Keynesian consorts yet another framework and justification as to why the state should be the key allocator of resources in society.

    In other words, it’s another "soak the rich" argument, this time propagated by a soft-spoken best-selling author. And to think that the state will be any more benevolent and altruistic when it is done soaking them is another example of academic theory which is contradicted by the historical record. Power corrupts everything, especially a more aggressive and intrusive state. Perhaps unintended, but clearly a predictable consequence.

    The state does play a very important role in society, but not how Piketty, Krugman and their pals envisage it. Unfortunately, it seems we may be saddled with yet another set of dubious economic ideologies governing our lives and our livelihoods.

    If you are one of those fast runners, we can only wish you the best of luck in your journey across the forest



  • Boston Marathon Bomber Dzhokhar Tsarnaev Sentenced To Death – Live Feed

    UPDATE: *BOSTON MARATHON BOMBER TSARNAEV SENTENCED TO DEATH

    Just over 2 years after the devastating explosions that killed and maimed many during The Boston Marathon, Dzhokhar Tsarnaev is about to face his penalty. The jury of seven women and five men convicted Mr. Tsarnaev, 21, last month of all 30 charges against him, including 17 counts that carry the death penalty. After 14.5 hours of deliberation, the jury will announce at 3pmET whether he will face death or life in prison.

    As The NY Times reports,

    A death sentence would be the first for a federal jury of a terrorist in the post 9/11 era, according to Kevin McNally, director of the Federal Death Penalty Resource Counsel Project, which coordinates the defense of capital punishment cases. The last terrorist sentenced to death was Timothy McVeigh, the Oklahoma City bomber, who was convicted and sentenced in 1997 and executed by lethal injection in 2001.

     

    The alternative is sending Mr. Tsarnaev to prison for the rest of his life with no chance of release, where he would join other terrorists on so-called Bomber’s Row at the federal supermax prison in Colorado.

    *  *  *

    Live Feed (via CBS Boston)

    * * *



Digest powered by RSS Digest

‘WE THE PEOPLE’ NEED TO CIRCLE THE WAGONS: THE GOVERNMENT IS ON THE WARPATH

How many Americans have actually bothered to read the Constitution?

John W. Whitehead (Rutherford Institute)

“The government is merely a servant―merely a temporary servant; it cannot be its prerogative to determine what is right and what is wrong, and decide who is a patriot and who isn’t. Its function is to obey orders, not originate them.”
― Mark Twain

How many Americans have actually bothered to read the Constitution, let alone the first ten amendments to the Constitution, the Bill of Rights (a quick read at 462 words)?

Take a few minutes and read those words for yourself—rather than having some court or politician translate them for you—and you will be under no illusion about where to draw the line when it comes to speaking your mind, criticizing your government, defending what is yours, doing whatever you want on your own property, and keeping the government’s nose out of your private affairs.

In an age of overcriminalization, where the average citizen unknowingly commits three crimes a day, and even the most mundane activities such as fishing and gardening are regulated, government officials are constantly telling Americans what not to do. Yet it was not always this way. It used to be “we the people” telling the government what it could and could not do. Indeed, the three words used most frequently throughout the Bill of Rights in regards to the government are “no,” “not” and “nor.”

Compare the following list of “don’ts” the government is prohibited from doing with the growing list of abuses to which “we the people” are subjected on a daily basis, and you will find that we have reached a state of crisis wherein the government is routinely breaking the law and violating its contractual obligations.

For instance, the government is NOT allowed to restrict free speech, press, assembly or the citizenry’s ability to protest and correct government wrongdoing. Nevertheless, the government continues to prosecute whistleblowers, persecute journalists, cage protesters, criminalize expressive activities, crack down on large gatherings of citizens mobilizing to voice their discontent with government policies, and insulate itself and its agents from any charges of wrongdoing (or what the courts refer to as “qualified immunity”).

The government may NOT infringe on a citizen’s right to defend himself. Nevertheless, in many states, it’s against the law to carry a concealed weapon (gun, knife or even pepper spray), and the average citizen is permitted little self-defense against militarized police officers who shoot first and ask questions later.

The government may NOT enter or occupy a citizen’s house without his consent (the quartering of soldiers). Nevertheless, government soldiers (i.e., militarized police) carry out more than 80,000 no-knock raids on private homes every year, while maiming children, killing dogs and shooting citizens.

The government may NOT carry out unreasonable searches and seizures on the citizenry or their possessions. NOR can government officials issue warrants without some evidence of wrongdoing (probable cause). Unfortunately, what is unreasonable to the average American is completely reasonable to a government agent, for whom the ends justify the means. In such a climate, we have no protection against roadside strip searches, blood draws, DNA collection, SWAT team raids, surveillance or any other privacy-stripping indignity to which the government chooses to subject us.

The government is NOT to deprive anyone of life, liberty or property without due process. Nevertheless, the government continues to incarcerate tens of thousands of Americans whose greatest crime is being poor and brown-skinned. The same goes for those who are put to death, some erroneously, by a system weighted in favor of class and wealth.

The government may NOT take private property for public use without just compensation. Nevertheless, under the guise of the “greater public interest,” the government often hides behind eminent domain laws in order to allow mega corporations to tear down homes occupied by less prosperous citizens in order to build high-priced resorts and shopping malls.

Government agents may NOT force a citizen to testify against himself. Yet what is the government’s extensive surveillance network that spies on all of our communications but a thinly veiled attempt at using our own words against us?

The government is NOT allowed to impose excessive fines on the citizenry or inflict cruel and unusual punishments upon them. Nevertheless Americans are subjected to egregious fines and outrageous punishments for minor traffic violations, student tardiness and absence from school, and generally having the misfortune of being warm bodies capable of filling privatized, profit-driven jails.

The government is NOT permitted to claim any powers that are not expressly granted to them by the Constitution. This prohibition has become downright laughable as the government continues to claim for itself every authority that serves to swell its coffers, cement its dominion, and expand its reach.

Despite what some special interest groups have suggested to the contrary, the problems we’re experiencing today did not arise because the Constitution has outlived its usefulness or become irrelevant, nor will they be solved by a convention of states or a ratification of the Constitution.

No, as I document in my new book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the problem goes far deeper. It can be traced back to the point at which “we the people” were overthrown as the center of the government. As a result, our supremacy has been undone, our authority undermined, and our experiment in democratic self-governance left in ruins. No longer are we the rulers of this land. We have long since been deposed and dethroned, replaced by corporate figureheads with no regard for our sovereignty, no thought for our happiness, and no respect for our rights.

In other words, without our say-so and lacking any mandate, the point of view of the Constitution has been shifted from “we the people” to “we the government.” Our taxpayer-funded employees—our appointed servants—have stopped looking upon us as their superiors and started viewing as their inferiors. Unfortunately, we’ve gotten so used to being dictated to by government agents, bureaucrats and militarized police alike that we’ve forgotten that WE are supposed to be the ones calling the shots and determining what is just, reasonable and necessary.

Then again, we’re not the only ones guilty of forgetting that the government was established to serve us as well as obey us. Every branch of government, from the Executive to the Judicial and Legislative, seems to be suffering this same form of amnesia. Certainly, when government programs are interpreted from the government’s point of view (i.e., the courts and legislatures), there is little the government CANNOT do in its quest for power and control.

We’ve been so brainwashed and indoctrinated into believing that the government is actually looking out for our best interests, when in fact the only compelling interesting driving government programs is maintain power and control by taking away our money and control. This vital truth, that the government exists for our benefit and operates at our behest, seems to have been lost in translation over two centuries dominated by government expansion, endless wars and centralized federal power.

Have you ever wondered why the Constitution begins with those three words “we the people”? It was intended to be a powerful reminder that everything flows from the citizenry. We the people are the center of the government and the source of its power. That “we” is crucial because it reminds us that there is power and safety in numbers, provided we stand united. We can accomplish nothing alone.

This is the underlying lesson of the Constitution, which outlines the duties and responsibilities of government. It was a mutual agreement formed by early Americans in order to ensure that when problems arose, they could address them together.

It’s like the wagon trains of the Old West, comprised of individual groups of pioneers. They rarely ventured out alone but instead traveled as convoys. And when faced with a threat, these early Americans formed their wagons into a tight circle in order to defend against invaders. In doing so, they presented a unified front and provided protection against an outside attack. In much the same way, the Constitution was intended to work as an institutionalized version of the wagon circle, serving as a communal shield against those who would harm us.

Unfortunately, we have been ousted from that protected circle, left to fend for ourselves in the wilderness that is the American frontier today. Those who did the ousting—the courts, the politicians, and the corporations—have since replaced us with yes-men, shills who dance to the tune of an elite ruling class. In doing so, they have set themselves as the central source of power and the arbiters of what is just and reasonable.

Once again we’re forced to navigate hostile terrain, unsure of how to protect ourselves and our loved ones from militarized police, weaponized drones, fusion centers, Stingray devices, SWAT team raids, the ongoing military drills on American soil, the government stockpiling of ammunition, the erection of mass detention centers across the country, and all other manner of abuses.

Read the smoke signals, and the warning is clear: It’s time to circle the wagons, folks. The government is on the warpath, and if we are to have any hope of surviving whatever is coming at us, we’ll need to keep our wits about us and present a unified front. Most of all, we need to restore “we the people” to our rightful place at the center of government. How we do that depends largely on each community’s willingness to get past their partisan politics and blind allegiance to uniformed government officials and find common ground.

To put it a little more bluntly, stop thinking like mindless government robots and start acting like a powerhouse of citizens vested with the power to say “enough is enough.” We have the numbers to stand our ground. Now we just need the will.

Today’s News May 15, 2015

  • Why Not Tell Greece How To Run A Democracy?

    Submitted by Raul Ilargi Meijer via The Automatic Earth blog,

    I know I’ve talked about this before, but it just keeps coming and it keeps being crzay. Bloomberg ‘reports’ that the ‘German Finance Ministry’, let me get this right, “is supporting the idea of a vote by Greek citizens to either accept the economic reforms being sought by creditors to receive a payout from the country’s bailout program or ultimately opt to leave the euro.” And that’s it.

    They ‘report’ this as if it has some sort of actual value, as if it’s a real thing. Whereas in reality, it has the exact same value as Greek Finance Minister Varoufakis suggesting a referendum in Germany. Or Washington, for that matter. Something that Bloomberg wouldn’t even dream of ‘reporting’ in any kind of serious way, though the political value would be identical.

    Apparently there is some kind of consensus in the international press – Bloomberg was by no means the only ‘news service’ that ‘reported’ this – that Germany has obtained the right to meddle in the internal politics of other eurozone member nations. And let’s get this one thing very clear: it has not.

    No more than the Greek government has somehow acquired the right to even vent its opinions on German domestic issues. It is a no-go area for all European Union countries. More than that, it’s no-go for all nations in the world, and certainly in cases where governments have been democratically elected.

    So why do Bloomberg and Reuters and all the others disregard such simple principles? All I can think is they entirely lost track of reality, and they live in a world where reality is what they say it is.

    Now, I know that Schäuble ‘merely’ said – I quote Bloomberg -: “If the Greek government thinks it should hold a referendum, it should hold a referendum.. Maybe it would even be the right measure to let the Greek people decide whether they’re ready to accept what needs to be done.”

    That’s admittedly not the same thing that Bloomberg makes of it, though it’s possible that the ‘reporter’ got some additional background information from the German Finance Ministry, and that that’s the reason the ministry gets mentioned, instead of just Schäuble.

    But that still doesn’t make it alright by any stretch of the imagination. The EU, and the eurozone, are made up of sovereign nations. Who function in a system of equal partners, certainly from a political point of view. So the German FinMin has no business even talking about a Greek referendum, no more than the Greeks have talking about a German referendums. And Angela Merkel should be on his case for this. But she’s not. At least not in public.

    Whether or not Greece has a referendum -about the euro or anything else- is up to the Greek people, and first of all to the government they elected only 3.5 months ago. It has absolutely nothing to do with whoever is in charge in Berlin, or Paris, or even in the EU headquarters in Brussels. It’s a fatal mistake to think otherwise. Bloomberg has made that fatal mistake. Schäuble has come so close Athens should file a complaint against him.

    Granted, all parties involved may be influenced by what happened 4 years ago -more Bloomberg-:

    Schaeuble’s stance on a Greek plebiscite is a departure from Germany’s position in 2011. Back then, Prime Minister George Papandreou dropped his plan for a referendum after Chancellor Angela Merkel and French President Nicolas Sarkozy urged him not to hold the vote.

    That referendum involved a haircut on Greek debt ‘negotiated’ by the troika, which Papandreou wanted the Greek people to vote on. And Merkel and Sarkozy did much more than ‘urge’ Papandreou not to hold the vote. They were afraid it would drive Greece from the eurozone, and scared the sh*t out of him so much he withdrew the plan a few days after proposing it.

    Which is just another case of Euro nations meddling in the internal affairs of a fellow member nation. Something for which there wasn’t then, and still isn’t now, any political or legal support or framework inside the EU. Still, Brussels, Berlin and Paris applied similar pressure on Italy PM Berlusconi in those days, and installed – helped install – a technocrat PM, Mario Monti. In Greece, they got Papademos. Both Papandreou and Berlusconi were gone soon after the ‘pressure’ was applied.

    That’s how Europe operates. And they have no legal right to do it. But that you won’t read at Bloomberg. The whole thing is so accepted that not even Syriza tells the Germans – or Bloomberg for that matter – to shut their traps. Even though they would have a lot more right to do that than Schäuble has to comment on internal Greek affairs.

    And from where I’m sitting that means that Ashoka Mody’s piece for Bruegel is too little too late. Nice try but..

    Europe’s Integration Overdrive

    The problems will worsen in Greece and, will inevitably, arise elsewhere. The economic and political costs of breaking the Eurozone are so horrendous that the imperfect monetary union will be held together. Instead, the cost of the ill-judged rush to the euro and mismanagement of Greece will eventually be a substantial forgiveness of Greek debt.

     

    But this is a good moment to step back and loosen European ties. As Schuman said, “Europe will not be built according to one plan.” The task is to create a de facto solidarity—not to force a fragile embrace. A new architecture should scale back the corrosive power relationships of centralized economic surveillance. Let nations manage their affairs according to their priorities.

     

    And put on notice private creditors that they will bear losses for reckless lending. The European fabric -held together by commercial ties- is fraying as European businesses seek faster growing markets elsewhere. That fabric could tear if political discord and economic woes persist. History and Schuman will be watching.

    Things have moved way beyond where Mody thinks they are at present. The secret ingredient is simply the crisis. The way the eurozone was hastily slapped together allows only for good times. The idea was that as long as things go well, nobody would notice the cracks. But Europe has been nothing but cracks for 7 years now, and there’s no end in sight.

    The Greek people can vote all they want to end the misery Europe has inflicted on them, it doesn’t matter to the major powers in the union. They simply blame it all on the same Greeks, and judging from how Bloomberg approaches the issue, they have the upper hand. They live above their means, they’re wasteful and they’re lazy. That’s the portrait painted, and that’s how 90% of the world therefore sees them.

    It makes no difference whether it is true or not. It’s all just about who has more money and power and press; they get to decide what people think about other people.

    Does the euro have a future? If it does, it won’t look anything like it does today. The eurozone has only ever been a mechanism to make more money flow from the south to the north. And now the north will have to come up with a measure of solidarity, of being an actual union, and they bluntly refuse.

    Rich European countries are all led by politicians who want to win their next elections. And these are national elections, not European elections. Those hardly matter. Because Europe is made up of sovereign nations. And that’s why the European Union in its present shape is doomed to fail.

    Brussels will always clamor for a closer union, politically, fiscally, economically. But the way Germany et al has treated Greece and Italy and Spain over the past 7 years makes abundantly clear that such a close union will never come to fruition. These are all countries that are proudly independent, that commemorate battles from hundreds of years ago where their ancestors shed the blood and gave the lives that made them independent.

    They’re not going to let Germany and France and Holland call the shots in their economies and countries now. Not a chance.

    Europe only has a -peaceful- future as a continent of independent nations that work together where they can. To get there, they will need to abolish the euro and completely redo the union project, from scratch, close down all offices in Brussels, and they will have to do it soon, or there will be no peace.

    Meanwhile, what’s left for Greece in Brussels that is beneficial to the country? I don’t see it. It makes me think more of a Stockholm syndrome by the hour. Get out, get your own currency, negotiate a treaty with Italy and Spain, maybe France. But don’t stay in a ‘union’ with outsiders who think they can tell you, Greeks, how to run a democracy, or when to hold a referendum. That can only be a road to nowhere.



  • UBS Shocked To Learn Ratting Out Fellow Criminals Doesn't Buy DOJ Immunity

    Back in 2012, when the first massive marketwide-rigging scandal made the front pages, that of Libor (one which Zero Hedge discussed first in January 2009 withThis Makes No Sense: LIBOR By Bank and for which we won early points in the “you are a fringe tinfoil blog” category until proven correct as usual) the prosecution’s case was handed on a silver platter by one bank which hoped it would squeeze through the prosecutorial cracks by ratting out all of its heretofore complicit partners in crime: UBS.

    And sure enough, UBS did indeed get away with a paltry fine, and the whole affair was quietly swept under the rug with a December 2012 settlement, in which the U.S. agreed not to prosecute the bank on the condition that it “commit no United States crime whatsoever” for the two-year term of the agreement, subsequently extended by an extra year.

    Unfortunately for UBS, its reputation as a ratting squealer was all for nothing, because just over one year later UBS as well as virtually all the same banks that were manipulating Libor, were caught rigging that other massive, global market in secret online chatrooms such as the “Bandits” and the “Cartel“: foreign currency rates.

    And also unfortunately for UBS which had sworn to commit no US crimes, it had just been caught committing at least one US crime. As a result, as Bloomberg reported earlier this week and as WSJ reported tonight, the US “Justice” Department is now tearing up and voiding the UBS 2012 settlement.

    Actually, make that two crimes: “UBS also was viewed by the Justice Department as a repeat offender, having reached previous settlements including one in 2011 related to antitrust violations in the municipal-bond investments market.”

    Actually, make that three crimes: “[Justice Department criminal division head Leslie] Caldwell’s message in the talks was stern: UBS was a recidivist having previously settled with the Justice Department over antitrust violations and had also obtained a deferred-prosecution agreement in 2009 to resolve charges it helped American taxpayers hide money overseas.”

    Sure enough, UBS is shocked, shocked to find out there was criminal gambling going on in its world’s largest trading floor in Stamford, CT which is on its way to becoming a mini golf course. And again. And again.

    UBS officials are confounded by the outcome, some of the people familiar with the negotiations said. The bank believes it provided early cooperation which helped prosecutors break open the foreign-exchange investigations and, as a result, was promised immunity by the antitrust division of the Justice Department.

     

    But for prosecutors the punishment is seen as justified, the people said: The bank promised not to break the law in its 2012 deal and it violated those terms when its traders engaged in the currency-market misconduct after the 2012 agreement, they said. Prosecutors have been investigating whether traders colluded to move currency rates to benefit themselves to the detriment of clients.

    We too would be shocked to learn that ratting out all our former peers and colleagues doesn’t pay off in the end.

    The WSJ also adds, “the negotiations with the Justice Department are expected next week to result in UBS paying a fine of about $200 million to the Justice Department and pleading guilty to allegations that UBS traders manipulated the London interbank offered rate, or Libor, prior to 2012, according to some of the people.”

    While the fine is paltry, the guilty plea will open the bank to a myriad of lawsuits from around the globe, which will surely result in billions of new recurring, non one-time “one-time, non recurring” legal fees, charges and further settlements as UBS is now open to litigation by anyone and everyone.

    And while we applaud the DO”J” for doing its job for once, will it be too much just once not to assume everyone is an idiot and that clearly the DO”J” has a bias against foreign banks who are used as a buffer to avoid prosecution of domestic banks, which have mysteriously gotten away with virtually every criminal act known to man and mafia.

    Such as JP Morgan for example. The same JP Morgan whose luck may have run out, because according to the WSJ, in addition to UBS, Barclays, Citigroup, RBS, and J.P. Morgan “are expected to plead guilty to criminal antitrust charges and pay between $500 million and more than $1 billion in penalties to various government entities, according to company disclosures and people familiar with the talks. On Thursday, J.P. Morgan disclosed in a financial filing that “any resolution acceptable to DOJ would require that the Firm plead guilty to an antitrust charge.

    Curiously, it is none other than JPMorgan who courtesy of Troy Rohrbaugh happens to be the Chairman of the Fed’s Foreign Exchange Committee.

     

    We are confident, however, that JPMorgan admiting guilt to a criminal anti-trust FX rigging charge will have zero impact on, and no conflicts of interest whatsoever with it remaining head advisor to the NY Fed on all issues FX.

    And while there are several things we can be absolutely certain of i) the banks will pay a few more billion in settlements here and there, and maybe UBS will be barred from competing with Goldman and JPM in fields in which the US banks feel there is “too much competition” (because a Lehman-type raid on a key competitor would not quite work out just now), and ii) nobody will actually go to prison, we have one question: just which umbrella agreement with US prosecutors will UBS use for that “other other other” market UBS was most recently caught rigging: gold.

    Actually, if UBS made the price of gold drop with its gold-rigging, it may well be that the Swiss bank just may get a commendation by the US DO”J” for that one.



  • George Orwell's Final Warning

    “…something like 1984 could very well happen; this is the direction the world is going in at the present time. In our world, there will be no emotions except fear, rage, triumph, and self-abasement… but always there will be the intoxication of power…if you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot stomping on a human face… forever.”

     

     

    h/t The Burning Platform



  • The Regulatory State: Central Planning & Bureaucracy On A Rampage

    Submitted by Pater Tenebrarum via Acting-Man.com,

    The New 10,000 Commandments Report – It’s Worse than Ever

    Before we begin, we should mention that the US economy has long been one of the least regulated among the major regulatory States of the so-called “free” world, and to a large extent this actually still remains true. This introductory remark should give readers an idea of how terrible the situation is in many of the socialist Utopias elsewhere.

     

    climbing_in_bureaucracy__alfredo_martirena

    Even in the US though, today’s economic system is light years away from free market capitalism or anything even remotely resembling a “laissez faire” system. We are almost literally drowning in regulations. The extent of this regulatory Moloch and that the very real costs it imposes is seriously retarding economic progress. It is precisely as Bill Bonner recently said: the government’s main job is to look toward the future in order to prevent it from happening.

    A great many of today’s regulations have only one goal: to protect established interest groups. Regulations that are ostensibly detrimental to certain unpopular corporatist interests are no different. Among these is e.g. the truly monstrous and nigh impenetrable thicket of financial rules invented after the 2008 crash in a valiant effort to close the barn door long after the horse had escaped. They are unlikely to bother the established large banking interests in the least. The banking cartel is probably elated that it has become virtually impossible for start-ups to ever seriously compete with it. The same is true of many other business regulations; their main effect is to protect the biggest established companies from competition.

     

    bureaucracy...

     

    The Competitive Enterprise Institute (CEI) – evidently named after a species close to extinction – has just released its 2015 report on the regulatory State, entitled “The 10,000 Commandments” (download link at the end of the article). Here is a summary of the grisly highlights (now would be a good time to get the barf bags out):

    “Federal regulation and intervention cost American consumers and businesses an estimated $1.88 trillion in 2014 in lost economic productivity and higher prices.

     

    If U.S. federal regulation was a country, it would be the world’s 10th largest economy, ranking behind Russia and ahead of India.

     

    Economy-wide regulatory costs amount to an average of $14,976 per household – around 29 percent of an average family budget of $51,100. Although not paid directly by individuals, this “cost” of regulation exceeds the amount an average family spends on health care, food and transportation.

     

    The “Unconstitutionality Index” is the ratio of regulations issued by unelected agency officials compared to legislation enacted by Congress in a given year. In 2014, agencies issued  16 new regulations for every law — that’s 3,554 new regulations compared to 224 new laws.

     

    Many Americans complain about taxes, but regulatory compliance costs exceed what the IRS is expected to collect in both individual and corporate income taxes for last year—by more than $160 billion.

     

    Some 60 federal departments, agencies and commissions have 3,415 regulations in development at various stages in the pipeline. The top six federal rule making agencies account for 48 percent of all federal regulations. These are the Departments of the Treasury, Commerce, Interior, Health and Human Services and Transportation and the Environmental Protection Agency.

     

    The 2014 Federal Register contains 77,687 pages, the sixth highest page count in its history. Among the six all-time-high Federal Register total page counts, five occurred under President Obama.

     

    The George W. Bush administra­tion averaged 62 major regulations annually over eight years, while the Obama administration has averaged 81 major regulations annually over six years.

    (emphasis added)

     

    1-cost of regulation

    Look at it and weep: the estimated cost of federal regulations and interventions alone in 2015 – click to enlarge.

     

    If one adds taxes and the damage done by the Fed’s incessant money printing to these regulatory costs, it is a miracle the economy hasn’t imploded yet. Note the deeply undemocratic nature of the regulatory process: The vast majority of the rules – all of which have the power of law – is concocted by unelected bureaucrats in the form of “administrative law”. It would otherwise simply be impossible to make up thousands of new rules every year. As unproductive as the bureaucracy is, it is still smothering the economy with this onslaught. This will probably never change, unless the entire system collapses one day. After all, the people tasked with making the rules need something to do.

     

    2-Cost per household

    The cost of federal regulation per US household, compared to various major household expenditure items – click to enlarge.

     

    Growing Like a Weed

     

    assistant director

     

    A look at the Federal Register shows that the growth in regulations is essentially a permanent feature. There are no longer any significant time periods during which the number of rules actually declines. It is probably no coincidence that the charts below are eerily reminiscent of charts showing total federal debt or charts depicting the growth in the money supply. The only thing that is no longer showing any respectable growth is the economy. Of course, no-one should be surprised by this.

    Federal Register pages per decade. One wonders how people survived the practically lawless 1940 – 1970 period. Note that if we were to go back in time by another 30 years, we would see that the federal government wasn’t even a footnote in most people’s lives.

     

    3-Federal Register

    Over the past 22 years, almost 91,000 final rules and regulations were published cumulatively. We are just guessing here, but we believe that between the time the average citizen gets out of bed until shortly after he has slurped his morning coffee, he has violated at least five laws or regulations already – click to enlarge.

     

    4-Cumulative rules

    Cumulative regulations published in the Federal Register – almost 91,000 in the past 22 years alone – click to enlarge.

     

    Monetary costs are just one aspect to this. There is also the wasted effort and psychic cost that is incurred when people realize that there are many things they simply cannot do, even though they would harm no-one and would actually provide a service to their fellow men. It will often prove extremely difficult to fight the red tape and still establish a successful business venture at the same time. Certain sectors of the economy have been closed off to the private sector completely (see the example of roads below). Very often start-ups with little capital cannot hope to compete in certain business sectors, as the regulatory obstacles are simply impossible to overcome.

    Recently a US trucking organization has penned a manifesto in which it is bitterly complaining about crumbling roads and bridges across the US and urging the government to “do something”. The authors should take a long, hard look at their sad collection of statistics and realize that this is what actually happens when the government monopolizes a sector of the economy.

    Another aspect is of course social control. By making a criminal or a potential criminal out of everybody, the mountain of laws and regulations can always be brought to bear against citizens or organizations that have somehow displeased government officials or managed to attract their wrath. One can see a variation of this principle at work in modern-day criminal court cases. People who are indicted for a crime are usually faced with a whole plethora of charges apart from the main charge. The intention is to force them to accept a plea deal whether or not they are innocent. The point is obviously not to serve the cause of justice.

    However, we don’t want to digress too much here. The purely economic cost on which the CEI report focuses is distressing enough all by itself. One only has to think the problem properly through. Similar to other government interventions such as interest rate and money supply manipulations by the central bank, these enormous costs hamper the economy to such an extent that economic progress is slowed to a crawl. Who knows what we could have achieved by now if this were not the case? Perhaps people would already be able to reach the ripe old age of 150 and still feel like spring chickens in their early 100ds. Concerns over material well-being that continue to bedevil so many people today may already be orders of magnitude smaller. As Israel Kirzner once remarked in this context:

    “We are not able to chart the future of capitalism in any specificity. Our reason for this incapability is precisely that which assures us . . . the economic future of capitalism will be one of progress and advance. The circumstance that precludes our viewing the future of capitalism as a determinate one is the very circumstance in which, with entrepreneurship at work, we are no longer confined by any scarcity framework.”

    However, for this to be true, free market capitalism must be able to breathe. We won’t be able to enjoy the fruits of entrepreneurship if it is smothered at every opportunity.

     

    dilbert-steering-committee

     

    Conclusion

    As revolting as the full picture is, we recommend reading the entire “10,000 Commandments” report, which can be downloaded here (pdf). Above we show only a very small selection of the charts and data contained in the complete report. One thing should be clear to everyone reading it: This is a major problem that deserves a lot more attention than it usually seems to get.

    bureaucracy-2

     



  • Chinese Tech Company's 3,000% Post-IPO Gain Takes Unthinkable 4% Hit

    Two weeks ago, we brought you the story of Beijing Baoefung Technology which in many ways exemplifies everything that’s wrong (or right, depending on whether you, like Japan’s Economics Minister Akira Amari, have come to believe that bubbles are good) with today’s capital markets. The online video company’s shares posted a remarkable post-IPO run amid China’s red-hot equity mania, but as FT reports, something went terribly wrong on Thursday: the stock fell.

    This column’s favorite stock for the past month has been Beijing Baofeng Technology, which offers online videos in China. Baofeng means “storm”, and it has been a near-perfect performer: its shares traded limit-up every day from its March IPO in Shenzhen apart from one, and opened up the maximum 10 per cent on Thursday, too.

     

    It looks like the storm has now broken. Its shares ended the day down for the first time, falling 4.4 per cent after news of a copyright dispute over content. 


     

    There’s no need to panic though because “the stock [is] up 3,285 per cent from the offer price.”

    In other words:



  • The Trouble with Cash

    Submitted by Alasdair Macleod via GoldMoney.com,

    When interest rates are zero and it costs a bank to look after your money it becomes an unattractive asset. Banks in some jurisdictions (such as Switzerland, Denmark and Sweden) are even charging customers interest on cash and deposits. And if you go to your bank and withdraw large amounts in the form of folding notes to avoid these charges you will be lucky if you are not treated as a sort of pariah. For the moment, at least, these problems do not extend to sound money, in other words gold.
     
    There are two distinct issues involved with government-issued currency: zero-to-negative interest rates, which all but eliminate any interest turn on deposits for the banks; and a systemic issue that arises if too many people withdraw their money from the banking system. The problems with the latter would become significant if enough people decide to effectively opt out of holding money in the banks.
     
    Conversion of bank deposits into physical cash increases reserve ratios, restricting the banks’ ability to create credit. However, while the banks are contractually obliged to supply physical cash to anyone who wants it, a drawdown on bank deposits is a bad thing from a central bank’s point of view. A desire for physical cash is, therefore, discouraged. Instead, if the option of owning physical cash was removed and there was only electronic money, deposits would simply be transferred from one bank to another and any imbalances between the banks resolved through the money markets, with or without the assistance of a central bank. The destabilising effects of bank runs would be eliminated entirely.
     
    In the current financial climate demand for cash does not originate so much from loss of confidence in banks, with some notable exceptions such as in Greece. Instead it is a consequence of ultra-low or even negative interest rates. The desire for cash is therefore an unintended consequence of central banks attempting to inject confidence into the economy. The rights of ordinary individuals to turn deposits into physical cash are therefore resisted by central banks, which are focused instead on managing zero interest rate policies and suppressing any side effects.
     
    Central banks can take this logic one step further. Monetary policy is primarily intended to foster investor confidence, so any tendency for investors to liquidate investments is, therefore, to be discouraged. However, with financial markets getting progressively more expensive central bankers will suspect the relative attraction of cash balances are increasing. And because banks are making cash deposits more costly, this is bound to increase demand for physical notes.
     
    Monetary policy has now become like a pressure cooker with a defective safety-valve. Central bankers realise it and investors are slowly beginning to as well. Add into this mix a faltering global economy, a fact that is becoming impossible to ignore, and a dash-for-cash becomes a serious potential risk to both monetary policy and the banking system.
     
    There is an obvious alternative to cash, and that is to buy physical gold. This does not constitute a run on the banking system, because a buyer of gold uses electronic money that transfers to the seller. The problem with physical gold is a separate issue: it challenges the raison d’être of the banking system and of government currencies as well.
     
    This is why we can still buy gold instead of encashing our deposits, for the moment at least. It can only be a matter of time before people realise that with the cash option closing this is the only way to escape an increasingly dysfunctional financial system.



  • How China's Banks Hide Trillions In Credit Risk: Full Frontal

    On Monday, we noted that NPLs in China saw their biggest quarterly increase on record in Q1, jumping 141 billion yuan sequentially to 983 billion. We also discussed why the proliferation of property loans is spreading real estate risk to the larger economy before outlining several reasons why the “official” data on bad loans may severely understate credit risk in much the same way that “official” data out of Beijing on economic output probably grossly overstates GDP growth. As a reminder, here is what we said:

    One might be tempted, upon reading this, to point to “official” data on bad loans at Chinese banks on the way to concluding that “modest loss-absorption capacity” or not, sub-2% NPL ratios certainly do not seem to portend an imminent catastrophe. However, given the official figure is just 1.39%, and given what we know about the state of China’s economy, one could be forgiven for wondering if NPLs at China’s biggest lenders are grossly understated. To let Fitch tell it, determining the true extent of China’s NPL problem is complicated by a number of factors and the ‘real’ data might be just as hard to get at as an accurate reading on Chinese GDP.

    In order to truly understand how exposed China’s lenders are to potentially toxic “assets”, it’s worth taking a closer look at all of the different non-standard channels through which the banks have taken on credit risk. 

    At the outset it should be noted that it is virtually impossible to determine how many of the traditional loans banks carry on their books would actually be impaired were it not for what Fitch calls “centrally managed NPLs.” Put simply, the government has a tendency to ‘influence’ banks’ decisions when it comes to rolling over problem loans. Here’s Fitch:

    It is not uncommon for the authorities (central or provincial government, PBOC, or China Banking Regulatory Commission; CBRC) to encourage banks to roll over loans to support the broader economy. Such influence from the regulators is common in China, but less so in more developed markets as it runs counter to the principle of strict prudential oversight. (In addition, in some cases in China the regulator has lowered risk weights to encourage banks to lend to potentially riskier borrowers.)…

    Where a bank agrees to provide additional funding to prevent default, i.e. by rolling over the loans and requiring more collateral as credit enhancement, this exposure and/or other loan exposures relating to the same borrower may not be recognised as impaired. The level of disclosure of widely reported corporate defaults (or near defaults) is low, and there is no information available on the amount of debt renegotiations that are unreported by the media. 

    In other words, there’s no way to know how pervasive Beijing’s practice of forcing banks to roll-over problem loans truly is, meaning that even if we ignore the fact that quite a bit of credit risk is obscured by the practice of shifting it around, moving it off balance sheet, and reclassifying it, (i.e. if we just look at traditional loans) it’s still difficult to know what percentage of loans are actually impaired because it’s entirely possible that a non-trivial percentage of sour debt is forcibly restructured and thus never makes it into the official NPL figures. 

    Fitch goes on to note what we mentioned earlier this week, namely that the percentage of  loans which are not yet classified as non-performing but which are nonetheless doubtful is much higher than the headline NPL figure and in fact, the ratings agency seems to suggest that some Chinese banks (notably the largest lenders) may be under-reporting their special mention loans:

    Banks in China have remarkably similar NPL ratios and performance trends, which suggests little or no difference in risk appetite despite large differences in ownership and systemic importance, and varying levels of investment in their risk-management systems. However, state banks’ capital adequacy ratios have clearly benefited from having greater access to capital markets due to their much larger franchises. 

     

    There are more notable differences in special-mention and overdue loan trends, implying that loan classification standards, which in principal are on a par with international practice, may not be applied consistently and uniformly across all banks in China. For example, loans overdue for more than three months are not always classified as NPLs at some banks. The only common trend is that all banks’ provision coverage ratios fell during 2014 as the increase in loan provisioning was insufficient to offset the NPL increases, even as NPLs have been partly offset by write-offs and/or disposals.

     

    Interestingly, it appears that when overdue loans are included, the banking sector’s loan loss reserves aren’t sufficient…

    The sector’s provision coverage declined to 232% at end-2014 from 283% a year before, even though the reported NPL ratio only rose marginally to 1.25% from 1.0% over the same period (Fitch-rated banks’ reported NPLs rose another 14% quarter on quarter in 1Q15). This ratio would fall to 66.5% at end-2014 if special-mention loans were included. This means China’s loan-loss reserve, equivalent to 2.9% of loans at end-2014, is insufficient to cover both NPLs (1.25% of loans) and “special-mention” loans (3.1% of loans). 

    …but ultimately it’s irrelevant because between bad assets that are ultimately transferred to AMCs, loans that are channeled through non-bank financial institutions and carried as “investments classified as receivables”, and off-balance sheet financing, nearly 40% of credit risk is carried outside of traditional loans, rendering official NPL data essentially meaningless in terms of assessing the severity of the problem:

    China’s four major AMCs were set up in 1999 to absorb CNY1.4trn in bad assets at par value from China Development Bank and the big four banks (Industrial and Commercial Bank of China, China Construction Bank, Bank of China and Agricultural Bank of China) before their restructuring. NPL disposals to AMCs have increased in recent years as more banks have come under pressure to manage their reported NPL levels…

     

    Banks work with non-bank financial institutions (ie trust companies, securities firms, other financial subsidiaries and/or affiliates to the banks) to channel credit to sectors that have restricted access to traditional banks loans. This is usually called “channel” business in China. The banks may put together these transactions themselves, in which case the borrower could be an existing bank customer, or the non-bank financial institution may help the bank identify profitable lending opportunities. Some of this credit is sold to investors as WMPs, but banks are increasingly holding it on their own books as “financial assets held under repurchase agreements” or “investments classified as receivables”…

     

    The amount of informal loans channelled through non-bank financial institutions and accounted as “investments classified as receivables” has increased from close to zero in 2010 to CNY4.4trn at end-2014 for Fitch-rated commercial banks, equivalent to 8% of total loans. 

     

    Off-balance-sheet financing (I.e. trust loans, entrusted loans, acceptances and bills) accounted for 18% of official TSF stock at end-2014, up from less than 2% just over a decade ago. Of the off-balance-sheet exposure reported at individual banks, this is equivalent to 15% of total assets for state commercial banks and 25% for mid-tier commercial banks, on a weighted average basis. These ratios would be even higher if we included entrusted loans (see Figure 2), although this information is not disclosed at all banks.

    Fitch estimates that around 38% of credit is outside bank loans.

     


    *  *  *

    There are several takeaways here. First — and most obvious — is the fact that accurately assessing credit risk in Chna is extraordinarily difficult. What we do know, is that between forced roll-overs, the practice of carrying channel loans as “investments” and “receivables”, inconsistent application of loan classification norms, and the dramatic increase in off balance sheet financing, the ‘real’ ratio of non-performing loans to total loans is likey far higher than the headline number, meaning that as economic growth grinds consistently lower, the country’s lenders could find themselves in deep trouble especially considering the fact that loan loss reserves aren’t even sufficient to cover NPLs + special mention loans, let alone defaults on a portion of the 38% of credit risk carried off the books.

    The irony though is that while China clearly has a debt problem (282% of GDP), it’s also embarking on a concerted effort to slash policy rates in an effort to drive down real rates and stimulate the flagging economy, meaning the country is caught between the fallout from a shadow banking boom and the need to keep conditions loose because said boom has now gone bust, dragging credit growth down with it.

    In other words, the country is trying to deleverage and re-leverage at the same time.

    A picture perfect example of this is the PBoC’s effort to facilitate a multi-trillion yuan refi program for China’s heavily-indebted local governments. The idea is to swap existing high yield loans (accumulated via shadow banking conduits as localities sought to skirt borrowing limits) for traditional muni bonds that will carry far lower interest rates. So while the program is designed to help local governments deleverage by cutting hundreds of billions from debt servicing costs, the CNY1 trillion in new LGB issuance (the pilot program is capped at 1 trillion yuan) represents a 150% increase in supply over 2014. Those bonds will be pledged as collateral to the PBoC for cheap cash which, if the central bank has its way, will be lent out to the real economy. So again, deleveraging and re-leveraging at the same time.

    This is just one of many ‘rock-hard place’ dynamics confronting the country as it marks a difficult transition from a centrally planned economy based on credit and investment to a consumption-driven model characterized by the liberalization of interest and exchange rates. 



  • 3 Things: The Labor Hoarding Effect

    Submitted by Lance Roberts via STA Wealth Management,

    The Claims Problem

    This morning initial jobless claims plunged to the lowest level in the last 42 years. The chart below shows the weekly claims as compared to the 4-week moving average.

    Jobless-Claims-051415

    Surely, this must be a sign that the economy has turned the proverbial corner as full-employment has finally been obtained. Right? Maybe not.

    As discussed earlier this week:

    "That really is the point that the majority of analysis misses when they point to jobless claims and the U-3 or U-6 unemployment rates. IF, and that is a big IF, employment was as strong as suggested by headlines then wage growth would be rising sharply and economic growth would be running near levels historically associated with 'full employment rates.'

     

    However, the chart below, which is the labor force participation rate of 16-54-year-olds as a percentage of just that age group, is representative of the real problem. Just because the BLS chooses not to "count" those individuals, it DOES NOT mean that they have ceased to exist.(The percentage of workers participating in this age group as has fallen for the past 3 months.)"

    Employment-16-54-051115

    However, I am not suggesting there has been NO JOB growth. There has. However, it has been a function of hiring due to the increases in population growth, which creates incremental demand, rather than an organically driven surge in overall economic growth and prosperity.

    It is there that we find the problem with the reports on jobless claims and the actual economy.

     

    Labor Hoarding

    Since the end of the financial crisis, businesses have been increasing bottom line profitability by massive cost cuts rather than increases in revenue. Of course, one of the highest "costs" to any business is labor. One way that we can measure this view is by looking at corporate profits on a per employee basis. Currently, that ratio is near its highest level on record. (Scale below is inverted for clarity)

    Wages-Profits-Ratio-051215

    The problem that businesses are beginning to face is while they have slashed labor costs to the bone there is a point where businesses simply cannot cut further. At this point businesses have to begin to "hoard" what labor they have, maximize that labor force's productivity (increase output with minimal increases in labor costs) and hire additional labor, primarily temporary, only when demand forces expansion.

    This issue of "labor hoarding" also explains the sharp drop in initial weekly jobless claims. In order to file for unemployment benefits, an individual must have been first terminated, by layoff or discharge, from their previous employer. An individual who "quits" a job cannot, in theory, file for unemployment insurance. However, as companies begin to layoff or discharge fewer workers the number of individuals filing for initial claims decline. This is shown in the chart below which shows the 4-month average of layoff and discharges versus the 4-week average of initial jobless claims.

    JOLTS-Layoffs-JoblessClaims-051415

    However, the mistake is assuming that just because initial claims are declining, the economy and specifically full-time employment is markedly improving. The next chart shows initial jobless claims versus the full-time employment to population ratio.

    Employment-FullTime-Claims-051415

     

    Obscuring Reality

    The issue of "labor hoarding" is an important phenomenon that is likely obscuring the real weakness in the underlying economy. Without an increase in the demand part of the economic equation, businesses will continue resorting to productivity increases to stretch the current labor force farther to protect profitability. The effect is a decline in real median incomes which negatively impacts future demand.

    Personal-Income-Annual-Real-051415

    While massive binges in stock buybacks and accounting gimmicks have continued to blur the actual profitability of businesses, the decline in jobless claims suggests that there is little room from further reductions in body counts. However, that does not mean that businesses must begin rapidly increasing employment and wages.

    The "good news" is that for those that are currently employed – job safety is high. Businesses are indeed hiring, but prefer to hire from the "currently employed" labor pool rather than the unemployed masses. The "bad news" is that for those unemployed, full-time employment remains elusive, and wages remain suppressed due to the high competition for available work.

    The current detachment between the financial markets and the real economy continues. The Federal Reserve's interventions continues to create a wealth effect for market participants. However, it is unfortunate that such a wealth effect is only enjoyed by a small minority of the total population – those at the upper end of the pay scale that have jobs.



  • The Greatest Water Crisis In The History Of The United States

    Submitted by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    What are we going to do once all the water is gone?  Thanks to the worst drought in more than 1,000 years, the western third of the country is facing the greatest water crisis that the United States has ever seen.  Lake Mead is now the lowest that it has ever been since the Hoover Dam was finished in the 1930s, mandatory water restrictions have already been implemented in the state of California, and there are already widespread reports of people stealing water in some of the worst hit areas.  But this is just the beginning.

    Right now, in a desperate attempt to maintain somewhat “normal” levels of activity, water is being pumped out of the ground in the western half of the nation at an absolutely staggering pace.  Once that irreplaceable groundwater is gone, that is when the real crisis will begin.  If this multi-year drought stretches on and becomes the “megadrought” that a lot of scientists are now warning about, life as we know it in much of the country is going to be fundamentally transformed and millions of Americans may be forced to find somewhere else to live.

    Simply put, this is not a normal drought.  What the western half of the nation is experiencing right now is highly unusual.  In fact, scientists tell us that California has not seen anything quite like this in at least 1,200 years

    Analyzing tree rings that date back to 800 A.D. — a time when Vikings were marauding Europe and the Chinese were inventing gunpowder — there is no three-year period when California’s rainfall has been as low and its temperatures as hot as they have been from 2012 to 2014, the researchers found.

    Much of the state of California was once a desert, and much of it is now turning back into a desert The same thing can also be said about much of Arizona and much of Nevada.  We never really should have built massive, sprawling cities such as Las Vegas and Phoenix in the middle of the desert.  But the 20th century was the wettest century for western North America in about 1,000 years, and we got lulled into a false sense of security.

    At this point, the water level in Lake Mead has hit a brand new record low, and authorities are warning that official water rationing could soon begin for both Arizona and Nevada…

    Lake Mead, the largest reservoir in the US, has hit its lowest level ever. Feeding California, Nevada and Arizona, it can hold a mind-boggling 35 cubic kilometres of water. But it has been many years since it was at capacity, and the situation is only getting worse.

     

    “We’re only at 38 percent full. Lake Mead hasn’t been this low since we were filling it in the 1930s,” said a spokeswoman for the US Bureau of Reclamation in Las Vegas.

     

    If it gets much lower – and with summer approaching and a dwindling snowpack available to replenish it, that looks likely – official rationing will begin for Arizona and Nevada.

    And did you know that the once mighty Colorado River no longer even reaches the ocean?  Over 40 million people depend upon this one river, and because the Colorado is slowly dying an enormous amount of water is being pumped out of the ground in a crazed attempt to carry on with business as usual

    The Colorado River currently supplies water to more than 40 million people from Denver to Los Angeles (as well as Las Vegas, Phoenix, Tucson, San Diego, Salt Lake City, Albuquerque, and Santa Fe—none of which lie directly on the river). According to one recent study, 16 million jobs and $1.4 trillion in annual economic activity across the West depend on the Colorado. As the river dries up, farmers and cities have turned to pumping groundwater. In just the last 10 years, the Colorado Basin has lost 15.6 cubic miles of subsurface freshwater, an amount researchers called “shocking.” Once an official shortage is declared, Arizona farmers will increase their rate of pumping even further, to blunt the effect of an anticipated sharp cutback.

    The same kind of thing is going on in the middle part of the country.  Farmers are pumping water out of the rapidly shrinking Ogallala Aquifer so fast that a major crisis in the years ahead is virtually guaranteed

    Farther east, the Ogallala Aquifer under the High Plains is also shrinking because of too much demand. When the Dust Bowl overtook the Great Plains in the 1930s, the Ogallala had been discovered only recently, and for the most part it wasn’t tapped then to help ease the drought. But large-scale center-pivot irrigation transformed crop production on the plains after World War II, allowing water-thirsty crops like corn and alfalfa for feeding livestock.

     

    But severe drought threatens the southern plains again, and water is being unsustainably drawn from the southern Ogallala Aquifer. The northern Ogallala, found near the surface in Nebraska, is replenished by surface runoff from rivers originating in the Rockies. But farther south in Texas and New Mexico, water lies hundreds of feet below the surface, and does not recharge. Sandra Postel wrote here last month that the Ogallala Aquifer water level in the Texas Panhandle has dropped by up to 15 feet in the past decade, with more than three-quarters of that loss having come during the drought of the past five years. A recent Kansas State University study said that if farmers in Kansas keep irrigating at present rates, 69 percent of the Ogallala Aquifer will be gone in 50 years.

    At one time, most of us took water completely for granted.

    But now that it is becoming “the new oil”, people are starting to look at water much differently.  Sadly, this even includes thieves

    With the state of California mired in its fourth year of drought and a mandatory 25 percent reduction in water usage in place, reports of water theft have become common.

     

    In April, The Associated Press reported that huge amounts of water went missing from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta and a state investigation was launched.

     

    The delta is a vital body of water, serving 23 million Californians as well as millions of farm acres, according to the Association for California Water Agencies.

     

    The AP reported in February that a number of homeowners in Modesto, California, were fined $1,500 for allegedly taking water from a canal. In another instance, thieves in the town of North San Juan stole hundreds of gallons of water from a fire department tank.

    In case you are wondering, of course this emerging water crisis is going to deeply affect our food supply.  More than 40 percent of all our fruits and vegetables are grown in the state of California, so this drought is going to end up hitting all of us in the wallet one way or another.

    And this water crisis is not the only major threat that our food supply is facing at the moment.  A horrific outbreak of the bird flu has already killed more than 20 million turkeys and chickens, and the price of eggs has already gone up substantially

    The cost of a carton of large eggs in the Midwest has jumped nearly 17 percent to $1.39 a dozen from $1.19 since mid-April when the virus began appearing in Iowa’s chicken flocks and farmers culled their flocks to contain any spread.

     

    A much bigger increase has emerged in the eggs used as ingredients in processed products like cake mix and mayonnaise, which account for the majority of what Iowa produces. Those eggs have jumped 63 percent to $1.03 a dozen from 63 cents in the last three weeks, said Rick Brown, senior vice president of Urner Barry, a commodity market analysis firm.

    Most of us are accustomed to thinking of the United States as a land of seemingly endless resources, but now we are really starting to bump up against some of our limitations.

    Despite all of our technology, the truth is that we are still exceedingly dependent on the weather patterns that produce rain and snow for us.

    For years, I have been warning that Dust Bowl conditions would be returning to the western half of the country, and thanks to this multi-year drought we can now see it slowly happening all around us.

    And if this drought continues to stretch on, things are going to get worse than this.

    Much worse.



  • Seymour Hersh Slams Establishment Media: "I Am Not Backing Off Anything I Said"

    Authored by Isaac Chotiner, originally posted at Slate.com,

    In a blockbuster 10,000-word story for the London Review of Books this week, longtime New Yorker investigative journalist Seymour Hersh called into question the official account of the American raid that killed Osama Bin Laden, and argued that what is arguably seen as the apex of Barack Obama’s presidency is actually built on a lie.

     

    Hersh’s piece claims that Bin Laden was being held prisoner by the Pakistani military and intelligence service (the ISI), who were using him as a means to control Taliban and al-Qaida elements, and hoping to use him as leverage in their relationship with the United States. According to Hersh, who relied largely on an anonymous intelligence source, the Obama administration found out that Pakistan had Bin Laden, and eventually convinced Pakistani military leaders to allow a raid on the compound where Bin Laden was being held. The plan, Hersh writes, was to say publicly that Bin Laden was killed not in the raid but in a drone strike. The White House, however, supposedly broke this deal because of the political value of making the details of the raid public.

     

    Hersh’s story has been much debated over the past several days, with many calling it into question and (a comparable few) others applauding its willingness to undercut the official narrative. NBC News and the AFP have both backed up small elements of Hersh’s story, although both outlets have also called other elements of his piece into question (and NBC later backed away from its original reporting). And no news source has supported Hersh’s largest claim—that the president lied about the raid.

     

    I spoke to Hersh by phone this week. Here is a transcript of our conversation, which has been slightly condensed and edited for clarity.

    Isaac Chotiner: If the plan until the night of the raid was to use the cover story that he had not been killed in a raid but in a drone strike, then why have the raid at all?  Why not just have the Pakistanis kill him? Why risk Obama’s presidency?

    Seymour Hersh: Of course there is no answer there because I haven’t talked to any of the principals. But I can just give you what the people who were in the process believed to be so, which is that for [Gens.] Pasha and Kayani, the chance of something like that getting leaked out would be devastating. America was then running at about 8 percent popularity in Pakistan, and Bin Laden was running at 60, 70 percent. He was very popular. [Editor’s note: This 2010 opinion poll says that Bin Laden’s popularity was at 18 percent in Pakistan.] You couldn’t just take a chance, because if someone ratted you out—I can only give you a basic theory.

    Chotiner: It just seems like a huge raid with Pakistani complicity brings up just as many problems for the Pakistanis.

    Hersh: If you believe, as a smart guy said to me, if anybody, if anyone didn’t think the president was going to fuck [the Pakistani military] they are out of their mind. He was always going to fuck them.

    Chotiner: OK. In your piece you call into question that the Americans got valuable documents in the raid. But Ayman al-Zawahiri, the current head of al-Qaida, himself seemed to confirm that this was true. How do you handle that contradiction?

    Hersh: I handle it pretty easy. [Laughs] The issue for me is the treasure trove issue. Did the SEALS take out piles of computers? There were claims they found computers and disks and sticks, what do they call those sticks?

    Chotiner: I don’t know.

    Hersh: You’re not as old as I am. You should know that. Anyway, the SEALs mission was to go kill the guy. They did pick up some papers, but most of the papers were delivered by the ISI. He was a prisoner under their control. He wasn’t beaten and could walk around but it was a prison. He couldn’t get out. They kept encouraging him to write stuff. And he did. But I am bothered by the contradictions. [The] president said it was a treasure trove so there had to be a treasure trove. Is it real? I don’t know. It was used in a trial. Is it real? Is it not? I don’t know.

    Chotiner: You seem slightly annoyed that Obama double-crossed the Pakistanis.

    Hersh: Double-crossed is your word.

    Chotiner: OK fine. I want to understand why you seem bothered by that, aside from the lying. Turning our back on the worst elements in Pakistan who we have long nurtured doesn’t seem so bad. We have supported them forever.

    Hersh: Why do we do that?

    Chotiner: Because we see it as being in our own interest.

    Hersh: Well no, we do it for nukes.

    Chotiner: Fine, we see that as being in our interest.

    Hersh: In my experience in the last 30 years, one of the major worries was about the “Islamic bomb,” about Pakistan. If you knew the lengths to which we go, working with the ISI, to make sure some ultranationalist or ultrajihadist doesn’t get [control of nukes].

    Chotiner: Yes, although you could argue that if we hadn’t nurtured these elements for so long, the country would be less of a threat.

    Hersh: You could argue anything.

    Chotiner: I want to—

    Hersh: Swing away fella.

    Chotiner: You sent me—

    Hersh: You probably don’t know that NBC reported, and now they have reported it on one of these dopey afternoon shows with that woman, what’s her name, the NBC woman who claims to have some knowledge of foreign policy, married to Alan Greenspan.

    Chotiner: Andrea Mitchell.

    Hersh: She’s comical. On her show the administration is acknowledging walk-ins but saying the walk-ins aren’t necessarily linked to Bin Laden.

    Chotiner: The AFP piece, which you sent me approvingly, says the same thing, that there is no evidence the walk-in led to Bin Laden, and that the walk-in did not even know the target was Bin Laden.

    Hersh: Uh huh, OK.

    Chotiner: OK but here is my question about journalism, since you have been doing this longer than I have—

    Hersh: Oh poor you, you don’t know anything. It is amazing you can speak the God’s English.

    Chotiner: Are you hoping with this piece to say that you made no mistakes, or that OK there were mistakes because I am getting the ball rolling? You have quoted two pieces very approvingly, from NBC and AFP, that differ from key points in your own story. I want to know how accurate you think your story now is.

    Hersh: [Laughs loudly] Well I will tell you one thing: At one point a copy editor in England confronted me about the SEALs training in Nevada and changed it to Utah, and the line made it because according to her they were sort of the same.

    Chotiner: The AFP piece contradicts your piece but you aren’t running around worried about that.

    Hersh: I sent it approvingly because it crossed my desk and it does say there were walk-ins. [Laughs] You can read it any way you want. The White House has been very clever about this. They have gone after me personally. They don’t like me boo hoo hoo. But they have been very careful to hedge everything, they quote Peter Bergen. Bergen or Berger, is that his name?

    Chotiner: Bergen.

    Hersh: They quote him. He views himself as the trustee of all things Bin Laden.

    Chotiner: I just want to talk to you about your piece and journalism.

    Hersh: What difference does it make what the fuck I think about journalism? I don’t think much of the journalism that I see. If you think I write stories where it is all right to just be good enough, are you kidding? You think I have a cavalier attitude on throwing stuff out? Are you kidding? I am not cavalier about what I do for a living.

    Chotiner: I don’t think you are cavalier. That was not my question.

    Hersh: Whatever it is, it’s an impossible question. It’s almost like you are asking me to say that there are flaws in everybody. Yes. Do I acknowledge that not everybody can be perfect? But I am not backing off anything I said.

    Chotiner: Well let’s talk about sources. A lot of the reporting that got us into the last stupid war was based on bad and often anonymous sources. Is there a problem with journalists having a limited number of sources, just generally speaking? Is this a problem? With unnamed sources—

    Hersh: Are you kidding me? Unnamed sources? You are smarter than that. This is too boring.

    Chotiner: Let me finish my question and then you can yell at me.

    Hersh: I am done yelling.

    Chotiner: Is there some sort of journalistic standard that reporters should try to meet to prevent more errors?

    Hersh: Let me say something to you. There was a practice at the New Yorker that continued at the London Review of Books. The reason I like the LRB is that it isn’t tied down to Americana. It is more open to being … In Europe people think this story makes sense. There is not the quibbling. It is a different approach. By that I mean that the view of America is less cheery abroad but the standards are the same. The people at the London Review knew whom I talked to. It is the same at the New Yorker. David Remnick knows who I talk to. I do have sources, which is a problem for a lot of people that don’t.

    Chotiner: OK well it seems like the upshot of what you are saying, and correct me if this is wrong—

    Hersh: I just said what I said. I don’t want to hear what the upshot is. If you have another question then ask it. This is going on too long. I am too old and too cranky and too tired. I have been doing this fucking thing for a day. I told you, I warned you, that I am really irritable.

    Chotiner: OK so if both places check your sources, and the New Yorker—

    Hersh: Now you are restating it. In Europe it is an easier path. The notion that somehow America—I have one slight layer less. Believe me. I don’t know if you know who Mary-Kay Wilmers is. You probably don’t.

    Chotiner: She is the editor of the LRB.

    Hersh: Do you know how smart she is?

    Chotiner: I have heard stories.

    Hersh: She is fantastic. She is as good as they say. They go gaga over her. She was married to Stephen Frears. She is tenacious. But believe me this piece took a long time to get into print. A lot of questions. A lot of nasty questions.

    Chotiner: OK—

    Hersh: Don’t turn this into some sort of profound anti-American statement.

    Chotiner: It seems like you are hinting the New Yorker rejected it for reasons having to do with politics.

    Hersh: Would you care to hear the truth? Would you care to hear something that didn’t come from Vox, whoever Vox is? I am not sure you are that interested in it. I am doing a book. Within four or five days I hear that there are problems with the [official] OBL story. A lot of problems. And I have good friends in Pakistan. Really good friends. I go there a lot. Hold on, I just walked out of a two-room suite and the fucking movie crew. The fucking movie crew just leaves the desk. God dammit. [A film crew had been in Hersh’s office.] Anyway. First of all, you may get some suggestion of this. Maybe I am not an easy guy.

    Chotiner: I wouldn’t dream of suggesting that.

    Hersh: There was a point with the New Yorker where I thought they should rename the fucking magazine the Seymour Hersh Weekly. David Remnick has his own theories and opinions. He is not cowed by me. We have a lot of fights. We have a lot of disagreements. I don’t find that so shocking. I like him a lot, he is brilliant, he is great. I think he is even a better writer than editor. I have always been a freelancer. I always work for myself.

    Chotiner: I get that.

    Hersh: So, all that happens is I tell him about the story, and his initial approach was to say do a blog item. Go fuck yourself! A blog? I have done a couple blogs when it is 1,000 words but this is worth more. At that point it was very early. So I was on contract for a book and said fuck it … You want to make a lot out of it? David always says he welcomes another view. I am the guy who said fuck it, I will do what I want to do. [Editor’s note: Other news sources have reported that the New Yorker declined to publish a version of the story.]

    [Hersh picks up other phone]: Yeah. Yeah. Oh no, fuck no … I don’t want to do it there! Go fuck—

    Hersh: You there?

    Chotiner: Yes.

    Hersh: Fucking TV interview sets up in the hall of my office building. It’s a lawyer’s building.

    Chotiner: I was just asking—

    Hersh: You want to write about this totally tedious shit? Yes, I am a huge pain in the ass. I am the one that decided to publish it wherever the hell I please. That’s the story. You want to listen to hall gossip about me? Go ahead. [Sarcastic voice] It is so immensely important to so many people to know where I published. I can’t believe it.

    Chotiner: Can I tell you why?

    Hersh: I don’t want to hear why. You think there is a different standard in London?

    Chotiner: I wish you would listen.

    Hersh: All right, maybe I will listen, but I gotta hang up.

    Chotiner: If people here are turning down stories because of certain politics—you yourself said it was easier in Europe—that is a story that should be written.

    Hersh: Now you said the first intelligent thing you have said. If you had asked whether he didn’t run this because he is in love with Obama and all that stuff that people think, no … It is a very good question. Although we have huge disagreements. My children and I have huge disagreements. I have a huge disagreement with my dog. We have a lot of disagreements and there are times when he will call me and I will not answer the call. Oh fuck hold on. He always has said to me he welcomes any information and it was I who said fuck it.

    Chotiner: OK but you have talked about the New Yorker’s Americana and said my question was a good one, so is there something to it?

    Hersh: I think it is a great question.

    Chotiner: So what do you think of it?

    Hersh: I just told you what I think. In the case of the Bin Laden story, he is open for anything. It was I who made the decision.

    Chotiner: I feel like you are telling me two different things. One is that you get less pressure in Europe, and the other is that this story would have been fine at the New Yorker.

    Hersh: So fine, I am glad you are confused. Write whichever one makes you happy.

    Chotiner: OK.

    Hersh: I don’t mean to yell at you but I feel good doing it. Goodbye.



  • McCain Joins Ukraine Advisory Committee Headed By Georgia's Fugitive Ex-President

    John McCain — everyone’s favorite possibly senile senator who Vladimir Putin thinks may have gone nuts in ‘Nam and who has had quite a difficult time shaking rumors about his past dealings with “brave” Syrian ‘freedom fights’ who may have gone on to become ISIS militants — is ‘back in the (former) USSR.’

    Earlier this year, McCain expressed his disappointment in the glacial pace at which Washington is moving on the path to World War III, saying he is “ashamed” of the President, the country, and of himself, for not “doing more to help those people.” By “those people” McCain meant Ukrainians and by “more to help” he meant sending lethal aid to Kiev so the Ukrainian army can turn the on-again-off-again “conflict” with Russia into a proper war that self-respecting hawks can be proud of.

    McCain is no stranger to Ukrainian politics. In 2013 he spoke to a crowd of protesters in the wake of then-President Viktor Yanukovich’s (who was once the victim of an attempted assassination-by-egg and who famously fled the country amid widespread protests last year) decision to lean Russian on trade, telling the crowd that “the free world is with you, America is with you, I am with.” It appears McCain is taking that pledge quite literally because as you can see from the following official release from the Ukrainian government, the Senator has been added to Poroshenko’s International Advisory Board. 

    APPROVED

    Decree of President of Ukraine on May 13, 2015

     

    REGULATIONS of the International Advisory Council reform International Advisory Board Reform (hereinafter – the Council) is a consultative body under the President of Ukraine, whose main task is to provide suggestions and recommendations for the implementation of reforms in Ukraine based on the best international practices.

     

    COMPOSITION

    International Advisory Board Reform

     

    Miheil Saakashvili – President of Georgia in 2004-2007 and 2008 -2013 years, chairman (by consent)

     

    Carl Bildt – Prime Minister of the Kingdom of Sweden in 1991 – 1994 years, Minister of Foreign Affairs of the Kingdom of Sweden in 2006 – 2014 years (by consent)

     

    Elmar Brok – Chairman of the European Parliament Committee on Foreign Affairs (the agreement)

     

    Mikulas Dzurinda – Prime Minister of the Slovak Republic in 1998 – 2006 years (by consent)

    Andrius Kubilius – Prime Minister of the Republic of Lithuania in 1999 – 2000 and 2008 – 2012 years (by consent)

     

    John McCain – United States Senator, Chairman of the Committee on Armed Services of the Senate of the United States (by consent)

     

    Anders Aslund – Senior Fellow, Peterson Institute for International Economics (United States), Professor (by consent)

     

    Jacek Saryusz-Wolski – Member of the European Parliament (by consent).

    Note that former Georgian President Miheil Saakashvili also made the list, which is notable because .. well, he’s an international fugitive. Here’s RT:

    Saakashvili has been appointed as head of the new advisory group, says the statement on Ukraine’s presidential website…

     

    Back in February Saakashvili was appointed as a non-staff adviser to Poroshenko. The ex-Georgian president, who was in power from 2004 to 2013, faces numerous charges at home, including embezzlement of over $5 million, corruption and brutality against protesters during demonstrations in 2007. Georgia’s Chief Prosecutor’s Office launched proceedings to indict Saakashvili and place him on the international most wanted list, but Kiev refused to hand over the fugitive president, despite an existing extradition agreement between Ukraine and Georgia.

     

    Saakashvili is known for his strong anti-Russian stance, which garnered heavy US support. In August 2008 during his term in office Georgia launched an offensive against South Ossetia, killing dozens of civilians and Russian peacekeepers stationed in the republic. Georgia’s shelling of Tskhinval prompted Russia to conduct a military operation to fend off the offensive. Despite Saakashvili’s claims that the conflict was “Russian aggression,” the 2010 EU Independent Fact Finding Mission Report ruled that Tbilisi was responsible for the attack…

     

    Following the new Kiev authorities’ attempt to suppress dissent in the east of the country and Crimea’s ascension into the Russian Federation, McCain became the main engine of lobbying for lethal arms supplies to Ukrainian forces to “defend themselves” and Europe from “Russian aggression.”


     

    “The Ukrainian people don’t want US or Western troops to fight for them; they are simply asking for the right tools to defend themselves and their country,” he said late last month at a hearing on US security policy in Europe. “Russia’s invasion and dismemberment of Ukraine should remind everyone of the true nature of Putin’s ambitions and the fragility of peace in Europe.”

    Yes, the “fragility of peace in Europe,” which is of course made infinitely more fragile by the type of snap drills, troop buildups and NATO sabre rattling that the good senator so ardently supports. But as anxious as McCain may be to do his part to help the “poor” people of Ukraine by plunging them into a bloody civil war, he’s still keen to express the proper deference to ethics, the law, and “that kind of stuff“: 

    “I was asked to do it both by Ukraine and Saakashvili and I said I would be inclined to do it, but I said I needed to look at all the nuances of it, whether it’s legal under our ethics and all that kind of stuff.”

    We’re sure the makeup of this new “advisory council” will do wonders to promote peace in Eastern Europe. And as if on cue (via Bloomberg just hours ago):

    Senate Armed Services Cmte approves bill on 22-4 vote, says Sen. Jack Reed, ranking Democrat on cmte.

     

    Bill would preserve A-10 close-air combat plane; authorizes arms to Ukraine, McCain says.

     



  • Yet Another Chart That Whimpers "Recession"

    Submitted by Charles Hugh-Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    It's worthwhile recalling that mainstream economists, the Federal Reserve, government agencies and the mainstream financial media all deny the economy is in recession until it falls off a cliff. 

     
    Back in March I published unambiguously recessionary charts of new orders and per capita energy consumption: New Orders Look Recessionary (March 9, 2015)
     
     
    Zero Hedge recently published an overview of charts that also spell recession: The US Is In Recession According To These 7 Charts.
     
    Mish has provided evidence that a recession has already started: Household Spending Growth Expectations Plunge; Recession Already Started?
     
    For those who want yet more quantitative evidence of recession, here is another chart, courtesy of longtime contributor B.C. This is a chart of the Chicago Fed's National Financial Conditions Index (NFCI):
     
    Because U.S. economic and financial conditions tend to be highly correlated, we also present an alternative index, the adjusted NFCI (ANFCI). This index isolates a component of financial conditions uncorrelated with economic conditions to provide an update on financial conditions relative to current economic conditions.
     
    The chart also displays the spread between Baa-rated corporate bond yields (Baa bonds are just above junk bonds, which are typically rated BB or lower) and 10-year Treasury bond yields.
     
    Widening spreads between corporate bonds and Treasuries are associated with recessions, as are ANFCI readings above zero. The current reading is .20, a level that correlates to deteriorating financial conditions and the early stages of recessions.
     
    The more dependent the economy is on financialization, the greater the impact of deteriorating financial conditions. To a large degree, the U.S. economy's apparent strength is an illusion based on extremes of financialization: rampant Fed monetization of Treasury debt and mortgages, extremes of leverage and speculation that have inflated asset bubbles that have created a wealth effect that is limited to the top 10% of households, and is highly concentrated in the top .01% of households.
     
     
     
    Here is the ANFCI and the Fed Funds rate, which has been near-zero for years. What can we say about an economy that requires zero-interest rates as the New Normal? How can anyone claim this is a healthy, robust economy if tepid expansion depends entirely on unprecedented zero rates, unprecedented Federal Reserve monetization/asset purchases and a highly asymmetric wealth effect that has widened income and wealth inequality?
     
     
    At this juncture, it's worthwhile recalling that mainstream economists, the Federal Reserve, government agencies and the mainstream financial media all deny the economy is in recession until it falls off a cliff. Only after a recession can no longer be denied will the organs of propaganda concede that the economy is indeed mired in a recession.
     
    When the organs of propaganda finally concede that the economy is in recession, they inevitably fight the last war: whatever worked in the past is repeated, even though the next recession will be an entirely new financial battlefield. Repeating what worked in late 2008-early 2009 will fail, and fail catastrophically, because conditions have changed.



  • Caught In The Act: Government Hackers

    But… what difference does it make…

     

     

    Source: Townhall



  • Miami Beach Cops Caught Exchanging 100s Of Racist, Pornographic Emails

    Just as race relations in America leave the front-pages for a day – as the news cycle briefly and sadly focuses on Amtrak – Miami Beach police department drags the nation back into debate. According to Miami-Dade State Attorney Katherine Fernandez Rundle, more than a dozen Miami Beach Police officers exchanged numerous racist and pornographic emails. "This is a very sad day for Miami Beach," Mayor Levine concluded, after Rundle explained that the officers are involved in 540 cases, with about 30% of them involving black defendants.

     

    Coming just months after four Fort Lauderdale Police officers lost their jobs over a racist video and racist text messages (where dozens of cases linked to those officers have been dropped), NBC Miami reports,

    "Minorities and women were being demeaned in these emails that were sent between the officers, nude photographs were passed around and emails portraying offensive sexual acts were disseminated," Fernandez Rundle said.

     

    Prosecutors are reviewing the cases of 16 officers who sent or received the emails, Fernandez Rundle said.

     

    The officers are involved in 540 cases, with about 30 percent of them involving black defendants.

     

    "Our job and our commitment is to ensure that we will do everything that we can to make sure that we do not prosecute cases that have been tainted by racial prejudice and racial insensitivity," Fernandez Rundle said.

     

    Chief Oates said the major senders of the emails were a major who left the department in July and a captain who had been demoted and was fired Thursday morning.

     

    "This is a very sad day for Miami Beach," Mayor Levine said. "I can assure the public that we've made all the necessary steps, and will continue to do so, because situations like this we will never sweep under the rug."

     

    According to Oates, most of the material was sent between 2010 and 2012. Oates joined the department in June 2014 and found out about the material in July 2014.

    About one million emails were examined and about 230 were found to be offensive, Oates said. Hundreds of pornographic images were given to the National Center for Missing and Exploited Children to ensure none of the images were of minors, Oates said.

    m Bpd Racist Emails

    *  *  *

    As Chief Oates concludes, "at the very top, there was a tolerance for bad behavior," placing the blame on his predecessor, former Police Chief Ray Martinez who, as MiamiNewTimes reports, retired last year and took a cushy gig as the head of security for Ultra Music Festival.



  • Market Melts Up To Record Highs, Bonds & Bullion Bid

    Record Highs… why the f##k not!!

    Before we get started, this…WTF!!

     

    OK – having got that idiocy off our chest. It is OPEX tomorrow, BATS Options and NYSE Arca broke this morning and volume was terrible… so what more do you expect than this!

     

    It seems pretty clear that there is only one thing that matters now… keeping The Dow in positive territory for 2015…

     

     

    VIX banged back under 13… (it has the 'give the market the finger' pattern to it)

     

    And the gap open cash markets did not look back..

     

    On the week, Trannies weak – rest all green again now…

     

    Bonds & Stocks decoupled today…(or recoupled with the old normal)

     

    Bonds rallied on the day but Treasury yields majorly diverging on the week – 2Y -2bps, 30Y +16bps!

     

    Curves are different for now…

     

    The USDollar retraced its early losses to end the day almost unchanged – USDJPY absolutely dead.

     

    Crude and copper slipped lower as precious metals boomed once again today…

     

    Crude closed back below $60…

     

    But it was gold & Silver that really ripped again

     

    Wheat soared… its biggest day in almost 6 months…

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

    Bonus Chart: AVP WTF

     

    Bonus Bonus Chart: SHAK Shook



  • President Obama Explains How Well The Meeting With Persian Gulf "Allies" Went – Live Feed

    This should be good… as we explained earlier, analysts have pointed to a growing rift between the Obama administration and the Gulf’s Sunni states over the emerging nuclear deal with Iran as a chief reason for the snub, though the Saudi king, as well as his Bahraini counterpart, have denied such assertions.

     

     

    President Obama Q&A due to start around 1730ET…(after a statement)



  • Ray Dalio: "If You Don't Own Gold, You Know Neither History Nor Economics"

    Bridgewater's Ray Dalio explains in under 120 seconds why everyone should allocate some of their portfolio to gold:

    "If you dont own gold…there is no sensible reason other than you dont know history or you dont know the economics of it…"

     

    Of course, few 'status quo' believers will pay heed to the $150 billion AUM fund manager, despite his imploring everyone that to be successful, one must "Think Independently, Stay Humble"



  • Even The FDIC Admits It's Not Ready For The Next Banking Crisis

    Submitted by Simon Black via Sovereign Man blog,

    We have entered a most bizarre and unprecedented age in the financial system where there’s risk in just about everything that we do.

    Indiscriminately investing in stocks at their all-time highs carries enormous risk, and financial history is unkind to people who fail to learn that lesson.

    To buy bonds, on the other hand, means loaning money to insolvent governments at rates that are either below inflation or even outright negative.

    Real estate markets in many parts of the world are right back at the frothy highs they experienced prior to the last financial crisis.

    And if Pablo Picasso is any indicator, even an asset class like fine art is booming at all-time highs.

    The normal approach in an era of so much financial risk would be to do nothing; gather your capital, sit on the sidelines, and wait for a crash.

    Yet now the act of doing nothing and holding your money in a bank also brings an orgy of risk.

    Most banks in the West are extremely illiquid, and are in many cases insolvent. But few people ever give thought to the financial condition of their bank.

    In the United States, for example, people are indoctrinated almost from birth that banks are safe and somehow infallible.

    Banks inter themselves in the most expensive locations with ornate lobbies and cornerstones that proudly inform the world they are backed by the full faith and credit of the United States government.

    But that barely counts given that the US government is itself insolvent with a negative equity of minus $17.7 trillion according to their own financial statements.

    Then there’s the FDIC, which insures deposits in the US banking system.

    In its 2014 annual report the FDIC itself points out that its whole insurance fund constitutes just a fraction of a percent of all deposits in the system, and that its ‘reserve ratio’ is just 1.01%.

    With a reserve so low, the FDIC not only lacks any meaningful teeth to insure the system, but it actually fails to meet the minimum level that is required by law.

    This quasi-government regulatory agency fails to meet the government regulatory requirement and is in worse shape than the banks that it’s supposed to insure.

    Perhaps even more important, the FDIC doesn’t expect to meet this statutory minimum until at least 2020.

    To me this begs an obvious question. Do we really have another 5+ years before there’s another major crisis in the US banking system?

    Most US banks today are just as illiquid as they were before the crisis, holding just a tiny portion of deposits in reserve and gambling away the rest.

    And the most popular place that they invest their customers’ deposits today is exactly the same as in 2008: mortgage-backed securities.

    Curiously, the FDIC’s reserves today are actually far lower than they were prior to the crisis.

    On top of that, back then the FDIC only insured $100,000 worth of your deposits per financial institution. Now it’s $250,000.

    So essentially the FDIC is on the hook to pay more than twice as much money to depositors. Yet it has a lower reserve to support an even larger system that is up to the same precarious practices as before.

    This doesn’t exactly inspire confidence.

    But don’t take my word for it.

    In a recent announcement, the FDIC tells us how banks have grown far larger and even more complex since 2008, and that “[s]uch trends have not only continued, they accelerated as a result of the crisis.”

     

    The FDIC goes on to suggest that its current tools and business model are “not sufficient to mitigate the complexities of large institution failures.”

     

    But even though they’re not equipped to handle it, they’re not entirely sure what to do.

     

    That’s why the FDIC is “seeking comment on what additional regulatory action should be taken. . .”

     

    In other words, they’re asking the public for suggestions about how to handle a major US bank failure. Hardly encouraging.

    Bottom line– your bank is potentially in the same boat it was in 2008. The FDIC is worse off. And the federal government is totally insolvent.

    These are not risks you should assume away. Give great care to the decision of where you hold your savings.

    And definitely look abroad.

    There’s an entire laundry list of offshore banks that are in great financial condition and located in strong, stable foreign countries.

    It’s hard to imagine that you’ll be worse off for holding a portion of your savings in a country with no debt at a healthy bank that’s 5x more capitalized and 10x more liquid than where you currently bank.



  • "Obama's Tax-The-Rich Plan Is Futile" Druckenmiller Warns, America's Aging Population Is A "Massive, Massive Problem"

    "Young people are not going to be talking about cutting back," exclaims billionaire hedge fund manager Stanley Druckenmiller, ominously concluding "there will be nothing to cut back." The reason he is so doom-full about the future – an aging population will present a "massive, massive problem" for the U.S. in 15 years – as Bloomberg reports, because of demographics, "we're just using more and more of society’s resources to fend for the old people," warning that Obama's plans to tax the rich to pay for more social services for the poor would be futile.

    “We’re going to go from five workers of working age supporting every elderly person to two and a half because of demographics,” said Druckenmiller.

     

    “We’re just using more and more of society’s resources to fend for the old people.”

    As Bloomberg reports, Druckenmiller, 61, has argued for several years that the mushrooming costs of Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid will bankrupt the nation’s youth and eventually result in a crisis worse than the financial meltdown of 2008. The government will have to reduce payments to the elderly, he said at the event.

    …an aging population will present a “massive, massive problem” for the U.S. in 15 years.

     

    “The young people are not going to be talking about cutting back,” Druckenmiller said Wednesday night in New York at an event hosted by Addepar, a technology company that provides software to financial advisers, fund managers and family offices. “There will be nothing to cut back.”

    *  *  *

    Druckenmiller also had some comments on the share buyback debacle in US equity markets…

    Druckenmiller criticized companies for borrowing money to pursue corporate buybacks.

     

    “I think it’s nuts,” he said. “If you’re running a business for the long term, the last thing you should be doing is borrowing money to buy back stock.”

    Finally, Druckenmiller concludes,

    President Barack Obama’s proposals to tax the rich to pay for more social services for the poor would be futile.

     

    “That’s not where the money is,” he said, instead pointing to spending on entitlements.

    But then again – when did futility stop the governmenmt?



Digest powered by RSS Digest

America’s Achilles’ Heel

Dmitry Orlov

Last Saturday, a massive Victory Parade was held in Moscow commemorating the 70-year anniversary of the surrender of Nazi Germany to the Red Army and the erection of the Soviet flag atop the Reichstag in Berlin. There were a few unusual aspects to this parade, which I would like to point out, because they conflict with the western official propaganda narrative.

First, it wasn’t just Russian troops that marched in the parade: the troops of 10 other nations took part in it, including the Chinese honor guard and a contingent of Grenadiers from India. Dignitaries from these nations were present in the stands, and the Chinese President Xi Jinping and his wife were seated next to President Vladimir Putin, who, in his speech at the start of the parade, warned against attempts to create a unipolar world—sharp words aimed squarely at the United States and its western allies.

Second, a look at the military hardware that rolled through Red Square or flew over it would indicate that, short of an outright nuclear mutual self-annihilation, there isn’t much that the US military could throw at Russia that Russia couldn’t neutralize.

It would appear that American attempts to isolate Russia have resulted in the exact opposite: if 10 nations, among them the world’s largest economy, comprising some 3 billion people, are willing to set aside their differences and stand shoulder to shoulder with the Russians to counter American attempts at global dominance, then clearly the American plan isn’t going to work at all. Western media focused on the fact that western leaders declined to attend the celebration, either in a fit of pique or because so ordered by the Obama administration, but this only highlights their combined irrelevance, be it in defeating Hitler, or in commemorating his defeat 70 years later. Nevertheless, in his speech Putin specifically thanked the French, the British and the Americans for their contribution to the war effort. I am sorry that he left out the Belgians, who had been so helpful at Dunkirk.

One small detail about the parade is nevertheless stunning: Defense Minister Sergei Shoigu, a Tuvan Buddhist and one of the most respected Russian leaders, who presided over the Emergencies Ministry prior to becoming the Defense Minister, did something none of his predecessors ever did: at the beginning of the ceremony, he made the sign of the cross, in the Russian Orthodox manner. This simple gesture transformed the parade from a display of military pomp to a sacred ritual. Then followed the slow march with two flags side by side: the Russian flag, and the Soviet flag that flew on top of the Reichstag in Berlin on Victory Day 70 years ago. The march was accompanied by a popular World War II song? Its title? “The Sacred War.” The message is clear: the Russian military, and the Russian people, have put themselves in God’s hands, to do God’s work, to once again sacrifice themselves to save the world from the ravages of an evil empire.

If you try to dismiss any of this as Russian state propaganda, then here is something else you should be aware of. Did you hear of the spontaneously organized procession in which, after the official parade, half a million people marched through Moscow with portraits of their relatives who died in World War II? The event was called “The Eternal Regiment” (??????????? ????). Similar processions took place in many cities throughout Russia, and the total number of participants is estimated at around 4 million. Western press either panned it or billed it as an attempt by Putin to whip up anti-western sentiment. Now that sort of “press coverage,” my fellow space travelers, is pure propaganda! No, it was an enthusiastic, spontaneous outpouring of genuine public sentiment. If you think about it just a tiny bit, nothing on this scale could be contrived artificially, and the thought that millions of people would prostitute their dead for propaganda purposes is, frankly, both cynical and insulting.

* * *

Instead of collapsing quietly, the US has decided to pick a fight with Russia. It appears to have already lost the fight, but a question remains: How many more countries will the US manage to destroy before the reality of its inevitable defeat and disintegration finally catches up with it?

As Putin said last summer when speaking at the Seliger youth forum, “I get the feeling that no matter what the Americans touch, they end up with Libya or Iraq.” Indeed, the Americans have been on a tear, destroying one country after another. Iraq has been dismembered, Libya is a no-go zone, Syria is a humanitarian disaster, Egypt is a military dictatorship executing a program of mass imprisonment. The latest fiasco is Yemen, where the pro-American government was recently overthrown, and the American nationals who found themselves trapped there had to wait for the Russians and the Chinese to extract them and send them home. But it was the previous American foreign policy fiasco, in the Ukraine, which prompted the Russians, along with the Chinese, to signal that the US has taken a step too far, and that all further steps will result in automatic escalation.

The Russian plan, along with China, India, and much of the rest of the world, is to prepare for war with the US, but to do everything possible to avoid it. Time is on their side, because with each passing day they become stronger while America grows weaker. But while this process runs its course, America might “touch” a few more countries, turning them into a Libya or an Iraq. Is Greece next on the list? What about throwing under the bus the Baltic states (Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania), which are now NATO members (i.e., sacrificial lambs)? Estonia is a short drive from Russia’s second-largest city, St. Petersburg, it has a large Russian population, it has a majority-Russian capital city, and it has a rabidly anti-Russian government. Of those four facts, just one is incongruous. Is it being set up to self-destruct? Some Central Asian republics, in Russia’s ticklish underbelly, might be ripe for being “touched” too.

There is no question that the Americans will continue to try to create mischief around the world, “touching” vulnerable, exploitable countries, for as long as they can. But there is another question that deserves to be asked: Do the Americans “touch” themselves? Because if they do, then the next candidate for extreme makeover into a bombed-out wasteland might be the United States itself. Let’s consider this option.

As the events in Ferguson, and more recently in Baltimore, have indicated, the tensions between African-Americans and the police have escalated to a point where explosions become likely. The American “war on drugs” has been essentially a war on young black (and Latino) men; about a third of young blacks are behind bars. They also run a high risk of being shot by the police. To be fair, the police also run a high risk of getting shot by young black males, causing them to be jumpy and to overreact. Given the gradually collapsing economy—close to 100 million working-age Americans are unemployed (“outside the labor force,” if you wish to split hairs)—it would seem that for an ever-increasing chunk of the population cooperating with the authorities is no longer a useful strategy: you get locked up or killed anyway, but you get none of the temporary benefits that come from ignoring the law.

There is an interesting asymmetry in the American media’s ability to block out information about civil unrest and insurgency: if it is happening overseas, then news of it can be carefully calibrated or suppressed outright. (Did American television tell you about the recent resumption of shelling of civilian districts by the Ukrainian military? Of course not!) This is possible because Americans are notoriously narcissistic and largely indifferent to the rest of the world, of which most of them know little, and what they think they know is often wrong. But if the unrest is within the US itself, then the various media outlets find themselves competing against each other in who can sensationalize it better, in order to get more viewership, and more advertising revenue. The mainstream media in the US is tightly controlled by a handful of large conglomerates, making it one big monopoly on information, but at the level of selling advertising market principles still prevail.

Thus there is the potential for a positive feedback loop: more civil unrest generates more sensationalized news coverage, which in turn amplifies the civil unrest, which further sensationalizes the news coverage. And there is a second positive feedback loop as well: the more civil unrest there is, the more the police overreact in trying to control the situation, thereby generating more rage, amplifying the civil unrest. These two positive feedback loops can continue to run out of control for a while, but the end result, in all such recent incidents, is the same: the introduction of National Guard troops and the imposition of curfew and martial law.

The swift introduction of the military might seem a bit odd, considering that most police departments, even small-town ones, have been heavily militarized in recent years, and even the security people at some school districts now have military vehicles and machine guns. But the progression is a natural one. On the one hand, when people who habitually resort to brute force find that it isn’t working, they naturally assume that this is because they aren’t using enough of it. On the other hand, if the criminal justice system is already a travesty and a shambles, then why not just cut through the red tape and impose martial law?

There is an awful lot of weapons of all sorts in the US already, and more will come in all the time as the US is forced to close overseas military bases due to lack of funds. And they will probably get used, for the same reason and in the same fashion that red bricks came to be used in Boston. You see, plenty of red bricks kept coming into Boston aboard British ships, where they were used as ballast for the return trip. This created the impetus to do something with them. But putting up brick buildings is a difficult, demanding process, especially if laborers are always drunk. And so the solution was to use the bricks to pave sidewalks—something one can do on one’s hands and knees. Similarly with the military hardware sloshing back into the US from abroad. It will be used, because it’s there; and it will be used in the stupidest way possible: shooting at one’s own people.

But bad things happen to militaries when they are ordered to shoot at their own people. It is one thing to shoot at “towel-heads” in a far-away land; it is quite another to be ordered shoot at somebody who could be your own brother down the street from where you grew up. Such orders result in fragging (shooting your own officers), in refusal to follow orders, and in attempts to stand up for the other side.

And that’s where things get interesting. Because, you see, if you shoot at, imprison, and otherwise abuse a defenseless civilian population long enough, what you get in response is an armed insurgency. The place insurgencies are easiest to organize is in prison. For instance, ISIS, or the Islamic Caliphate, was masterminded by people who had previously worked for Saddam Hussein, while they were imprisoned by the Americans. They took this opportunity to work out an efficient organizational structure and, upon release, found each other and got down to work. Having a third of young American blacks locked up gives them all the opportunity they need to organize an effective insurgency.

To be effective, an insurgency needs lots of weapons. Here, again, there is a procedure for acquiring military technology that has become almost routine. What weapons are being used by ISIS? Why, of course, American ones, which the Americans provided to the regime in Baghdad, and which ISIS took as trophies when the Iraqi army refused to fight and ran away. And what weapons are being used by the Houthi rebels in Yemen? Why, of course, the American ones, which the Americans provided to the now overthrown pro-American regime there. And what are some of the weapons being used by the Syrian regime of Bashar Assad? Why, of course, American ones, sold to them by the Ukrainian government, which got them from the Americans. There is a pattern here: it seems that whenever Americans arm, train and equip an army, that army stands a really big chance of simply melting away, with the weapons falling into the hands of those who want to use them against American interests. It is hard to see why this same pattern wouldn’t hold once the US places much of itself under military occupation.

And that’s where things get really interesting: a well-armed, well-organized insurgency composed of thoroughly radicalized, outraged people who have absolutely nothing to lose and are fighting for their home turf and their families squaring off against a demoralized, defeated US military that has just failed spectacularly in every country it “touched.”

They say that “You can’t fight city hall.” But what if you have a tank battalion that can control four intersections all around city hall, turrets pointed in all directions, firing at anything that moves? And what if you have enough infantry to go around and ring the doorbells of all the key city hall bureaucrats? Wouldn’t that change one’s odds of victory in fighting city hall?

The US might get to “touch” a few more countries before this scenario unfolds, but it seems likely that (excepting the possibility of all-out war) eventually America will “touch” itself, and then all those countries whose troops marched through Red Square last Saturday won’t have America to kick around any more.

Today’s News May 14, 2015

  • Chinese Iron Ore Prices Plunge After CISA Warns Of Persistent Overcapacity

    Having rebounded along with practically every other risk-asset class in the world over the last month or so, Chinese Iron Ore futures are collapsing tonight. Despite the promise of Chinese LTROs expanding credit (just like they didn’t in Europe), iron ore prices are down around 4% – the biggest drop in over 2 years – to as low as CNY419 (or around $62) as China Iron & Steel Association warns that overcapacity in the seaborne iron ore market will persist through to at least 2019 as the world’s largest suppliers expand production further.

    Iron Ore prices are down the most in over 2 years…

     

    “Low-cost seaborne supply entering the market is not only displacing high-cost Chinese production, but also high-cost seaborne supply,” Alan Chirgwin, BHP iron ore marketing vice president, told the conference. Supply will rise by about 100 million to 110 million tons this year, exceeding modest demand growth of about 30 million to 40 million tons, he said.

    Major producers remain intent on expansions and a battle for market share is under way as miners attempt to reduce their costs faster than prices are dropping, according to Credit Suisse Group AG.

     

    Source: Bloomberg



  • The US Is In Recession According To These 7 Charts

    The evidence continues to mount…

    "Most since Lehman" has become the new meme for macro-economic data in the US as day after day brings another lacklustre superlative to be dismissed with some excuse by the cognoscenti of sell-side economists…

     

     Of course, that is aside from anything related to aggregate jobs that is spewed by the government's official ministries of truth… (do not look at this chart)

    *  *  *

    So here are seven charts that scream "recession" is here…

    Retail Sales are weak – extremely weak. Retail Sales have not dropped this much YoY outside of a recession…

     

    And if Retail Sales are weak, then Wholesalers are seeing sales plunge at a pace not seen outside of recession…

     

    Which means Factory Orders are collapsing at a pace only seen in recession…

     

    And Durable Goods New Orders are negative YoY once again – strongly indicative of a recessionary environment…

     

    Which is not going to improve anytime soon since inventories have not been this high relative to sales outside of a recession

     

    In fact, the last time durable goods orders fell this much, The Fed launched QE3 – indicating clearly why they desperately want to raise rates imminently… in order to have some non-ZIRP/NIRP ammo when the next recession hits.

    *  *  *

    And just in case you figured that if domestic prosperity won't goose the economy, Chinese and Japanese stimulus means the rest of the world will save us… nope!! Export growth is now negative… as seen in the last 2 recessions.

     

    And deflationary pressures (Import Prices ex-fuel) are washing upon America's shores at a pace not seen outside of a recession

     

    *  *  *

    But apart from that, given that US equities are at record highs, everything must be great in the US economy…

     

    Wait a minute.



  • "We The People" Need To Circle The Wagons: The Government Is On The Warpath

    Submitted by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “The government is merely a servant?merely a temporary servant; it cannot be its prerogative to determine what is right and what is wrong, and decide who is a patriot and who isn’t. Its function is to obey orders, not originate them.” ? Mark Twain

    How many Americans have actually bothered to read the Constitution, let alone the first ten amendments to the Constitution, the Bill of Rights (a quick read at 462 words)?

    Take a few minutes and read those words for yourself—rather than having some court or politician translate them for you—and you will be under no illusion about where to draw the line when it comes to speaking your mind, criticizing your government, defending what is yours, doing whatever you want on your own property, and keeping the government’s nose out of your private affairs.

    In an age of overcriminalization, where the average citizen unknowingly commits three crimes a day, and even the most mundane activities such as fishing and gardening are regulated, government officials are constantly telling Americans what not to do. Yet it was not always this way. It used to be “we the people” telling the government what it could and could not do. Indeed, the three words used most frequently throughout the Bill of Rights in regards to the government are “no,” “not” and “nor.”

    Compare the following list of “don’ts” the government is prohibited from doing with the growing list of abuses to which “we the people” are subjected on a daily basis, and you will find that we have reached a state of crisis wherein the government is routinely breaking the law and violating its contractual obligations.

    For instance, the government is NOT allowed to restrict free speech, press, assembly or the citizenry’s ability to protest and correct government wrongdoing. Nevertheless, the government continues to prosecute whistleblowers, persecute journalists, cage protesters, criminalize expressive activities, crack down on large gatherings of citizens mobilizing to voice their discontent with government policies, and insulate itself and its agents from any charges of wrongdoing (or what the courts refer to as “qualified immunity”).

     

    The government may NOT infringe on a citizen’s right to defend himself. Nevertheless, in many states, it’s against the law to carry a concealed weapon (gun, knife or even pepper spray), and the average citizen is permitted little self-defense against militarized police officers who shoot first and ask questions later.

     

    The government may NOT enter or occupy a citizen’s house without his consent (the quartering of soldiers). Nevertheless, government soldiers (i.e., militarized police) carry out more than 80,000 no-knock raids on private homes every year, while maiming children, killing dogs and shooting citizens.

     

    The government may NOT carry out unreasonable searches and seizures on the citizenry or their possessions. NOR can government officials issue warrants without some evidence of wrongdoing (probable cause). Unfortunately, what is unreasonable to the average American is completely reasonable to a government agent, for whom the ends justify the means. In such a climate, we have no protection against roadside strip searches, blood draws, DNA collection, SWAT team raids, surveillance or any other privacy-stripping indignity to which the government chooses to subject us.

     

    The government is NOT to deprive anyone of life, liberty or property without due process. Nevertheless, the government continues to incarcerate tens of thousands of Americans whose greatest crime is being poor and brown-skinned. The same goes for those who are put to death, some erroneously, by a system weighted in favor of class and wealth.

     

    The government may NOT take private property for public use without just compensation. Nevertheless, under the guise of the “greater public interest,” the government often hides behind eminent domain laws in order to allow megacorporations to tear down homes occupied by less prosperous citizens in order to build high-priced resorts and shopping malls.

     

    Government agents may NOT force a citizen to testify against himself. Yet what is the government’s extensive surveillance network that spies on all of our communications but a thinly veiled attempt at using our own words against us?

     

    The government is NOT allowed to impose excessive fines on the citizenry or inflict cruel and unusual punishments upon them. Nevertheless Americans are subjected to egregious fines and outrageous punishments for minor traffic violations, student tardiness and absence from school, and generally having the misfortune of being warm bodies capable of filling privatized, profit-driven jails.

     

    The government is NOT permitted to claim any powers that are not expressly granted to them by the Constitution. This prohibition has become downright laughable as the government continues to claim for itself every authority that serves to swell its coffers, cement its dominion, and expand its reach.

    Despite what some special interest groups have suggested to the contrary, the problems we’re experiencing today did not arise because the Constitution has outlived its usefulness or become irrelevant, nor will they be solved by a convention of states or a ratification of the Constitution.

    No, as I document in my new book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the problem goes far deeper. It can be traced back to the point at which “we the people” were overthrown as the center of the government. As a result, our supremacy has been undone, our authority undermined, and our experiment in democratic self-governance left in ruins. No longer are we the rulers of this land. We have long since been deposed and dethroned, replaced by corporate figureheads with no regard for our sovereignty, no thought for our happiness, and no respect for our rights.

    In other words, without our say-so and lacking any mandate, the point of view of the Constitution has been shifted from “we the people” to “we the government.” Our taxpayer-funded employees—our appointed servants—have stopped looking upon us as their superiors and started viewing as their inferiors. Unfortunately, we’ve gotten so used to being dictated to by government agents, bureaucrats and militarized police alike that we’ve forgotten that WE are supposed to be the ones calling the shots and determining what is just, reasonable and necessary.

    Then again, we’re not the only ones guilty of forgetting that the government was established to serve us as well as obey us. Every branch of government, from the Executive to the Judicial and Legislative, seems to be suffering this same form of amnesia. Certainly, when government programs are interpreted from the government’s point of view (i.e., the courts and legislatures), there is little the government CANNOT do in its quest for power and control.

    We’ve been so brainwashed and indoctrinated into believing that the government is actually looking out for our best interests, when in fact the only compelling interesting driving government programs is maintain power and control by taking away our money and control. This vital truth, that the government exists for our benefit and operates at our behest, seems to have been lost in translation over two centuries dominated by government expansion, endless wars and centralized federal power.

    Have you ever wondered why the Constitution begins with those three words “we the people”? It was intended to be a powerful reminder that everything flows from the citizenry. We the people are the center of the government and the source of its power. That “we” is crucial because it reminds us that there is power and safety in numbers, provided we stand united. We can accomplish nothing alone.

    This is the underlying lesson of the Constitution, which outlines the duties and responsibilities of government. It was a mutual agreement formed by early Americans in order to ensure that when problems arose, they could address them together.

    It’s like the wagon trains of the Old West, comprised of individual groups of pioneers. They rarely ventured out alone but instead traveled as convoys. And when faced with a threat, these early Americans formed their wagons into a tight circle in order to defend against invaders. In doing so, they presented a unified front and provided protection against an outside attack. In much the same way, the Constitution was intended to work as an institutionalized version of the wagon circle, serving as a communal shield against those who would harm us.

    Unfortunately, we have been ousted from that protected circle, left to fend for ourselves in the wilderness that is the American frontier today. Those who did the ousting—the courts, the politicians, and the corporations—have since replaced us with yes-men, shills who dance to the tune of an elite ruling class. In doing so, they have set themselves as the central source of power and the arbiters of what is just and reasonable.

    Once again we’re forced to navigate hostile terrain, unsure of how to protect ourselves and our loved ones from militarized police, weaponized drones, fusion centers, Stingray devices, SWAT team raids, the ongoing military drills on American soil, the government stockpiling of ammunition, the erection of mass detention centers across the country, and all other manner of abuses.

    Read the smoke signals, and the warning is clear: It’s time to circle the wagons, folks. The government is on the warpath, and if we are to have any hope of surviving whatever is coming at us, we’ll need to keep our wits about us and present a unified front. Most of all, we need to restore “we the people” to our rightful place at the center of government. How we do that depends largely on each community’s willingness to get past their partisan politics and blind allegiance to uniformed government officials and find common ground.

    To put it a little more bluntly, stop thinking like mindless government robots and start acting like a powerhouse of citizens vested with the power to say “enough is enough.” We have the numbers to stand our ground. Now we just need the will



  • It's Official: The BoJ Has Broken The Japanese Stock Market

    As those who follow such things are no doubt aware, The Bank of Japan often says some very funny things about inflation expectations and monetary policy. Essentially, the bank is forced to constantly defend its QE program because as it turns out, monetizing the entirety of gross JGB issuance and amassing an equity portfolio worth just shy of $100 billion on the way to cornering the ETF market comes across as insanely irresponsible even in a world that is now defined by insanely irresponsible central banks.

    Perhaps the best example of the BoJ’s absurd rhetoric came in late March when Governor Haruhiko Kuroda said the following about the bank’s 10 trillion yen equity portfolio:

    • KURODA: BOJ’S ETF PURCHASES AREN’T LARGE

    As we noted at the time, either we don’t know what large means, or Kuroda is simply making things up as he goes along. Meanwhile, the BoJ continues to provide Nikkei plunge protection on an almost daily basis. Here’s what we said in March:

    The world has now officially given up any pretensions that Japan’s elephantine QE program isn’t underwriting the rally in Japanese stocks. Not only is the Bank of Japan buying ETFs, they’re targeting their purchases to (literally) ensure that stocks can’t fall by stepping in when things look weak at the open. Unfortunately, Kuroda looks set to run up against the extremely inconvenient fact that while, in his lunacy, he can print a theoretically unlimited amount of money, the universe of purchasable ETFs is limited and so eventually, the BoJ will own the entire market.

    As recent gyrations in Bund, Treasury, and JGB markets have made abundantly clear, when central banks corner markets, liquidity suffers and the seeds for sudden spikes in volatility are  sown. Given this, and given what we know about the BoJ’s equity buying binge, we were not surprised to learn that now, Kuroda has not only broken the JGB market but the Japanese the stock market as well. Here’s more from Nikkei:

    The Bank of Japan’s massive purchases of exchange-traded funds, part of its monetary easing program, could be contributing to sharp stock price swings by draining liquidity from the market…

     

    Though the ETF-buying program had altered the balance by reducing supply, market players are noticing side effects.

     

    Lately, “orders for some stocks have fallen, so it’s gotten harder to complete trades,” observed Kyoya Okazawa at BNP Paribas Securities (Japan).

     

    Fanuc offers one example. The issue’s volatility relative to the Nikkei average on a 25-day moving average basis bottomed out around spring 2013 and has been on an uptrend since. Coincidentally, the BOJ announced its unprecedented easing program in April 2013. The central bank’s ETF purchases may have reduced liquidity, leading to sharper price movements.

     

    Fanuc’s 1.27% climb Tuesday was well above the Nikkei average’s 0.02% increase. Its recent price movements probably have been influenced by growing momentum fueled by the company’s plans to boost shareholder returns.

    And here’s a bit of color which explains just how large Kuroda’s “not large” purchases are:

    The bank has bought ETFs 32 times so far in 2015. This translates to about once per 2.7 days, compared with 4.3 days in 2013 before the easing began and 11.3 days in 2012 under former Gov. Masaaki Shirakawa. The average amount per purchase also roughly doubled to around 35 billion yen this year from just over 17 billion yen in 2014.

     

    To put the BOJ’s moves into perspective, if a new stock fund raised 35 billion yen, it would be the talk of the market. The central bank is making such purchases once every three days.

    Finally, for those wondering whether the bank is still timing its purchases to prop up the market at the first sign of weakness, here is your answer:

    The Nikkei Stock Average closed slightly higher Tuesday. Selling prevailed in the morning on weakness in U.S. and European stocks the previous day, but the benchmark index trimmed its losses in the afternoon and moved into positive territory shortly before the closing bell.

     

    After the Nikkei average briefly dropped more than 150 points to fall below 19,500, many market players were certain the BOJ would step in. And after trading closed, the central bank said it had bought 36.1 billion yen ($297 million) in ETFs. These developments signal a growing sense of dependence on the BOJ.

    There you have it. The BoJ has officially broken the stock market. The truly alarming part of Kuroda’s endeavor is that the larger the BoJ’s equity portfolio becomes, the more resolute the bank will need to be in terms of preventing stocks from falling because after all, you can’t designate your stock portfolio as “held to maturity.”

    We believe the following clip does a nice job of summing up how the BoJ sees its QE program vis-a-vis other central banks:

     



  • Collectivists Hate Individuality, Tribalism, And 'Fast And Furious 7'?

    Submitted by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    Sometimes in the liberty movement — with discussions of potential collapse, war, revolution, social destabilization, etc. — it is easy to get so caught up in the peripheral conflict between the elites and the citizenry that we forget what the whole thing is really about. That is to say, we tend to overlook the very core of the conflict that is shaping our epoch.

    Some would say that it is a simple matter of good versus evil. I don’t necessarily disagree, but good and evil are not defined methodologies; rather, they are inherent archetypes — facts born in the minds and hearts of all men. It’s a gift of comprehension from something greater than ourselves. They are felt, rather than defined, and attempts by institutions (religious, scientific, legal or otherwise) to force morality away from intuitive reason and into a realm of artificial hierarchical and mathematical standards tend to lead only to even more imbalance, destruction, innocent deaths and general immorality.

    There have been many nightmare regimes throughout history that have claimed to understand and obey moral “laws” and standards while at the same time having no personal or spiritual connection to those standards. In other words, some of the most heinous acts of immorality are often stamped with the approval of supposedly moral social and governmental institutions.

    This is why a person who calls himself a moral Christian, a moral Muslim, a moral atheist, a moral legislator, a moral conservative, a moral liberal, a moral social justice warrior, etc. is not necessarily a person who ultimately acts with moral conviction. It is not enough for one to memorize and follow the code of a belief system or legal system blindly. One must also understand the tenets of inborn natural law and of the human soul that make those codes meaningful (if they have retained any meaning), or he will eventually fall prey to the vicious calamities of dogma and the collective shadow.

    If I were to examine the core methodologies that are at odds in our society today, I would have to say that the whole fight comes down not only to good versus evil, but to collectivism versus individualism. The same demands of understanding also apply to this dichotomy.

    Nearly all human beings naturally gravitate toward social structures. This is not under debate. The best of us seek to work with others for the betterment of our own position in terms of survival and success, but also the betterment of our species as a whole, if possible. Beyond this, people often find solace and a sense of epiphany when discovering connections to others; the act of recognition and shared experience that is in itself a religious experience. This is what I would call “community,” as opposed to “collectivism.”

    Collectivism is a bastardization and manipulation of the inherent desire most people have to build connections to those around them. It takes the concept of community to the extreme end of the spectrum, and in the process, removes all that was originally good about it. In a collectivist system, individualism becomes a threat and a detriment to the functionality of society. In a community, individualism is seen as a valuable resource that brings a diversity of ideas, skills and unique views, making the group stronger. Collectivism believes the hive mind is more efficient. Community believes voluntary action and individual achievement makes society healthier in the long run.

    Our culture in general today is being bombarded with messages that aggrandize collectivism and stigmatize community and individualism. This is not by mere chance; it is in fact a program of indoctrination. I came across a rather strange and in some ways hilarious example of this while sifting through the propaganda platform known as Reuters.

    As most liberty movement activists are well aware, Reuters is a longtime haven for Fabian socialists who despise honest reporting (to them media is a means of controlling the populace, not informing it) and who consistently inject concepts of collectivist (i.e., globalist) ideology into their articles.

    The Reuters opinion piece linked here and written by Lynn Stuart Parramore presents itself as a kind of social examination of film and its reflection of the decline of American civilization. Rather oddly, the film chosen as a litmus test was “Fast And Furious 7.” Yes, that’s right. The “Fast and Furious” franchise apparently contains social commentary so disturbing to Reuters’ contributing “cultural theorists” that they felt compelled to write a short thesis on it.

    First, I would like to point out that when I first read the article the original title was “‘Fast decline of postwar America & furious desire to cling to ‘family.’”

    It appears that Reuters has since “amended” the title to stand out a little less as a collectivist expose. Just to be clear, I have no interest in discussing the content of the “Furious 7″ film. My commentary will focus not on the film but on Reuters’ commentary regarding the film…if that makes sense to you.

    So what about the newest Furious film has the collectivists so concerned? As the article states, “something alarming lurks at the heart of ‘Furious 7.'” The film’s depiction of America as an economically wounded nation in which good men cannot find a means to make an honest and adequate living doesn’t seem to bother them as much as the response of the main characters to such circumstances. The article almost revels in the postwar degradation of American living standards, outlining how fiscal decline has led to the disruption of the American family and posits that the golden era of the 1950’s economic boom is a relic, erased by the rise of a severe “haves and have-nots” division in the American class sphere. This is, of course, a decidedly simplistic view that appeals more to Marxists than to anyone with true knowledge of the breakdown of the U.S.

    Reuters takes issue with “Furious 7″ because of what it refers to as the “1950’s fantasy” narrative it clings to, in which the heroes long for a return to the middle-class dream, turning away from the corrupt structure of the system and reverting to the “tribalism” of families and posses. The “myth of the posse,” they state, “ignores the interconnectedness of the broader society” and “the idea of a common culture of citizenship recedes into the background, as does faith in a society based on shared principles of justice.”

    I find this conclusion rather fascinating in its collectivist bias. We are led to believe by Parramore’s article that it is the “Ayn Randian” code of contemporary economics and market efficiency that has led America astray. To put it simply, the free market did this to us.

    This is the great lie promoted ad nauseam by collectivists today — collectivists who would like to divert blame for economic failure on more individualistic market ideals. The reality is that America has NOT supported free market methods for at least a century. The advent of parasitic central banking as an economic core in the Federal Reserve and constant government intervention and regulation that have only destroyed small business rather than kept large businesses in check has caused the very negative financial environment that Parramore at least recognizes as the source of our ills. Corporations themselves exist only because of government regulatory license, after all, but you won’t ever catch Reuters criticizing that.

    It was collectivism and the rise of the statist model that bled America dry, not free-market methods that have not existed in this country for more than 100 years. The delusion that free markets are the problem was the same delusion that helped bring down Occupy Wall Street; the movement failed in part because its foundational philosophy was built on disinformation that rang false with otherwise sympathetic people.

    So an action movie presents a competing model to collectivism, because collectivism has always been the problem, despite what Reuters has to say. That model is a return to classic human community in the form of family and “tribalism” where regular individuals matter, a point the Reuters article subtly mocks as a “fantasy.” But here we find the collectivists using the kind of rhetoric one would come to expect from social Marxists. The article continues:

    "When the personal posse replaces civic spirit, and the us-against-them mentality prevails, monsters can breed…"

     

    "This is what is now happening in many corners of the world, where neglected groups have formed posses positively bloodthirsty in their quest to assert that they matter on the global stage to show they are not just victims of a rigged game…"

    I’m not exactly sure what “bloodthirsty groups” Parramore is referring to as “posses,” but I suspect this is a reference to the rise of ISIS, among others. And here we find the Fabian socialist-style propaganda at play.

    You see, the Fabian ideology is the driving force behind globalization — the same globalization that triggered the vast downward slide in American prosperity; the same globalization that has generated anger and dissension among the downtrodden and poverty-stricken; the same globalization that has created artificial economic interdependency among nations and the domino effect of fiscal crisis around the globe; and the same globalization that has led to the predominance of covert agencies, covert agencies which have been funding “bloodthirsty posses” like ISIS for decades. And the source philosophy behind globalization has always been collectivism — the “interconnectedness of broader society” that Parramore proclaims as lost in the pages of the “Furious 7″ screenplay.

    Parramore ends with a stark warning to us all:

    "… a return to tribal instincts and the letting go of the broader common bonds and the welfare of the greater human family has a dark side. It is ultimately a dangerous road to travel."

    Those of us who support the idea of localized community (i.e., tribalism) and the value of the individual over the arbitrary collective are, supposedly, playing with fire; and we should be scared, very scared. We would not want to be labeled as “bloodthirsty monsters” hell-bent on disturbing the tranquility of the “greater human family.” Oh, boy.

    When I read this kind of agenda-based garbage, I am reminded of the insanity of slightly more open social Marxists, such as feminists, who have through dishonorable tactics conjured an atmosphere of collective and legal pressure designed not to present a better argument, but to make all opposing arguments a sin against the group. That is to say, social Marxists do not have a better argument, so their only option is to make rational counterarguments socially taboo or even illegal.

    If you want to know where social Marxism (collectivism) is headed, this is it: the labeling of individualistic philosophies as dangerous thought crimes and tribal communities as time bombs waiting to explode in the face of the wider global village. They desperately hope to conquer the world by dictating not only national boundaries and civil liberties, but the very moral code by which society and individuals function. They wish to bypass natural law with fear, fear that the collective will find you abhorrent and barbaric if you do not believe exactly as they believe. Individualism will one day be the new misogyny.

    Think of it this way: If an undoubtedly forgettable movie like “Furious 7″ can’t even portray a fictional step away from the abyss of collectivist cultism without a prophecy of doom from Reuters, then is anyone really safe from these lunatics?

     



  • China Goes "Unconventional" In Effort To Tackle Trillions In Debt, Rescue Economy

    Two months ago we first explained why Chinese QE may be inevitable. The Cliff’s Notes version goes like this: Beijing needs to prop up its export-driven economy by devaluing the dollar-linked yuan but that’s a risky move primarily because the country has seen $300 billion in capital outflows over the past four quarters and also because China doesn’t want to be seen as a currency manipulator ahead of an IMF SDR bid.

    Conveniently (if you’re a central bank looking to adopt unconventional monetary policy tools), China’s local governments are set to embark on a multi-trillion yuan refi effort aimed at bringing the servicing costs of their mountainous debt pile under control.

    The idea is to swap the existing high-interest loans — which are a consequence of localities skirting debt issuance limits by tapping shadow banking conduits for cash — for standard muni bonds which will carry yields that are more inline with the supposed credit-worthiness of the issuer. This all sounded great on paper, but when the provincial early adopters tested the waters they discovered that bank demand for the new bonds was tepid, leaving the PBoC with two options: 1) buy the bonds outright, 2) create demand by allowing banks who purchases the bonds to pledge them for long-term cash loans. Option number one would simply constitute Chinese QE, while option number two is akin to ECB LTROs and in either case, it gives the PBoC an excuse to implement a large-scale easing program and in the case of the latter option, the hope is that banks will use the cash to lend to the broader economy thus kickstarting growth. Here’s a bit of color via SocGen (note the projected size of the program):

    The PBoC can do something similar to the ECB’s LTRO or TLTRO, accepting LGBs as collaterals for lending to commercial banks. The PBoC has introduced a tool of such design: Pledged Supplementary Lending (PSL). This structure will provide incentives for commercial banks to load up on LGBs. The mechanism looks like this: commercial banks retire their loans to local government financing vehicles (LGFVs) that earns 6%, buy LGBs with 3-4% yield, go to the central bank and ask for long term credit at 2-3%, and then lend out to corporates at 6%. Hence, banks can earn 1-2ppt more with such a programme than otherwise.

    If we are right about PBoC’s intention of helping local government debt restructuring, the total size of this programme may match the total size of local government’s debt stock at the moment. Considering that issuance for the fiscal spending in the coming years may also need some help on attracting demand, we would not be surprised by an eventual size of CNY20tn.

    It could take five years or more, depending on the development of the bond market. The hope is that over time more investors will be interested in LGBs for asset allocation or other reasons. Some foreign institutional investors may already be interested if they have access. The idea is for the PBoC to give a jump-start to the LGB market, instead of dominating the market. Therefore, we do not think that the PBoC will commit itself to a targeted size or a fixed pace, unlike the Feb or the ECB. At best, it may announce a maximum volume year by year, and this year it is likely to be CNY2tn – somewhat bigger than the planned amount of new LGB issuance of CNY1.5tn. 

    The impact of this program shouldn’t be underestimated. Between the initial CNY1 trillion in new local government bonds issued as part of the bond swap initiative and another CNY600 billion in new supply needed to fund budget deficits, local government debt issuance is set to quadruple in 2015 compared to last year, meaning, as SocGen notes above, the PBoC will need to help create demand. Here’s a look at past issuance which should provide a bit of perspective on the relative size of 2015 supply:


    As of Monday, this program became official, meaning that LTROs (which can perhaps be described as a QE trial balloon) are now a reality in China. 

    Via WSJ:

    China is launching a broad stimulus to help local governments restructure trillions of dollars in debts while prodding banks to lend more, as fresh data add to signs of a worsening slowdown in the world’s second-largest economy.

     

    In a directive marked “extra urgent,” China’s Finance Ministry, central bank and top banking regulator laid out a package of measures to jump-start one of the government’s most-important economic-rescue initiatives: a debt-for-bond swap program aimed at giving provinces and cities some breathing room in repaying debts.

     

    Central to the directive, which was issued earlier this week to governments across the country and reviewed by The Wall Street Journal, is a plan by the People’s Bank of China that will let commercial banks use local-government bailout bonds they purchase as collateral for low-cost loans from the central bank. The goal is to provide Chinese banks with more funds to make new loans.

     

    In response to the new directive, the prosperous eastern province of Jiangsu this week relaunched a sale of bonds that package the debt of its local governments but that it delayed last month because banks hesitated to buy them…

     

    “The central bank is using this opportunity to provide cheap funding to commercial banks and guide down interest rates,” said China economist Zhu Chaoping at UOB Kay Hian Holdings Ltd., a Singapore-based investment bank. “This will have similar effects as quantitative easing,” Mr. Zhu said, referring to the bond-buying programs used by the U.S. and European central banks to spur economic growth.

    Helping the country’s struggling local governments crawl out from under a debt burden that totals 35% GDP and jumpstarting the economy via stepped up lending aren’t the only reasons the program is necessary. Beijing’s currency conundrum has caused the PBoC to rely increasingly on policy rates to stimulate the economy and with two RRR cuts and two benchmark lending rate cuts already in the books and at least three more cuts expected this year, it was becoming quite clear that something else was needed given that economic growth is still decelerating and real interest rates are still elevated:

    Here’s WSJ again:

    Officials at the central bank have in recent days denied the need to resort to unconventional monetary tools, saying, for example, that interest rates can be further cut, as they were Sunday for the third time in six months. But signs abound that the economy is behaving more sluggishly than the government and economists have expected and that officials are casting about for solutions.

     

    Data released Wednesday show investment in factories, buildings and other fixed assetsrose 12% in the first four months this year from a year earlier, the slowest pace since December 2000. The bigger-than-expected drop was driven by anemic investment in property, which has been a drag on the economy. Meanwhile, factory output and retail sales in April also came in below expectations.

     

    The steeper slowdown is forcing policy makers to devise more aggressive measures to prop up growth, if Beijing is going to reach its already-lowered annual growth target—set at 7% for this year, the lowest level in a quarter century.

    With that, China has officially entered the realm of “unconventional” monetary policy, joining the Fed, the ECB, the BoJ, and a whole host of other global central banks in an attempt to bring the supposedly all-mighty printing press and the unlimited balance sheet that goes with it to bear on subpar economic growth. We suspect the results will be characteristically underwhelming (at least in terms of lowering real interest rates, although in terms of boosting risk assets, the results may be outstanding) meaning it’s likely only a matter of time before LTRO becomes QE in China just as it did in Europe.



  • Caught On Tape: Moment Of Deadly Amtrak Train Crash

    Amtrak Regional 188, with over 200 passengers aboard, was traveling at 106 mph just before "the entire train derailed" in Philadelphia, federal investigators said Wednesday, according to NBC News, more than twice the speed limit at the curve where it hurtled off the tracks. With the death toll now raised to seven, and officials still unable to account for everyone on board, Philadelphia Mayor Michael Nutter exclaimed, "I don't believe that anyone standing here today has any memory of a derailment of this kind in 50 years," and judging by the following clip – we are stunned the fatality count was so low.

     

    The locomotive and all seven passenger cars of the train went off the tracks at a tight curve at Frankford Junction, just northeast of center city Philadelphia. As The Wall Street Journal details, multiple cars overturned, severely injuring some passengers and pinning others.

     

    At least seven were killed, and more than 200 passengers were injured, including eight who were in critical condition Wednesday afternoon. The seven dead comprised four people whose bodies were found inside the train, two who were found outside and one who died at a hospital, police Lt. John Walker told NBC Philadelphia.

    The northbound train was carrying 238 passengers and five crew members when it derailed about 9:30 p.m. Tuesday on its way to New York.

     

    The National Transportation Safety Board, the main federal agency investigating the derailment, said preliminary data put the train’s speed above 100 miles an hour.

     

    According to the Federal Railroad Administration, the speed limit drops from 80 mph to 50 mph at the curve where the train derailed. But the train was hurtling along at 106 mph when the engineer slammed the emergency brake — slowing the train only to 102 mph when its recorders stopped recording data, said Robert Sumwalt, a member of the National Transportation Safety Board.

    At that point, "the entire train derailed," Sumwalt said.

    Dozens of people were still being treated in Philadelphia hospitals with injuries ranging from cuts and broken bones to head trauma.

    Chief Medical Officer Herbert Cushing said Temple University Hospital, where many of the most seriously injured were being treated, had eight patients in critical condition, who he said "are going to do just fine."

     

    "Almost everyone has rib fractures," Cushing said, which indicates that "they rattled around in the train car a lot."

     

    All of the patients at Temple are adults ranging in age from their early 20s to their 80s, Cushing said. Patients from Spain, Belgium, Germany, India and Albania are among those involved.

     

    The engineer of the train was also injured and gave a statement to police, Nutter said.

    The derailment damaged all seven cars of the train, including some that were overturned and one that was mangled. Passengers and luggage were tossed around inside, and survivors described having to force doors open or clamber through windows to safety.

    Grainy security footage from a nearby camera captured several flashes of bright light as the train crashed.

    Eye witness accounts are terrifying…

    Andrew Brenner, 29, a public-relations expert who lives in Washington, said he was relaxing and texting in the last car with his shoes off. He said he noticed that the train seemed to be taking a curve rather fast, but it didn’t cause much alarm. Then, the train jolted and swayed. Within moments, Mr. Brenner said he and other passengers were tossed around cars as seats were ripped from the train floor.

     

    “I got thrown like a penny,” said Mr. Brenner, who said he weighs 250 pounds. “That is how violent this was.”

     

    After the crash, Mr. Brenner said he was taken along with other passengers by bus to a hospital, where X-rays showed damage to his vertebrae.

     

    Brooklyn, N.Y., resident Beth Davidz, 35, said she remembered only a hard turn and a jerk. “Then it was just blackness. I was bouncing up and down in blackness,” she said.

     

    Although she tried not to look at the wreckage as she left the train, she noticed the first and second cars looked badly damaged. “I didn’t see anyone getting out,” said Ms. Davidz, a project director with a Philadelphia-based startup.

     

    More than 120 firefighters and 200 police responded to the chaotic scene that included several badly mangled railcars, officials said.

    *  *  *

    US Passenger train injries are on the rise…

     

    Amtrak suspended service between New York and Philadelphia on its Northeast Corridor, the busiest stretch of track in the country for passenger travel. The section of track where the train derailed will have to be rebuilt.

    *  *  *

    The engineer of the derailed Amtrak train has been identified as 32 year old Brandon Bostian…



  • London Housing Bubble Watch: $630/Month For A Bed "In" A Shared Kitchen!

    You know it’s a bubble when… A listing has appeared online advertising a single bed in a house in London where the mattress is located in the kitchen.

    As The Telegraph reports,

    “Please notice is not a room,” the listing on SpareRoom read. “Is a single bed in shared kitchen,” continued landlord Joe.

     

     

    For £400 ($630) a month “you can use your own entrance from the garden, if you wish,” he continued.

     

    The advert claims it is a five to 10 minute bus ride to the station. Although putting the approximate location into Google Maps, as reported by the Independent, also shows that it’s in fact a 27-minute walk away to the nearby overground.

     

    SpareRoom’s “early bird” system means only those with a premium account can get in touch for the first seven days of the listing’s time on the site.

     

    If it’s not a hoax it exemplifies the rising rents in London with tenants unable to to buy a property and a lack of new stock to meet demand.

     

    The advert has now been deleted by “landlord Joe” but was thought by Spareroom to be serious.

    Matt Hutchinson, director of flat and house share site SpareRoom.co.uk, said:

    This is another sign of how bad the housing crisis has become. This isn’t just one of the most bizarre ads we’ve seen, it’s also a huge invasion of privacy. No one should have to sleep in a kitchen, and no one should have to pass through a bedroom to get to a communal area. This ad has been removed.”

    *  *  *
    Welcome to the new normal!

    On the bright-side, it’s great for breakfast in bed…



  • What Peter Schiff Said To Ben Bernanke

    Last week, a photo of the oddest couple in finance, Peter Schiff and Ben Bernanke together “celebrating the economic recovery”, promptly went viral.

     

    As it turns out there was more to the story.

    On his Friday podcast, Peter Schiff told the story of his encounter with Ben Bernanke at the SALT Conference last week where he took the photo above. Peter talks about his close encounter of the Bernanke kind 13:30 into the podcast.

    Below is a transcript of the relevant section:

    “Speaking of a clueless Federal Reserve, I happened to have an encounter the other day with former Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke. Many of you may have seen the picture of me and the former Chairman. We were at a cocktail party, and I posted that picture on my Facebook page…

    “I’ll give you all of the details. So first of all, Ben Bernanke was there to speak at the SALT Conference… He was paid, I believe, somewhere between $200-250,000 to basically hit the soft balls that were lobbed to him by Anthony Scaramucci, who was the host of this conference… At least make the guy do something for $200,000 – let me question him. In any event, he probably wouldn’t agree to that…

    “I was watching from the speaker’s lounge… He walks out, and he’s accompanied by his secretary. He doesn’t have a big entourage… I see him and I come right up to him and I say, ‘Mr. Bernanke.’ I put my hand out and I say, ‘Peter Schiff.’ I can sense from his body language and the way he looked that the name was familiar. I think he knew something about me, but he didn’t necessarily acknowledge it. I think he said something like, ‘Oh sure.’ But I was pretty sure he knew who I was at that point. I wanted to make sure, because I didn’t want to have a conversation under false pretense.

    “So the first thing I said to him, ‘Look, I gotta let you know, full disclosure, I’m probably your biggest critic.’ To which Ben Bernanke replied, ‘Well, you got a lot of competition.’ It’s probably true. There is a lot of competition. There are a lot of people who criticize Ben Bernanke. But I think I am his biggest critic. I’ve been criticizing him for longer than most people, and I certainly do it more often and more loudly.

    “After that brief exchange I said, ‘Do you have a moment to chat? I’d love to talk to you.’ He said, ‘No, I don’t, I really got to go.’ I said, ‘Alright, how about a quick picture then?’ But that was it. He was gone. He was whisked away by his female handler, and I thought, ‘Well that was it. I’m not going to see that guy again.’ He was rushing to deposit his check, right?

    “Later that evening, they have a cocktail party for the speakers. I get to the cocktail party, and who do I see standing there all by himself but Ben Bernanke. I got a drink and then went over to Mr. Bernanke who was still standing by himself, surprisingly. I said, ‘Mr. Bernanke, I thought you had to leave.’ He said, ‘No, I’m still here. I’ve got time for that picture now, if you want to take one. Which I thought was quite nice of him, because he remembered that I wanted a photograph, and he didn’t have time for it. Now he sees me and he asks if I would like to take a photograph…

    “Initially I was thinking what do I do to spice this photograph up? Just a photo of me and Ben Bernanke. What’s the big deal? I thought maybe I should do the rabbit ears behind his head, but I felt kind of awkward doing that considering he had so graciously reminded me that I wanted a photograph and offered to pose with me. I felt that would be inappropriate of me to take advantage of him or make fun of him, so it was just a normal photograph…

    “We got the photograph out of the way. Then I wanted to talk to him. The first thing I wanted to do was I wanted to give him my version of why the economy is so screwed up and why everything in it is wrong. The last thing he wanted to get was a lecture from me, but that’s what I tried to give him. But I tried to give him the Cliff Note version. I did want to ask him some questions, but I wanted to get his reaction to my take.

    “I started talking about the housing bubble and the financial crisis and how the Federal Reserve caused that with its low interest rates. He said that no, it wasn’t that; that the interest rates had nothing to do with it. He first told me that the housing bubble was caused by Fannie and Freddie. At least he’s trying to blame the government. I said, ‘Look, Fannie and Freddie have been around since the 30s. We didn’t have that big housing bubble until the Fed happened to have interest rates at 1%, and then raised them very slowly. That wasn’t a coincidence.’ He said, ‘Well, it was subprime mortgages that did it.’ I said, ‘Subprime mortgages? But do you understand how subprime mortgages worked? They were all adjustable rates, and the most popular feature, what made them so enticing and affordable was the teaser rate. The fact that you can get a low rate of interest for the first few years. That was all because of the Fed. So if you’re going to blame subprime, you’ve got to blame the Fed, because the Fed is what gave life to subprime. It made subprime affordable.’ He also blamed regulation. He said regulation first before he said Fannie and Freddie. I said, ‘Well what regulations are you talking about?’ And he said Fannie and Freddie, which weren’t really regulations, they’re agencies. But he was really trying to lay the blame on the housing bubble on capitalism, because of subprime, and on the government, because of Fannie and Freddie.

    “I said, ‘Wait a minute. If regulation and subprime and Fannie and Freddie – if that’s what caused the housing bubble, why didn’t you warn us about that in advance? Why didn’t you go in 2004, ‘Hey, we got a problem. We got these bad regulations, we got Fannie and Freddie, we got subprime , they’ve created a housing bubble! This is going to be a disaster!’’ He didn’t say any of that. He said the opposite of that. In fact, when he was asked specifically about the housing bubble, he denied that it existed. If it was being caused by the things that he said, why didn’t he warn about it? Because it wasn’t caused by those things…

    “I tried to ask him some questions and that’s when he really wanted to end the conversation. The first question I said, ‘Mr. Bernanke, you’re so sure that you’re right. I don’t know how you can be so sure, because interest rates are still at zero and the Fed’s balance sheet hasn’t shrunk. You said you weren’t monetizing the debt when you talked to Congress. You said the Fed was going to sell the bonds, but none of them have been sold. They’ve all been rolled over. So how are you claiming victory when you haven’t exited? You haven’t raised rates, you haven’t shrunk the balance sheet. You were wrong in the past. You didn’t see the financial crisis coming. You told us there was no housing bubble. You said subprime was contained. So you were certainly wrong then. So how do you know you’re not wrong now? Is there anything that might change your opinion and get you to rethink and maybe admit that your outlook is wrong?’ I forget the exact words.

    “Instead of answering the questions, he just patted me on the shoulder… And just kind of gave me a little smile and that was it. He kind of turned. By then there was a couple other people around us. He started talking to somebody else. It was clear to me that he didn’t want to answer the questions. After all, I’m not paying him $200,000, so why should he answer my questions. I don’t know, maybe he didn’t want to answer them. I didn’t get the sense when I talked to him that he was lying to me. I thought he really believed what he believed. He seemed that way. i’m sure all the praise has gone to his head. He thinks he’s save the world. So he did seem sincere… Who am I? I’m just this guy trying to talk to the former Fed Chairman and tell him what a lousy job he did. He probably doesn’t want to hear that. He wants to talk to somebody who will tell him how great he is. That was the last I talked to him.

    “Later on that day, somebody came up to me… I was on a panel for forty minutes. The first ten minutes were the former Prime Minister of Greece talking to Steve Forbes… The highlight was me arguing with Gene Sperling. That’s where I got all my applause. Gene didn’t get any. He was the former economic advisor to President Obama. He got no applause. I got all of the applause. I even got laughter… I was saying some funny things. Funny, because they were true…

    “This guy comes up to me. He says, ‘I was talking with Ben Bernanke. He was saying some bad things about you.’ So he’s already talking smack behind my back. I don’t blame him. I got no problem with Ben Bernanke saying bad things about Peter Schiff, because I say bad things about him all the time. What’s fair is fair…”



  • America (Summed Up In 1 Strip Mall Sign)

    Something for everyone.

     

    Source: Lonely Libertarian



  • Water Wars Officially Begin In California

    A century of government meddling has turned the issue of water rights on its head, and further centralized control of waterways in local, state, and federal governments; and, as Acuweather reports, with the state of California mired in its fourth year of drought and a mandatory 25% reduction in water usage in place, reports of water theft are becoming increasingly common. With a stunning 46% of the state in 'exceptional' drought, and forecast to worsen, huge amounts of water are 'going missing' from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta and a state investigation was launched. From illegally tapping into hydrants in order to fill up tanks to directly pumping from public canals, California continues to formulate new strategies to preserve as much water as possible and fight the new water wars that are emerging.

    Homeowners in Modesto, California, were fined $1,500, as Accuweather reporrs, for allegedly taking water from a canal. In another instance, thieves in the town of North San Juan stole hundreds of gallons of water from a fire department tank.

    In Madera County, District Attorney David Linn has instituted a water crime task force to combat the growing trend of water theft occurring throughout the state and to protect rightful property owners from having their valuable water stolen.

     

    The task force will combat agriculture crime through education by instructing farmers how to prevent crime before it occurs, Linn said in a news release back in March.

     

    "Since the business of Madera is agriculture, I intend to make its protection a top priority," he said.

     

    Jennifer Allen, spokesperson for the Contra Costa Water District in Concord, about 45 minutes from San Francisco, said it's not uncommon for her agency to receive reports of water theft, but as the drought has continued, she said there has been an uptick in reports.

     

    "I believe during drought times people's sensitivities are certainly raised to any instances of water theft going on and so probably that's where we've been contacted," Allen said. "We would assume that more people are feeling the need to report out anything they've witnessed of somebody stealing water from a hydrant or from a neighbor."

     

    To deter thieves, Allen said the CCWD Board of Directors has increased the fine for first-time offenders from $25 to $250. For any following offenses, the fine goes up to $500.

    Primarily the CCWD has received reports of people illegally tapping into hydrants in order to fill up a tank or another sort of receptacle to store water. Additionally, Allen said that some contractors have targeted water pipes laid for new developments that may not have a meter attached to them or found a way to circumvent the meter.

     

    Other water agencies are ramping up enforcement against water crime as well. The East Bay Municipal Utility District (EBMUD), headquartered in Oakland, has enacted a new ordinance that would allow them to "fine persons for stealing water or making unauthorized use of a public fire hydrant," according to its website. According to the EBMUD, violators would be fined $500 for the first offense and $1,000 for a second violation. But, as AP reported recently, the problems are far bigger (and deeper)…

    As California struggles with a devastating drought, huge amounts of water are mysteriously vanishing from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta — and the prime suspects are farmers whose families have tilled fertile soil there for generations.

     

    A state investigation was launched following complaints from two large agencies that supply water to arid farmland in the Central Valley and to millions of residents as far south as San Diego.

     

    Delta farmers don't deny using as much water as they need. But they say they're not stealing it because their history of living at the water's edge gives them that right. Still, they have been asked to report how much water they're pumping and to prove their legal rights to it.

     

    At issue is California's century-old water rights system that has been based on self-reporting and little oversight, historically giving senior water rights holders the ability to use as much water as they need, even in drought. Gov. Jerry Brown has said that if drought continues this system built into California's legal framework will probably need to be examined.

     

    Delta farmer Rudy Mussi says he has senior water rights, putting him in line ahead of those with lower ranking, or junior, water rights.

     

    "If there's surplus water, hey, I don't mind sharing it," Mussi said. "I don't want anybody with junior water rights leapfrogging my senior water rights just because they have more money and more political clout."

     

    The fight pitting farmer against farmer is playing out in the Delta, the hub of the state's water system.

    *  *  *

    A century of government meddling has turned the issue of water rights on its head, and further centralized control of waterways in local, state, and federal governments. Just as the residents of Los Angeles fought over water with local farmers, the residents of Las Vegas will soon find themselves fighting with surrounding states over what’s left of Lake Mead. None of the power players seem to care that the current population settlements of the southwestern United States cannot last. One day the water will run out. The sooner this reality is confronted, the better.

    Admittedly, the ownership of water and its various bodies is a difficult topic. Rivers and tributaries don’t flow by man’s commands. They can be directed, but never fully controlled. Privatization of water rights would be a good start for restoring sane usage of natural resources. Don’t expect as much to happen though. Government control is far too entrenched in the process to be removed easily.

    *  *  *

    Finally, some context, that old axiom that the earth is 75% water is wrong. In reality, water constitutes only 0.07% of the earth by mass, or 0.4% by volume.

    This is how much we have, depicted graphically:

    As we discussed previously, Water scarcity is, of course, not just a domestic issue. It is far more critical in other parts of the world than in the US. It will decide the fate of people and of nations. Worldwide, we are using potable water way faster than it can be replaced.



  • A Generational Storm Is Coming

    Submitted by Bill Bonner via Bonner & Partners,

    Yesterday, we began our high-minded graduation speech to the Class of 2015.

    We explained how the young graduates were not only the most heavily indebted in history, but also the least likely to be able to pay their debts. Median wages have been going down since these graduates were about five years old … So have economic growth rates.

    Today, we continue the speech no one wants us to give …

     

    You are heirs to claptrap, nonsense, bogus theories, and trillions of dollars in debt. The systems, programs, and institutions your parents set up are mostly worthless scams. Worse, they produce outcomes contrary to their stated goals.

    Welfare programs do not help people escape poverty; they keep them mired in it. Health care programs do not make them healthy; they make them dependent on the drug industry.

    Defense industry spending doesn’t make us safer; it funds drones, bumbling interventions, and assassinations… and it creates more foreign enemies. We end up not only poorer, but also less secure.

    All of those assertions take more time to explain and prove than we have time for now. But here’s a little example that you will appreciate…

     

    25 Years of Poverty

    Under President Johnson, the government set up the Federal Direct Student Loan Program to provide “low-interest loans” (back then, “low” meant 8%) to students.

    Private lenders make the loans, but they receive the full backing of the feds.

    The idea was to help you afford higher education… and earn larger salaries as a result. And with your increased earnings you were supposed to be able to pay off the loan. But at over 11% of outstanding debt, the Student Loan Program now has the highest delinquency rate of all forms of household debt (mortgage loans, auto loans, credit cards).

    And it will probably go much higher… as students take on more debt. Total outstanding student debt is expected to bubble up to $3.3 trillion by 2025. What do you do if you can’t pay? Well, the feds have a solution for you. The trouble is, it turns you into the very thing the program was meant to avoid. Here’s how it works…

    As long as your income is low, you are allowed to make small token payments every month. Keep this up for 300 payments and your debt is considered satisfied, no matter how little you paid. In other words, the Student Loan Program encourages you to live in poverty for a quarter of a century to get rid of your student debt. Most likely, this will be easy for you to do anyway.

     

    living arrangements

    Ideal living arrangements to avoid liability for one’s student debt. You only need 25 years of this …

    First, because most college degrees do little to make you more valuable to employers. Second, because your parents’ rigging of the economy will make it difficult to make any financial progress anyway. The median household income – after you account for inflation – has been falling since the late 1990s. And good jobs are hard to get. There are fewer “breadwinner” jobs today in America than there were in 1999.

    And you can forget about starting your own business. The rate of new start-ups is collapsing. (Remember from last week that the U.S. ranks 46th on the World Bank’s list of the easiest countries in which to start a business.) You can thank your parents for that, too. The system is designed to protect them, their Social Security benefits, their health care, their stock market portfolios, and their businesses. Protect them against what? Against you!

    You are the future. You are the competition. You are the ones who should want to shake things up and tear down the walls of bureaucracy, taxes, paperwork, and regulation that make it so difficult for you to start new businesses, get good jobs and build real wealth.

    You should be talking revolution – overthrowing your parents’ multitrillion-dollar debts and pulling out of their wars on poverty, illiteracy, Iraqis, Afghans… you name it. You need to stop these silly, pointless, and expensive programs so you can have the resources to pay for your own programs and launch your own stupid wars.

    You need to get rid of your parents’ zombies – the millions of unproductive people who get money from the government – so you can afford your own families … your own pet projects … and zombies of your own.

     

    A Suicidal System of Credit

    You need to stop your parents’ suicidal credit-based money system, too. You don’t know about this, do you? Your professors of government, politics, economics, and finance didn’t mention it, did they?

    Well, the system is corrupt and self-destructive. It works only by increasing the amount of debt in the society – including student debt. And it works only until the debt bubble gets so big it blows up. But there’s a logic to it… a sinister logic that turns you into chumps for older generations. Spending on credit favors the existing owners of capital … and people who have existing claims on the government money. Let me explain …

    When the government borrows money it gives the money to a zombie to spend, or it spends it directly. Usually, the money goes to an older person – your parents or grandparents – in some form of social welfare subsidy, pension, job, contract, or support program. When they spend the money, it goes into the coffers of corporations. This increases profits… and share prices. Who owns those corporations? Do you? You don’t? Then who does?

    Your parents and grandparents benefit again. They are the owners of the nation’s financial assets. By increasing credit, they shift real wealth from the future to the present … and from you to them. This is the money you haven’t earned yet.

    I’ll spell it out for you: The government borrows a dollar. It gives the dollar to one of its pet zombies. (It could be a health researcher, a drug addict, or somebody who makes bombs.) The money goes – one way or another – to a corporation, which registers it as a sale.

    If it has a 10% profit margin, 10 cents is recorded as a profit. If it sells at a price-to-earnings ratio of 20 times, its stock price goes up $2. This makes the owner of the stock – it could be one of your parents – $2 richer. (I’m oversimplifying … but you get the point.)

    But the government now owes $1 more. And who’s going to pay it? You are! Your parents and grandparents are retiring… and collecting their Social Security and health care benefits. They think they will be able to sell their stocks, too … and their houses … and have even more money to spend.

     

    Time to Wipe the Slate Clean

    Now, it’s up to you …

    You need to get a job so you can pay for their health care benefits. You need to pay your taxes so they can keep their wars going. You need to buy a house, too, so they can move to Florida and retire. You need to vote for their candidates … work for their companies … and pay their bills.

    This is the test you face. You are arriving in the economy at the tail end of a 60-year credit expansion. Debt has boomed. The economy has boomed. We, your parents, enjoyed an economic expansion that began when we were born and continued, with only short interruptions, until we retired.

    We got out of school with little or no student debt. We could start businesses with fewer impediments. We could borrow money to fund our businesses and our lives. We could hire, fire, switch jobs… buy and sell houses… move from place to place.

    We were freer – and richer – than you will be …

    … unless you can wipe the slate clean of our debts … our foolish wars and dumbbell programs … and our attempts to hold back the future and prevent you from living rich, full, free lives of your own.

    If you don’t rise to this challenge, you will inherit our bills, our regulations, our restrictions, our obligations, our delusions, our prejudices, and our vanities. You will also inherit a financial crisis – worse than the crisis of 2008 – and a long and grinding economic slump.

    The debt expansion of the last 60 years will turn into a dreary debt contraction, possibly dragging the economy into another Great Depression. Either you find a way to shuck off, default on, or inflate away your parents’ debts… or you’ll stagger under the weight of them for the rest of your lives.

    Either you break free from the jackass things your parents have done to you … or you deserve what you get.

    Congratulations, chumps.

     

    student-loan-debt-cartoon1-570x399

     



  • 45% Of US Voters Are Worried The Government Will Use Military Training Exercises For Power Grab

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    As usual, recent mainstream media reporting on the controversy over the Jade Helm 15 military exercises, set to take place over eight weeks across several U.S. states, completely missed the point. Mainstream media focus was primarily about characterizing and demonizing Texans concerned about the exercises as backwater, paranoid rednecks with wild fantasies about an imminent government takeover. While exercises like these will always cause the imagination of some to run amok, the key point here is this: concerns that U.S. military exercises will be used to exert more power over states is not a fringe view.

    In a bizarre contradiction, a new Rasmussen Poll shows that while 65% of U.S. voters favor the U.S. military conducting training exercises in their state, “45% of voters are concerned that the government will use U.S. military training operations to impose greater control over some states, with 19% who are Very Concerned.” Those are very big numbers.

    Even if you ignore the 45% number, 19% are very concerned. That’s tens of millions of Americans who are so distrustful of government they think the U.S. military could be used to subdue states’ rights.

    Personally, I think this is encouraging since the American public should have absolutely no reason whatsoever to trust the status quo due to the string of criminal actions they have taken in the post 9/11 period. So while the mainstream media smugly mocks the crazies in Texas, they fail to admit they have a serious problem which is not getting better. The American public’s trust in government is collapsing. When the next economic downturn hits and a tipping point is reached, distrust will morph quickly into outright dissent across the land.

    From Rasmussen:

    Eight weeks of U.S. military exercises this summer in several southwestern states – dubbed Jade Helm 15 – have some wondering if the government is preparing for martial law. Most voters don’t oppose such exercises, but a surprising number worry about what the federal government is up to.

     

    A new Rasmussen Reports national telephone survey finds that 65% of Likely U.S. Voters favor the U.S. military conducting training exercises in their state. Just 16% are opposed, but slightly more (19%) are undecided. (To see survey question wording, click here.)

     

    But 45% of voters are concerned that the government will use U.S. military training operations to impose greater control over some states, with 19% who are Very Concerned. Just over half (52%) are not concerned that the government has an ulterior motive for the training exercises, including 26% who are Not At All Concerned.

     

    This level of concern is perhaps less surprising given that 62% of Americans believe there is too much government power and too little individual freedom in the United States today.

     

    Just 20% of voters now consider the federal government a protector of individual liberty. Sixty percent (60%) see the government as a threat to individual liberty instead.  Only 19% trust the federal government to do the right thing all or most of the time.

    The only reason these numbers haven’t yet resulted in outright rebellion is because the population that distrusts the government has been so skillfully divided and conquered. See: Charting the American Oligarchy – How 0.01% of the Population Contributes 42% of All Campaign Cash.

    But 56% of conservative voters are concerned that the training exercises will lead to greater federal control over some states. Fifty-eight percent (58%) of moderates and 67% of liberal voters are not concerned.

    I find it very bizarre, and very interesting that “liberals” are least concerned about military exercises in the U.S.



  • America's Class Segregation Problem In 4 Charts

    One surreal night of mass chaos, indiscriminate pillaging, violent street clashes, and widespread arson notwithstanding, race relations in America have generally improved over the last five or so decades. Even as the nation’s focus has shifted back to the issue of racial discrimination on the heels of several high profile incidents of apparent police misconduct, America has at least managed to overcome overt racial segregation and steer generally (but not always) clear of the types of egregious civil rights violations that still existed a century after the Emancipation Proclamation.

    However, one type of segregation that has certainly not disappeared but has instead only grown is class-based segregation. The following four charts demonstrate how the interplay between income and education has served to exacerbate the class divide among America’s youth, curtailing opportunities for the poor in the process.


    Here’s more, from WSJ:

    Even as Americans have become less segregated across racial and religious lines than they were a generation ago, they have grown more segregated along class lines. Americans are much less likely to go to school, live with, or marry people from different socioeconomic backgrounds, Harvard political scientist Robert Putnam says.

     

    “More and more young people aren’t meeting across class lines,” said Mr. Putnam, raising troubling questions about the implications for the next generation of Americans.

     

    The wealthiest parents have spent more than double on their kids what they did a generation ago, even as spending by poorer parents has edged up only slightly..

     

    Mr. Putnam also shows a clear increase in single-parent households for parents who haven’t gone to college. For college-educated parents, the rate of single-parenthood rose until the early 1990s, when it crested and then declined slightly. For those with a high school diploma or less, rates of single-parenthood have climbed without slowing..

     

    Participation in high school sports and other extracurricular activities also signals fraying social bonds. Those activities, Mr. Putnam said, provide important soft skills, such as teamwork, or “what my mother would have called ‘gumption.’”

     

    Most sobering, Mr. Putnam said, are data from a 2000 analysis showing that that a family’s socioeconomic status has become more important than their educational aptitude in predicting whether an eighth-grader would graduate from college.

     *  *  *

    Don’t worry America, we’re sure the “wealth effect” from QE will start to trickle down to the lower tax brackets any day now and when that day comes all your problems will be solved at which point you can write to PIMCO and explain how great of a man their newest adviser is.



  • Former U.S. Government Official: U.S. Is ALREADY at War with China and Russia

    Top economic and political experts say we're drifting towards World War 3. And see this.

    We noted in March that we're already at war with Russia.  Many experts agree …

    Former White House official Dr. Philippa Malmgren – former presidential adviser and member of the U.S. President's Working Group on Financial Markets – said last December that the United States is already at war with China and Russia:

    I was recently at a meeting with a lot of very senior people from the defense community, and their view is that we are already in a nose-to-nose confrontation (war) with China and Russia.  But these (wars) are being conducted through cyberspace rather than through traditional conventional weapons.

    An advisor to the US government – Scott Borg, CEO of US Cyber Consequences Unit – says that the United States has already started launching widespread hostile cyber warfare against Russia, China and Iran.

    Indeed, the U.S. has admitted that it deployed cyber-warfare against Iran's nuclear power plant.

    Paul Craig Roberts – former Assistant Secretary of the Treasury under President Reagan, former editor of the Wall Street Journal, listed by Who’s Who in America as one of the 1,000 most influential political thinkers in the world  – says that U.S. war against Russia has already begun.

    Mark Galeotti – a Full Professor of Global Affairs at the Center for Global Affairs at New York University, and a prominent expert on modern Russia – says "the West and Russia are already at war".

    Ron Paul says that sanctions are an act of war … and we've had sanctions on Russia and Iran for some time now.  And see this.

    And the U.S. is threatening military confrontation in the South China Sea. China is taking the threat seriously.

    Remember, Russia and the U.S. each have enough nuclear weapons to wipe each other out … and American, British, Polish and Russian Experts warn that continued fighting in Ukraine could lead to nuclear war.

    The Pentagon reports that China now had ballistic missiles which can hit nearly the entirety of the U.S. with nuclear warheads.

    Russia and China are in a military alliance, and are conducting joint military exercises.

    China has warned the U.S. to stop its Ukranian proxy war against Russia.

    China and Russia have both said that an attack on Iran – or Syria – will be considered an act of war against the Bear and the Dragon. We're already in Syria trying to overthrow Assad, and we've been supporting terrorists in Iran for many years.

    On the other side of the coin, a former high-level Commander in the German Army warns:

    NATO is formed out of 28 states, if just one of them gets involved into a conflict with Russia, the contract obliges all of them to assist. And out of a sudden we get a third world war. The only way to prevent it is if the people rise and say: Russia had to mourn more than enough victims in WWII, do you really want to start a war again?

    What could possibly go wrong?



  • The History Of Treasury Market Liquidity (And Lack Thereof) In One Chart

    While we completely disagree with Credit Suisse about the reasons for the total collapse in bond market liquidity (as readers know we blame the Fed – as does the TBAC – and HFTs, while Credit Suisse accuses regulations, even though banks now hold a record amount of fungible bonds implying that unless bank prop desks can trade as FDIC-backstopped hedge funds once again it is simply impossible to have a stable, liquid bond market which is idiotic), we agree about one thing – the same thing we warned many years ago would happen: the total evaporation of liquidity in what was once the world’s deepest, most liquid market.

    Case in point:

    Remember, in any market and certainly bonds, volume is not liquidity or depth. Some more thoughts from Credit Suisse:

    Shallower depth at times of higher volatility is at once a symptom and a source of the extreme price moves. Historically, market depth – which we measure as the aggregate bid and ask size for the on-the-run 10y note within 2.5 ticks of best on the other side – has ebbed and flowed with volatility. Surges in volatility typically cause depth to dissipate, whereas stable markets tend to be deeper.

     

    While the core of this inverse depth/volatility relationship has remained in place, the last two years seem to have witnessed somewhat of a break, coinciding more or less with 2013’s taper tantrum. While delivered vol moderated in the aftermath of the mid-2013 selloff, depth has failed to return and at this point appears to have been structurally reduced. Early indications are that this has only become worse in the months since the October 15 “flash rally.” The only period that saw comparably low depth persist over the last four years was amid 2011’s debt ceiling and ratings downgrade in the US and the eurozone crisis (Exhibit 4).

     

     

    One might be tempted to be long volatility to protect against the possibility for extreme price moves as market depth remains challenged. The risk of doing so is that one will bleed carry, however, as we have seen that there may be long periods of relatively stable markets interrupted by unexpected dramatic moves during extreme illiquidity.

    Of course, one may simply be unable to trade out of any profitable volatility hedges if, say, the CME or Nasdaq Options Market decided to close just as the collapse began. Then said “hedges” would be worth precisely, pardon the pun, zero.

    And then there is the most famous example of a sudden and total loss of Treasury liquidity: October 15, 2014. Here is what happened.

    Still fresh in many participants’ minds, October 15 provides a recent illustration of the flighty nature of liquidity and the illusion of market depth. The post-retail sales rate rally that ultimately saw a ~36bp yield range in 10s on the day accelerated as depth disappeared. As some market makers stepped back to avoid being put into significant risk positions, those that continued to provide quotes widened bid/offer spreads, sharply curtailing the depth within a “normal” width of the other side of the market.

     

     

    Volume spiked at the same time just as market depth was truly beginning to collapse. This resulted in an outsized surge in the number of trades, meaning a diminished average transaction size. That there were more, smaller trades concurrent with the rapid yield move underscores the impact that a collapse in depth has on the magnitude and speed of market reactions.

    Finally, whatever the cause, our advice is just to sit back and await the next Treasury flash crash (or smash) because with no change possible, things can and will only get worse.



  • Less 'Goldilocks', More 'Three Bears': Bullion Bid As Stocks & Bonds Skid

    The correlation between stocks and bond yields continues to have regime-shifted to approach -1 (not 1 – as is more 'normal') confounding asset allocators and risk parity funds across the market…

     

    This seemed appropriate…

    If that analogy didn't help, maybe this will clear things up…

     

    Gold and Silver were the big movers today… Gold's highest close in 3 months (3rd biggest day of the year), Silver highest close in 6 weeks (3rd biggest day of the year)

     

    But stocks and bonds continue to be sold…

     

    Leaving Trannies ugly for the week…

     

    After decoupling today once again…hugging the flatline from shjortly after the open…

     

    Futures show the real volatility took place before the open…

     

    On the week, Treasury yields are dramatically higher (thioug below yesterday's peaks) though we note the significant title in the curve with 2Y -2bps, and 30Y +6bps…

     

    Which sent curves soaring…

     

    The USDollar legged notably lower on the poor retail sales data extending its losses to over 1.1% for the week… (worst day for the USD since 3/20)

     

    JPY had its strongest day (carry unwinds continue) in 2 months…

    Here's why… (via none other than Gartman)

    To end our discussion of the forex markets, we think it is time to return to an old friend: long of the English speaking currencies/short of the Yen and we shall do so en masse this morning, buying the US, the Canadian, the Aussie and the Kiwi dollars against the Yen upon receipt of this commentary. We shall have stops on the trades individually in tomorrow’s TGL, but we’ll give them 2% against us as an initial stop point.

    Commodities very mixed with oil down,copper flat…

     

    With crude pumped after another draw but dumped after production rose once again…

     

    *  *  *

    Gold and silver had quite a day – pushing the former above stocks YTD and the latter best for the year…

     

    and bonds are having their worst year since 2009…

     

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

    Bonus Chart: ETSY! bwuahahah…. From $35.74 highs, down 45% now to today's low of $19.50 (on its way to the $16 IPO price)

     



  • ETF Issuers Quietly Prepare For "Market Meltdown" With Billions In Emergency Liquidity

    Between the dramatic sell-off in German Bunds that unfolded over the course of three weeks beginning on April 21 and the erratic trading that ensued on Tuesday following the weakest JGB auction since 2009, the chickens, as they say, have come home to roost in government bond markets where thanks the ECB, the Fed, and the BoJ’s efforts to monetize anything that isn’t tied down, the market has become hopelessly thin. 

    As we’ve documented exhaustively — and as every pundit and Wall Street CEO is now suddenly screaming about — the secondary market for corporate credit faces a similar dearth of liquidity and at just the wrong time. Issuance is at record levels and money is pouring into IG and HY thanks to CB-induced herding (i.e. quest for yield) and record low borrowing costs (again courtesy of central planners), but thanks to the new regulatory regime which ostensibly aims to curtail systemic risk by cutting out prop trading, banks are no longer willing to warehouse corporate bonds (i.e. dealer inventories have collapsed), meaning that in a rout, investors will be selling into a thin market. The result will be a firesale.

    So while policymakers are still willfully ignorant when it comes to honestly assessing the effect their actions are having on government bond markets, the entire financial universe seems to have recently become acutely aware of the potentially catastrophic conditions prevailing in corporate credit. These concerns have now officially moved beyond the realm of lip service and into the realm of disaster preparedness because as Reuters reports, some of the country’s largest ETF providers are arranging billion dollar credit lines that can be tapped to keep illiquidity from turning an ETF sell-off into a credit market meltdown:

    The biggest providers of exchange-traded funds, which have been funneling billions of investor dollars into some little-traded corners of the bond market, are bolstering bank credit lines for cash to tap in the event of a market meltdown.

     

    Vanguard Group, Guggenheim Investments and First Trust are among U.S. fund companies that have lined up new bank guarantees or expanded ones they already had, recent company filings show.

    The measures come as the Federal Reserve and other U.S. regulators express concern about the ability of fund managers to withstand a wave of investor redemptions in the event of another financial crisis.

     

    They have pointed particularly to fixed-income ETFs, which tend to track less liquid markets such as high yield corporate bonds or bank loans.

     

    “You want to have measures in place in case there are high volumes of redemption so you can meet those redemptions without severely impacting the liquidity of the underlying securities,” said Ryan Issakainen, exchange-traded fund strategist at First Trust…

     

    Under the Wall Street reform act known as Dodd-Frank, banks have been shedding their bond inventories, resulting in less liquidity in fixed-income markets. Because there are fewer bonds available for trading, a huge selloff in the bond markets could worsen the effect of a liquidity mismatch in bond ETFs.

     

    Vanguard, the second-largest U.S. ETF provider, lined up its first committed bank line of credit last year and now has a $2.89 billion facility backed by multiple banks and accessible to all of Vanguard’s funds, covering some $3 trillion in assets, the Pennsylvania-based fund company told Reuters. The new setup is to “make sure that funds will be available in time of market stress when the banks themselves may have liquidity concerns,” Vanguard said.

    Essentially, ETF providers are worried that in a pinch (i.e. when ETF sellers outnumber ETF buyers), they will be forced to liquidate assets into structurally thin markets at fire sale prices in order to meet redemptions, triggering a collapse in the underlying securities (like HY bonds). In the pre-crisis days, this would have been mitigated by banks’ willingness to purchase what the ETF providers are looking to sell, but in the post-Dodd-Frank world this isn’t the case so the idea now is that bank credit lines will essentially allow the ETF providers to become their own dealers, meeting redemptions with borrowed cash while warehousing assets and praying waiting for a more opportune time to sell. 

    In case it isn’t clear enough from the above that ZIRP is in large part responsible for this, consider the following:

    “These funds offer daily or even intraday liquidity to investors while holding assets that are hard to sell immediately, thus making the funds vulnerable to liquidity risk,” U.S. Federal Reserve Vice Chair Stanley Fischer said in a speech in March in Germany, pointing directly to ETFs and saying they have mushroomed in size while tracking indexes of “relatively illiquid” assets.

     

    That is all exacerbated because investors have been pouring money into bond ETFs, while banks, under regulatory pressure to limit their own holdings, have been slashing their bond inventories.

     

    Growth in fixed-income ETFs also means there are now more products tied to corners of the bond market previously untapped by ETFs. Assets in U.S.-listed fixed-income ETFs are up nearly six-fold since 2008, to $335.7 billion at the end of April, according to Thomson Reuters Lipper data.

    And why, one might ask, are investors suddenly interested in exploring “corners” of the bond market where they had previously never dared to tread thus creating demand for ever more esoteric ETF products? Because when risk-free assets are at best yielding an inflation-adjusted zero and at worst have a negative carry, investors are forced into credits they would have never considered before just so they can squeeze out some semblance of yield without simply dumping everything into equities. 

    Of course liquidity protection comes at a cost:

    Banks facing their own reserve requirements against these lines are charging commitment fees that can range from 0.06 percent to 0.15 percent, according to company filings. If a line is actually drawn upon, there would be additional interest charged on any amount borrowed. In many cases, these costs are included in the ETF’s annual expense ratio, and borne by the funds’ investors.

    To recap: central banks have created a hunt for yield that’s driven investors into fixed income categories they wouldn’t have normally considered, creating demand for ever more esoteric ETF products. Thanks to curtailed prop trading, the market for the underlying assets is even thinner than it would have otherwise been, meaning fund managers would be forced into a firesale should a wave of redemptions suddenly rear its ugly head. To mitigate this, ETF issuers are setting up credit lines with the very same banks who in the pre-crisis world would have acted as liquidity providers. The cost of these credit lines is passed on to investors via higher expense ratios meaning fund holders can go ahead and shave another 15bps off of their fixed income ETF returns which are already pitifully low thanks to ZIRP.

     

    In the final analysis, these liquidity lines are essentially distressed loans when drawn down, and the effect is to create yet another delay-and-pray ponzi scheme whereby liquidation is temporarily forestalled by borrowed money.

    Recall that Howard Marks recently warned investors against ignoring the fact that an ETF can’t be more liquid than the underlying assets and the underlying assets can be highly illiquid. So while Marks may have wondered rhetorically what could happen in a worst case scenario, the market is itself now quietly taking steps to avoid that moment as long as possible

     



  • Consequences? Barclays Exec Involved In LIBOR Fixing Becomes Bank's Head Of Asia-Pac

    Although it now appears that the logos of several large US banks are set to plead guilty to rigging FX markets, we’re still fairly certain that the post-crisis policy of never sending any actual people to jail for their role in rigging every single market and fixing every single fix on the face of the planet will persist. 

    As unfortunate as that is, what’s worse is the fact that many of the traders involved in the egregious manipulation of the world’s benchmark rates not only escaped without prison time and with their accumulated fortunes largely intact, but in fact found lucrative employment opportunities at places like BlueCrest Capital Management, where LIBORgate participant Christian Bittar ended up following his dismissal from Deutsche Bank. 

    Of course rate-rigging derivatives traders need not necessarily flee to the buyside should they find themselves in the unfortunate position of having to take one for the team and admit their complicity in seeking to game the market, because as Bloomberg reported earlier today, not only can you remain employed at the firm from which you operated when you were engaged in illegal collusion, you can in fact get promoted.

    Via Bloomberg:

    Mark Dearlove, a Barclays Plc executive who was involved in the manipulation of the London interbank offered rate, was named as the U.K. lender’s head of markets for Asia-Pacific.

     

    The banker will relocate to Tokyo from London, replacing Conor Brown, who’s taking a sabbatical, the company said in a memo confirmed by Hong Kong spokesman Allister Fowler.

     

    Dearlove, an almost 20-year veteran of Barclays, will be responsible for the firm’s equities, credit and so-called macro unit, which comprises currencies, commodities and rates in the region. He was most recently head of treasury execution services, the memo said.

     

    The banker accepted that he was involved in manipulating Libor, a U.K. judge said at a court hearing in January 2014, citing Dearlove’s witness statement.

     

    Former Barclays Chief Operating Officer Jerry Del Missier told lawmakers in July 2012 that he instructed Dearlove to submit artificially low rates, after being instructed to do so by former Chief Executive Officer Robert Diamond. Del Missier and Diamond both resigned at the height of the Libor scandal.

     

    Dearlove will begin his transition to the new role on June 1, while Brown is expected to return to the bank in 2016, according to the memo. Dearlove will join Barclays’ Asia Pacific executive committee and markets executive committee with immediate effect.

    Here’s more on Mark, again via Bloomberg (from January 2014):

    Today’s witness statement, which won’t be made public until a trial, isn’t the first time Dearlove’s role in the submission of Libor rates was discussed in court documents in the case.

     

    Dearlove told another executive, Jonathan Stone, he’d received complaints about the bank’s submissions from an employee of JPMorgan Chase & Co., according to a December 2007 transcript released by the court in October.

     

    He told Stone the bank’s submissions were “all wrong” and wanted to escalate the complaint, according to the transcript.

     

    Dearlove was investigated by Barclays over his conduct and received a written warning from the bank in October 2012, Guardian Care Homes said in court documents today.

     

    Dearlove reported his concerns about Libor to compliance officers, the head of the legal department and other senior management, the documents released today show.

    Naturally we wanted to hear more about Dearlove’s new position at Barclays, expecially given the fact that he’ll be overseeing the bank’s Asia-Pac rates unit, but unfortunately when we clicked through to the Bloomberg article this is what we found:

    Fortunately, WSJ has more:

    Mr. Dearlove was one of the Barclays executives involved in the investigation into the bank’s role in the Libor rate-rigging scandal. It was Mr. Dearlove, who was then head of Barclays’ money market desk, who received instructions from bank management to send in a lower, false submission as part of the Libor setting process, according to U.K. parliamentary hearings. Mr. Dearlove could not be reached for comment.

     

    Barclays in July 2012 settled $450 million of penalties with the U.S. and U.K. regulators for “significant failings” related to Libor and its European equivalent Euribor.

     

    The U.K. bank said in a statement Wednesday: “Following the settlements, the issues regarding Mark’s involvement in the Libor matter have been resolved from the Bank’s perspective.”

    Well in that case, we suppose everything is fine.



Digest powered by RSS Digest

Greece Is Now Just A Political Issue

Greece paid off the IMF yesterday with its IMF reserves. Is that a big deal? Whatever you may want to read into this, it’s been obvious for years that Greece needs major debt restructuring if it wants to move forward and have a future as a country -let alone a member of the eurozone-. Instead, the EU/troika anno 2010 decided to bail out German and French and Wall Street banks (I know there’s an overlap)- instead of restructuring the debts they incurred with insane bets on Greece and its EU membership- and put the costs squarely on the shoulders of the Greek population.

This, as I said many times before, was not an economic decision; it was always entirely political. It’s also, by the way, therefore a decision the ECB should have fiercely protested, since it’s independent and a-political and it can’t afford to be dragged into such situations. But the ECB didn’t protest. And ever since the deed was done, Brussels presents it as if it were as unavoidable as Noah building the Ark. It’s not. It’s still just another decision to put banks before people.

And in this case the people have come out on the very short end of a very long stick. That’s what the Greek discussions have been about ever since Syriza was elected, with a substantial majority, to be the government in Athens. And no matter how many times how many people may claim Greece lived above its means for years, it’s obvious that the unemployed and the hungry children and the elderly without health care did not.

The troika says they bailed out the Greek people. The Greek people say only 8-9% of that bailout ever went to them, with the rest going to cover the losses of international systemic banks, and to the utterly corrupt previous Greek political and economic elites, which, coincidentally, the troika was only too happy to strike deals with, so much so that on the eve of the election Greeks were urged to vote the same elites into power once more, even if they were demonstrably to blame for the downfall of the Greek economy.

The troika wants the Syriza government to execute things that run counter to their election promises. No matter how many people point out the failures of austerity measures as they are currently being implemented in various countries, the troika insists on more austerity. Even as they know full well Syriza can’t give them that because of its mandate. Let alone its morals.

It’s a power game. It’s a political game. It always was. But still it has invariably been presented by both the international-press and the troika as an economic problem. Which has us wondering why this statement by ECB member and Austrian central bank head Ewald Nowotny yesterday, hasn’t invited more attention and scrutiny:

ECB’s Nowotny: Greece’s problem isn’t economic

The Greek problem is more a political question than an economic one, a member of the European Central Bank said Monday. Discussions with political parties such as Greece’s left-wing Syriza and Spain’s Podemos may be refreshing by bringing in new ideas, “but at the end of the day, they must [end in] results,” ECB member Ewald Nowotny said, adding discussions are “not about playing games.”

 

The central banker declined to speculate on how to solve Greece’s financial problem saying the issue “is much more a political question than an economic question.” Mr. Nowotny also doesn’t see the ECB’s role as creating a federalized financial government inside the euro zone. “We cannot substitute the political sphere,” he said.

That seems, from where we’re located, to change the discussion quite a bit. Starting with the role of the ECB itself. Because, for one thing, and this doesn’t seem to be clear yet, if the Greek problem is all politics, as the central bank member himself says, there is no role for a central bank in the discussions. If Greece is a political question, the ECB should take its hands off the whole Greek issue, because as a central bank, it’s independent and that means it’s a-political.

The ECB should provide money for Greece when it asks for it, since there is no other central bank to provide the lender of last resort function for the country. Until perhaps Brussels calls a stop to this, but that in itself is problematic because it would be a political decision forced on an independent central bank once again. It would be better if the ‘union’, i.e. the other members, would make available what Greece needs, but they -seem to- think they’re just not that much of a union.

In their view, they’re a union only when times are good. And/or when all major banks have been bailed out; the people can then fight over the leftover scraps.

The IMF has stated they don’t want to be part of a third Greek bailout. Hardly anyone seems to notice anymore, but that makes the IMF a party to political decisions too. Lagarde et al claim they can’t loan to countries that don’t take the ‘right’ measures, but who decides which measures are the right ones? What’s more, how does the IMF, in that vein, explain the recent loans to Ukraine? Is Kiev doing better than Athens from an economic point of view? Or is this just us sinking into a deepening political quagmire?

Moreover, if we take Mr. Nowotny on his word, why are there still finance ministers and economists involved in the Greek issue negotiations? Doesn’t that only simply lead to confusion and delay? Every single news outlet in the world has taken over German FinMin Schäuble’s comment that Greece should have a referendum if they want, and that maybe that would clarify matters.

But that is not something for Schäuble to comment on, no more than it would be for Greek FinMin Varoufakis to suggest a referendum in Germany. While everyone would consider the latter preposterous, the same everyone takes the former serious. That’s power politics for you, and a press that’s lost track of its position in the world. A press that’s turned into a propaganda mechanism for whoever’s in charge at any given moment in time.

If the Greek issue is now, or perhaps has always been, an overwhelmingly political one, as Nowotny suggests, why do we still have Varoufakis and Dijsselbloem (who only has a degree in agricultural economics, whatever that may be) and former German secret service head Schäuble, discussing matters? After all, why would you leave political issues up to your finance ministers to discuss? That’s not their field.

If it’s all political, shouldn’t it be the political leaders, Merkel and Juncker and Tsipras, talking instead? Something tells us that might not be such a bad idea in any case. Certainly by now. If the ECB itself already says it’s not about money…

Today’s News May 13, 2015

  • Europe Preparing Greek Bankruptcy Loan "In Event Of Grexit"

    Earlier today, we learned that, contrary to what Greek government officials had been implying for the better part of a week, Athens did not have enough money to make a €750 million payment to the IMF on Tuesday. Instead, Greece borrowed most of the money (€650 million according to unnamed officials) from its IMF SDR reserves. This money must be paid back within 30 days. This effectively means that the IMF paid itself and it sets up a hilariously absurd scenario wherein assuming Greece manages to convince creditors to disburse a €7.2 billion tranche of aid later this month, the IMF will send money to Greece, who will send it right back to the IMF to replenish an IMF fund, which was drawn down by the IMF to pay itself back for money it loaned to Greece a long time ago. Put simply: Greece has taken circular funding schemes to a whole new level.

    Meanwhile, the IMF is understandably fed up and according to El Mundo, the Fund will not participate in a new program for the Greeks, something which German FinMin Wolfgang Schaeuble indicated may be a dealbreaker when it comes to structuring another bailout for Athens. 

    The takeaway: it’s likely over. Greece lacks the cash to keep up the facade and the IMF lacks the political will to perpetuate the farce any further. This suggests that both Greece and the creditors formerly known as the “Troika” will need to resort to Plan B. There’s a problem with that however — namely that EU officials have gone out of their way to make it clear that there is no Plan B, because to admit that such a plan existed would be to admit that the euro is in fact dissoluble after all, something which is taboo in polite discussions among European politicians. Here is but one example, via Reuters:

    A top EU official urged Athens and its creditors to make progress in their talks on a cash-for-reform deal on Monday, warning there was no “Plan B” in the event of a Greek default.

     

    “What we now need is real progress,” Frans Timmermans, first vice president of the European Commission, told German newspaper Welt am Sonntag.

     

    When asked whether there was a “Plan B” for the case of Athens defaulting, Timmermans replied: “No, there is no ‘Plan B’ for Greece.”

    That’s from Saturday. Here we are just three days later and as it turns out, Plan B does indeed exist and it is essentially a farewell package to the Greeks. here’s Bloomberg with more:

    Euro-area governments are considering putting together an aid package for Greece to cushion the country’s economy if it was forced out of the euro, according to two people familiar with the discussions.

     

    The Greek government doesn’t expect to need that help. Prime Minister Alexis Tsipras says he’s not considering leaving the currency bloc and is focused on getting the aid he needs to avoid a default.

    Even so, European officials are considering mechanisms to ring fence Greece both politically and economically in the event of a euro breakup, in order to shield the rest of the currency bloc from the fallout, one of the people said.

     

    “There is always a plan B,” Filippo Taddei, an economic adviser to Italian Prime Minister Matteo Renzi, said in an interview in Rome on Tuesday, without referring to the aid package specifically. “But you have to ask yourself who has the ability to step in, in that event. And I think if you start making up a list you realize very quickly that that list is very short.”

     

    While euro-area finance ministers welcomed the progress Greece has made toward qualifying for more financial aid at a meeting in Brussels on Monday, policy makers are still concerned Tsipras may not be prepared to swallow the concessions necessary for a disbursement.

    So on Saturday Plan B was unthinkable but on Tuesday there’s “always a Plan B,” which reminds us of the time when Mario Draghi told Zero Hedge that there’s no such thing as Plan B when it comes to insolvent periphery debtor nations getting cut off from ELA and crashing out of the currency bloc. As a reminder, here is what Draghi said: “If the Euro breaks down, and if a country leaves the Euro, it’s not like a sliding door. It’s a very important thing. It’s a project in the European Union. That’s why you have a very hard time asking people like me “what would happened if. No Plan B.”

    Call it plan “B” or plan “C” or plan “contain this trainwreck so redenomination risk doesn’t start creeping into the minds of Spanish and Italian depositors“, but what it amounts to is a DIP loan and the very fact that it’s being mentioned in the media likely means the plan has been hatched. The only remaining question is what the EU’s farewell package to the Greeks will look like. 



  • "Disastrous Mess" Amtrak Train Derails In Philadelphia (5 Dead, 6 Critical, 50 Injured) – Live Feed

    UPDATE: (via AP)

    An Amtrak train headed to New York City derailed and tipped over in Philadelphia on Tuesday night, mangling the front of it, killing at least five people and injuring several more. Some passengers climbed out of windows to get away.

     

    Mayor Michael Nutter, who confirmed the deaths, said the scene was horrific.

     

    "It is an absolute disastrous mess," he said. "I've never seen anything like this in my life."

    *  *  *

    Shortly after 920pmET, NBC Philadelphia reports an Amtrak train bound for New York from Washington D.C. derailed with approximately 240 people on board. Officials say 8 to 10 cars left the tracks and there are at least 50 injured. Given the images below, somehow there are no fatalities.

    Searching for injured right after crash…

    Inside the train right after the accident…

     

    My train crashed

    A video posted by Yameen Allworld "Holladay" (@yameenallworld) on

    May 12, 2015 at 6:35pm PDT

     

    Live Feed:

     

    As NBC Philadelphia reports,

    NBC10's Keith Jones arrived at the scene shortly after 10 p.m. and said the injured passengers he saw had minor injuries.

     

    Janelle Richards, a producer for NBC Nightly News, was a passenger on the train. According to Richards, the train was supposed to arrive in New York at 10:30 p.m. Around 9:20 p.m. Richards heard a loud crash and people flew up in the air.

     

    Richards says there was a lot of "jerking back and forth" and "a lot of smoke." Richards also says she saw injured passengers who were bleeding.

     

    Patrick Murphy, a former congressman from Pennsylvania's 8th District and Iraq War veteran was also on the train. Murphy says he was in the cafe car when the train "crashed."

     

    "It wobbled at first and then went off the tracks," Murphy said. "There were some pretty banged-up people. One guy next to me was passed out. We kicked out the window in the top of the train car and helped get everyone out."

     

    Murphy says a few of the victims were injured to the point where they couldn't move and one person needed a stretcher. He also says paramedics arrived within eight to nine minutes.

    *  *  *

    *  *  *

    An Associated Press manager who was on the Amtrak train that derailed in Philadelphia says he was watching Netflix when the train started to decelerate, like someone had slammed the brake.

     

    Paul Cheung says everything started to shake and people's stuff started flying everywhere.

     

    He says it all happened "in a flash second."

     

    Cheung says another passenger urged them to escape from the back of his car, which he did.

     

    He saw passengers trying to escape through the windows of cars tipped on their side.

     

    He says the front of the train was mangled. He described it "like a pile metal."

     

    ***



  • America's Achilles' Heel

    Submitted by Dmitry Orlov via Club Orlov blog,

    Last Saturday, a massive Victory Parade was held in Moscow commemorating the 70-year anniversary of the surrender of Nazi Germany to the Red Army and the erection of the Soviet flag atop the Reichstag in Berlin. There were a few unusual aspects to this parade, which I would like to point out, because they conflict with the western official propaganda narrative.

    First, it wasn't just Russian troops that marched in the parade: the troops of 10 other nations took part in it, including the Chinese honor guard and a contingent of Grenadiers from India. Dignitaries from these nations were present in the stands, and the Chinese President Xi Jinping and his wife were seated next to President Vladimir Putin, who, in his speech at the start of the parade, warned against attempts to create a unipolar world—sharp words aimed squarely at the United States and its western allies.

    Second, a look at the military hardware that rolled through Red Square or flew over it would indicate that, short of an outright nuclear mutual self-annihilation, there isn't much that the US military could throw at Russia that Russia couldn't neutralize.

    It would appear that American attempts to isolate Russia have resulted in the exact opposite: if 10 nations, among them the world's largest economy, comprising some 3 billion people, are willing to set aside their differences and stand shoulder to shoulder with the Russians to counter American attempts at global dominance, then clearly the American plan isn't going to work at all. Western media focused on the fact that western leaders declined to attend the celebration, either in a fit of pique or because so ordered by the Obama administration, but this only highlights their combined irrelevance, be it in defeating Hitler, or in commemorating his defeat 70 years later. Nevertheless, in his speech Putin specifically thanked the French, the British and the Americans for their contribution to the war effort. I am sorry that he left out the Belgians, who had been so helpful at Dunkirk.

    One small detail about the parade is nevertheless stunning: Defense Minister Sergei Shoigu, a Tuvan Buddhist and one of the most respected Russian leaders, who presided over the Emergencies Ministry prior to becoming the Defense Minister, did something none of his predecessors ever did: at the beginning of the ceremony, he made the sign of the cross, in the Russian Orthodox manner. This simple gesture transformed the parade from a display of military pomp to a sacred ritual. Then followed the slow march with two flags side by side: the Russian flag, and the Soviet flag that flew on top of the Reichstag in Berlin on Victory Day 70 years ago. The march was accompanied by a popular World War II song? Its title? “The Sacred War.” The message is clear: the Russian military, and the Russian people, have put themselves in God's hands, to do God's work, to once again sacrifice themselves to save the world from the ravages of an evil empire.

    If you try to dismiss any of this as Russian state propaganda, then here is something else you should be aware of. Did you hear of the spontaneously organized procession in which, after the official parade, half a million people marched through Moscow with portraits of their relatives who died in World War II? The event was called “The Eternal Regiment” (??????????? ????). Similar processions took place in many cities throughout Russia, and the total number of participants is estimated at around 4 million. Western press either panned it or billed it as an attempt by Putin to whip up anti-western sentiment. Now that sort of “press coverage,” my fellow space travelers, is pure propaganda! No, it was an enthusiastic, spontaneous outpouring of genuine public sentiment. If you think about it just a tiny bit, nothing on this scale could be contrived artificially, and the thought that millions of people would prostitute their dead for propaganda purposes is, frankly, both cynical and insulting.

    * * *

    Instead of collapsing quietly, the US has decided to pick a fight with Russia. It appears to have already lost the fight, but a question remains: How many more countries will the US manage to destroy before the reality of its inevitable defeat and disintegration finally catches up with it?

    As Putin said last summer when speaking at the Seliger youth forum, “I get the feeling that no matter what the Americans touch, they end up with Libya or Iraq.” Indeed, the Americans have been on a tear, destroying one country after another. Iraq has been dismembered, Libya is a no-go zone, Syria is a humanitarian disaster, Egypt is a military dictatorship executing a program of mass imprisonment. The latest fiasco is Yemen, where the pro-American government was recently overthrown, and the American nationals who found themselves trapped there had to wait for the Russians and the Chinese to extract them and send them home. But it was the previous American foreign policy fiasco, in the Ukraine, which prompted the Russians, along with the Chinese, to signal that the US has taken a step too far, and that all further steps will result in automatic escalation.

    The Russian plan, along with China, India, and much of the rest of the world, is to prepare for war with the US, but to do everything possible to avoid it. Time is on their side, because with each passing day they become stronger while America grows weaker. But while this process runs its course, America might “touch” a few more countries, turning them into a Libya or an Iraq. Is Greece next on the list? What about throwing under the bus the Baltic states (Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania), which are now NATO members (i.e., sacrificial lambs)? Estonia is a short drive from Russia's second-largest city, St. Petersburg, it has a large Russian population, it has a majority-Russian capital city, and it has a rabidly anti-Russian government. Of those four facts, just one is incongruous. Is it being set up to self-destruct? Some Central Asian republics, in Russia's ticklish underbelly, might be ripe for being “touched” too.

    There is no question that the Americans will continue to try to create mischief around the world, “touching” vulnerable, exploitable countries, for as long as they can. But there is another question that deserves to be asked: Do the Americans “touch” themselves? Because if they do, then the next candidate for extreme makeover into a bombed-out wasteland might be the United States itself. Let's consider this option.

    As the events in Ferguson, and more recently in Baltimore, have indicated, the tensions between African-Americans and the police have escalated to a point where explosions become likely. The American “war on drugs” has been essentially a war on young black (and Latino) men; about a third of young blacks are behind bars. They also run a high risk of being shot by the police. To be fair, the police also run a high risk of getting shot by young black males, causing them to be jumpy and to overreact. Given the gradually collapsing economy—close to 100 million working-age Americans are unemployed (“outside the labor force,” if you wish to split hairs)—it would seem that for an ever-increasing chunk of the population cooperating with the authorities is no longer a useful strategy: you get locked up or killed anyway, but you get none of the temporary benefits that come from ignoring the law.

    There is an interesting asymmetry in the American media's ability to block out information about civil unrest and insurgency: if it is happening overseas, then news of it can be carefully calibrated or suppressed outright. (Did American television tell you about the recent resumption of shelling of civilian districts by the Ukrainian military? Of course not!) This is possible because Americans are notoriously narcissistic and largely indifferent to the rest of the world, of which most of them know little, and what they think they know is often wrong. But if the unrest is within the US itself, then the various media outlets find themselves competing against each other in who can sensationalize it better, in order to get more viewership, and more advertising revenue. The mainstream media in the US is tightly controlled by a handful of large conglomerates, making it one big monopoly on information, but at the level of selling advertising market principles still prevail.

    Thus there is the potential for a positive feedback loop: more civil unrest generates more sensationalized news coverage, which in turn amplifies the civil unrest, which further sensationalizes the news coverage. And there is a second positive feedback loop as well: the more civil unrest there is, the more the police overreact in trying to control the situation, thereby generating more rage, amplifying the civil unrest. These two positive feedback loops can continue to run out of control for a while, but the end result, in all such recent incidents, is the same: the introduction of National Guard troops and the imposition of curfew and martial law.

    The swift introduction of the military might seem a bit odd, considering that most police departments, even small-town ones, have been heavily militarized in recent years, and even the security people at some school districts now have military vehicles and machine guns. But the progression is a natural one. On the one hand, when people who habitually resort to brute force find that it isn't working, they naturally assume that this is because they aren't using enough of it. On the other hand, if the criminal justice system is already a travesty and a shambles, then why not just cut through the red tape and impose martial law?

    There is an awful lot of weapons of all sorts in the US already, and more will come in all the time as the US is forced to close overseas military bases due to lack of funds. And they will probably get used, for the same reason and in the same fashion that red bricks came to be used in Boston. You see, plenty of red bricks kept coming into Boston aboard British ships, where they were used as ballast for the return trip. This created the impetus to do something with them. But putting up brick buildings is a difficult, demanding process, especially if laborers are always drunk. And so the solution was to use the bricks to pave sidewalks—something one can do on one's hands and knees. Similarly with the military hardware sloshing back into the US from abroad. It will be used, because it's there; and it will be used in the stupidest way possible: shooting at one's own people.

    But bad things happen to militaries when they are ordered to shoot at their own people. It is one thing to shoot at “towel-heads” in a far-away land; it is quite another to be ordered shoot at somebody who could be your own brother down the street from where you grew up. Such orders result in fragging (shooting your own officers), in refusal to follow orders, and in attempts to stand up for the other side.

    And that's where things get interesting. Because, you see, if you shoot at, imprison, and otherwise abuse a defenseless civilian population long enough, what you get in response is an armed insurgency. The place insurgencies are easiest to organize is in prison. For instance, ISIS, or the Islamic Caliphate, was masterminded by people who had previously worked for Saddam Hussein, while they were imprisoned by the Americans. They took this opportunity to work out an efficient organizational structure and, upon release, found each other and got down to work. Having a third of young American blacks locked up gives them all the opportunity they need to organize an effective insurgency.

    To be effective, an insurgency needs lots of weapons. Here, again, there is a procedure for acquiring military technology that has become almost routine. What weapons are being used by ISIS? Why, of course, American ones, which the Americans provided to the regime in Baghdad, and which ISIS took as trophies when the Iraqi army refused to fight and ran away. And what weapons are being used by the Houthi rebels in Yemen? Why, of course, the American ones, which the Americans provided to the now overthrown pro-American regime there. And what are some of the weapons being used by the Syrian regime of Bashar Assad? Why, of course, American ones, sold to them by the Ukrainian government, which got them from the Americans. There is a pattern here: it seems that whenever Americans arm, train and equip an army, that army stands a really big chance of simply melting away, with the weapons falling into the hands of those who want to use them against American interests. It is hard to see why this same pattern wouldn't hold once the US places much of itself under military occupation.

    And that's where things get really interesting: a well-armed, well-organized insurgency composed of thoroughly radicalized, outraged people who have absolutely nothing to lose and are fighting for their home turf and their families squaring off against a demoralized, defeated US military that has just failed spectacularly in every country it “touched.”

    They say that “You can't fight city hall.” But what if you have a tank battalion that can control four intersections all around city hall, turrets pointed in all directions, firing at anything that moves? And what if you have enough infantry to go around and ring the doorbells of all the key city hall bureaucrats? Wouldn't that change one's odds of victory in fighting city hall?

    The US might get to “touch” a few more countries before this scenario unfolds, but it seems likely that (excepting the possibility of all-out war) eventually America will “touch” itself, and then all those countries whose troops marched through Red Square last Saturday won't have America to kick around any more.



  • Chinese Stocks Overtake US As Most Actively Traded Futures Contract In The World

    Having lost its mantle as largest economy in the world to China… and world’s biggest oil importer (again to China), ‘exceptional’ USA appears to have just lost its Number 1 status in financial market depth to China also

     

    China’s Financial Futures Exchange CSI-300 futures contract has now traded more on average than the massively liquid S&P 500 e-mini contract for the last month…

     

    Of course, with millions of new retail trading accounts every week in China, we suspect this ‘false dawn’ of activity will not be quite as exuberant as we have seen for 6 months.

     

    Charts: Bloomberg



  • More Spending Is Not The Answer To A Slow Economy

    Submitted by Dr. Richard Ebeling via The Cobden Centre blog,

    Old fallacies never seem to die, they just fad away to reemerge once again later on. One such fallacy is that if there is significant unemployment and slow economic growth it must be due to not enough consumers’ spending in the economy, what Keynesian economists call a “failure of aggregate demand.”

    This fallacy has been voiced, once more, in a recent interview with Joseph Stiglitz, professor of economics at Columbia University and the 2001 recipient of the Nobel Prize in Economics.

    In an interview that appears in the British “Globe and Mail” on May 8, 2015, Stiglitz blames the sluggish economic growth in the U.S. and around the world, with accompanying unemployment, on weak market demand due to income inequality.

    “You are not going to have robust growth without adequate demand,” says Stiglitz. “The people at the top who have seen big income gains are saving large portions of their income, on average 35 percent. Those at the very top are not spending their money. People at the bottom, on the other hand, have no choice. To just get by, they have to spend all their income.”

    Stiglitz goes on to say, “The contention that people at the top are the job creators and, if you tax them at higher rates, they won’t create jobs is nonsense. The fact is there is talented entrepreneurs at all levels of the U.S. economy. Whenever there is demand, jobs get created and entrepreneurship flourishes. Our big corporations are sitting on upwards of $2-trillion. The reason they are not investing it is there’s no demand for their goods.”

    Stiglitz argues that what is needed is to “get the economy growing by more equitably sharing income gains and investing in our future.”

    Taxing or Deficit Spending Do Not Create Jobs

    First, if the government attempts to “stimulate” the economy through more of its own spending, the question has to be asked: From where will come the financial means for the government to increase its expenditures?

    If the government taxes the citizenry to finance its increased spending, then every dollar more that the government spends by necessity reduces taxpayers’ spending by an equivalent amount. The net change in overall or total spending in the economy would be zero.

    If the government runs a budget deficit, it must borrow the dollars it wishes to spend above what it takes in, in taxes. Every dollar borrowed by the government in the loan and financial markets is one dollar less of people’s savings available for someone in the private sector to borrow for some investment or consumer purchase. Again, the net change in overall or total spending in the economy would be zero.

    If it is argued that the government need not siphon away a dollar from a private-sector borrower because it can offer a higher rate of interest to attract more savings, the net result will still tend to be the same. Why?

    If income earners decide to save more due to an attractively higher rate of interest the government offers to pay for some of those borrowed dollars, it means that that saver is spending fewer dollars, himself, on consumption or some other spending.

    In addition, pushing up market interest rates to attract savers to lend to the government also raises the cost of borrowing for private businesses. The higher the rates of interest the more likely that some businessmen “at the margin” will find that the cost of borrowing is now greater than the anticipated rate of profit from investing a borrowed sum.

    Economists call this the “crowding-out effect.” Part of the cost of funding the government’s budget deficit comes from a reduction in private sector borrowing and spending due to the higher interest costs. Thus, again, the net effect on total spending in the economy tends towards zero.

    Save or Invest cartoon

    Good Ideas Need Savings and Investment

    Joseph Stiglitz is certainly correct that there are potentially talented entrepreneurs in all walks of life and levels of income in the United States and around the world. But having a good idea and even willingness to take a chance and start or expand an enterprise is not enough.

    In most instances, you need capital to begin and operate a business over a period of time before you have anything ready to sell. You need sufficient funds to cover some of the losses that often will occur before you find a niche and attract enough consumer interest and demand to defray the costs of doing business.

    In other words, there first has to be the savings that facilitates the time-consuming production that will eventually generate the product or services that can earn consumer dollars at some point in the future.

    The Simple Logic of Saving, Investing and Capital Formation

    Let take a simple example first. Imagine Robinson Crusoe alone on his island. If he is to escape from extremely primitive conditions of existence of mere “survival” by picking berries and attempting to catch fish in a stream with his bare hands, Crusoe must invest in the manufacture of “capital,” – tools – to assist in improving and increasing the productivity derivable from his human labor.

    But to do so Crusoe must “save,” that is, he must out of his daily efforts to have enough for survival set aside a sufficient amount of berries and fish as a “store” of goods to live off to free up his time and resources that would otherwise go into immediate production for his present consumption.

    He uses that freed up time and resources to, perhaps, make a bow and arrows, or a canoe and fishing net, so that after the requisite “period of investment” during which he has lived off his “savings,” he will have the capital goods – the tools of production – that will then assist him increasing the quantities, varieties and qualities of the consumption goods that previously were beyond his bare labor’s potential to obtain.

    In this way, he has employed himself in making capital goods with his store of saved consumption goods to live off so his own labor can be diverted from more immediate berry picking and fishing with his bare hands.

    Production Time Results in More Desired Goods

    The manufacture of those capital goods and their use over a period of time once in existence must logically and temporally precede the greater availability of consumer goods that that capital’s existence now makes possible. In other words, besides the time taken to making the canoe and net, he must now paddle out into the waters off his island to first catch that larger harvest of fish that his capital goods enables him to have before he can have that increased and more varied fish supply to eat as part of his dinner.

    At the same time, using his bow and arrows for hunting and utilizing his net for fishing will result in “wear and tear.” That is, capital – tools and equipment – get used up in their use, and Crusoe will have to devote part of his labors and time to maintenance and repair if his ability to hunt and fish is not to be diminished.

    Furthermore, if he is to increase his supply of desired consumer goods even more from their existing availabilities and amounts he must again divert an increased amount of his labor time and resource use to “investing” in more and/or better capital goods above that required to maintain his existing capital.

    Thus, the more he invests in making the capital equipment that increases his capacity to produce greater quantities, varieties and qualities of the finished goods he would like to use and consume, the more resources, time, and labor effort he has to equivalently devote to maintaining his enlarged stock of capital to sustain whatever the standard of living he has been able to establish for himself through savings and investment.

    In the Market, Prices Guide Production for Consumption and Investment

    Of course, in “modern society” the process is more complex than presented when using Robinson Crusoe as a first approximation. In our world, today, this all works in a competitive market system of independent private entrepreneurs who employ and directing the men and material they hire, rent or buy in the arena of exchange.

    In this market setting entrepreneurial decision-makers are guided by the system of market prices that reflect the types and amounts of goods that consumers desire, and on the basis of which entrepreneurs hope to make their profits. Changes in consumer demands are expressed in changes in the relative prices for the various goods offered on the market, and these prices then direct entrepreneurs to shift the types and amounts of goods they decide to produce.

    This also applies to changes people make concerning consumption and savings, that is, their demand for consumer goods in the present versus consumer goods in the future for which they put their savings aside.

    In a properly functioning free market, competitive economy, a decision to consume less and save more may reduce the current demand for some consumer goods. But the greater savings reemerges as spending on investment activities and other types of borrowing when the increased savings results in lower rates of interest to attract willing borrowers in the financial markets where that greater savings has been deposited.

    But why would investors borrow this greater savings, even at lower rates of interest, if the current demand for goods on the market has not increased or maybe even gone down?

    Fire as the Next Big Investment

    Saving “Today” Means a Desire to Demand More “Tomorrow”

    This was explained by the famous Austrian economist, Eugen von Böhm-Bawerk (1851-1914) near the beginning the twentieth century.

    The man who saves curtails his demand for present goods but by no means his desire for pleasure-affording goods generally . . .

     

    “The person who saves is not willing to hand over his savings without return, but requires that they be given back at some future time, usually indeed with interest, either to himself or his heirs.

     

    “Through savings not a single particle of the demand for goods is extinguished outright . . . the demand for goods, the wish for means of enjoyment is, under whatever circumstances men are found, insatiable. A person may have enough or even too much of a particular kind of goods at a particular time, but not of goods in general nor for all time. The doctrine applies particularly to savings.

     

    “For the principle motive of those who save is precisely to provide for their own futures or for the futures of their heirs. This means nothing else than that they wish to secure and make certain their command over the means to the satisfaction of their future needs, that is, over consumption goods in a future time. In other words, those who save curtail their demand for consumption goods in the present merely to increase proportionally their demand for consumption goods in the future.”

    But even if there is a potential future demand for consumer goods, how shall entrepreneurs know what type of capital investments to undertake and what types of greater quantities of goods to offer in preparation for that higher future demand?

    Böhm-Bawerk ‘s reply was to point out that production is always forward-looking, a process of applying productive means today with a plan to have finished consumer goods for sale tomorrow. The very purpose of entrepreneurial competitiveness is to constantly test the market, so as to better anticipate and correct for existing and changing patterns of consumer demand.

    Competition is the market method through which supplies are brought into balance with consumer demands. And if errors are made, the resulting losses or less than the anticipated profits act as the stimuli for appropriate adjustments in production and reallocations of labor and resources among alternative lines of production.

    When left to itself, Böhm-Bawerk argued, the market successfully assures that demands are tending to equal supply, and that the time horizons of investments match the available savings needed to maintain the society’s existing and expanding structure of capital in the long run.

    Wages are Paid Out of Savings, Not Current Consumer Demand

    Böhm-Bawerk explained that all production takes time, and invariably through a series of steps or “stages of production” that finally leads to a finished consumer good available for sale and use. He emphasized that the very nature of the time structure of production means that the goods available for consumption today are goods the production of which extends backwards in time over many production periods of the past, over months or years.

    And the production processes being begun “today” and which will continue over the time periods of many “tomorrows” will only be completed and ready in the form of finished consumer goods at some point in the future.

    The finished consumer goods bought today do not represent a “demand for labor” today. The entrepreneurs demanded that labor in the various stages of production at different times in the past while the consumer goods being purchased today were in the process of being produced.

    And the labor being demanded “today” in the various stages of production, each stage of which represents a future product at a different degree of completion and that will be, respectively, ready for sale as a consumer good at different time periods of the future, is a demand by entrepreneurs looking to future sales, not current period consumer demand for “commodities.”

    But this “demand for labor” by entrepreneurs through these future-oriented stages of production is entirely dependent upon the extend to which incomes and revenues earned in the present and future periods (and the resources they represent) are partly saved and not consumed.

    It is this savings of resources not being utilized for more immediate consumption purposes, that “frees” part of the productive capacity of the society to be diverted to the making and maintaining of capital and providing the means to pay wages to workers who will be hired and employed in the respective processes of production for long periods of time before those specific goods in the manufacture of which they are participating will be offered for sale and generating a revenue in the future.

    Thus, it is savings that represents the greater part of the “demand for labor” in the production processes of the market and not the current period’s demand for consumer goods.

    Don’t Tax Away the Wealth that Provides the Savings for Production

    Keynesian economists like Joseph Stiglitz miss all of this in their simplified and, in fact, simplistic view of the world that all that is needed is more government spending and greater “aggregate demand” to create more employment today.

    When the “rich” are saving rather than consuming they are, in fact, supplying part of the financial wherewithal (and the real resources their savings represents) to maintain and expand the capital supply and to provide the means to pay workers and other resource suppliers incomes over the periods of production that everyday culminates in the availability of the goods and services (and the standard of living) we take for granted.

    Under Stiglitz’s own argument, low or lower-income individuals in society use more of their incomes for consumption and less for savings. By using various government fiscal and other policies to transfer wealth and income from those in society who are greater savers to those who are greater consumers, the net effect over time can be to reduce capital formation and productive investment looking to the future.

    It is savings that supports investment, enables capital formation, and creates and sustains jobs. Faster growth and more jobs depend upon savings and market-oriented investment, not the level or amount of current consumption spending.

    Heaven - No Govn't and No Taxes Cartoon

    Taxes and Regulations Reduce the Ability and Incentives to Invest

    But what about Stiglitz’s statement that American “big corporations are sitting on upwards of $2-trillion.” What he failed to mention is that over half of that money is parked overseas where American firms have earned those sums from foreign investments and sales of goods. Why haven’t those dollars come home?

    The Financial Times reported on May 10, 2015, “The growing cash piles underline the reluctance of boardrooms to repatriate money held abroad even as they tap debt markets to fund record spending on dividends, buybacks and acquisitions.”

    U.S. businesses are double taxed if they bring those dollars back to the U.S.. The foreign government in whose country they earned those profits has already taxed them on their net revenues. If they bring any or all of those dollars back to the United States, Uncle Sam will tax them again on their foreign gains, a practice that few other government follow around the world.

    But what about the profits made a home? Why aren’t more of those profits plowed back into productive activities and forward-looking investments? Partly this is due to what economic historian, Robert Higgs, has called “regime uncertainty,” that is, the uncertainties concerning the future direction of government policies that makes investment decisions more risky than it otherwise has to be.

    This includes the uncertainty surrounding what to expect in terms of government regulations, controls, commands and restrictions in an environment in which the U.S. Federal code of regulations on business activity numbers over 175,000 pages. The enforcement of these regulations is widely open to the discretion and decisions of thousands of government bureaucrats, with often total unpredictability of where and when the regulators will appear and what they will demand or accuse an enterprise of having violated.

    Matching the hindrances of the interventionist state is the manipulations of money and interest rates by central banks everywhere, which distorts markets, misdirects capital and labor use resulting in unsustainable booms and inescapable downturns that bring about wrongly invested capital and misallocated labor. This “wrong twists” to the market takes time to overcome and correct.

    It is government impediments to open, competitive markets – whether in America or in other parts of the world – that are the causes to behind slow growth and sluggish job creation, not “the rich” and their savings.



  • Shale "Revolver Raids" To Resume In October When "Rubber Meets The Road" For HY Energy

    Now that the defaults and bankruptcies have begun, and now that David Einhorn has jumped on the bandwagon (coining a new word in the process), it’s time for banks to start taking a hard look at just how bad the fallout will be once hedges start rolling off and more weak hands are shaken out of the HY oil & gas space. 

    As we discussed at the beginning of last month, the “revolver raids” have already begun for some heavily indebted US shale companies who were set to see their credit lines cut after banks performed their bi-annual review in April, which is based on where crude has traded over the preceding 12 months. Those credit lines will be assessed again in October and according to a UBS survey of the banks who have helped finance the oil & gas industry, the outlook is not good, with nearly two-thirds of respondents indicating that loan quality is likely to deteriorate. No one said they expected conditions to improve and more than 80% of banks reported tightening credit lines to oil & gas companies.

    For its part, UBS believes the “rubber will meet the road” for the HY energy in H2 as energy prices likely will not be high enough to support “lower quality” players. 

    Via UBS:

    HY Energy Spreads have continued to tighten over the last few weeks, with overall energy sector spreads now trading at 611bps, E&P spreads at 688bps, and servicers at 682bps, versus the HY Index at 477bps. This compares with 661bp, 765bp, and 731bp respectively as of 4/22. The outlook from lenders is likely painting a more realistic picture on the state of conditions. As part of the Q1 2015 Fed Senior Loan Officer Survey, special questions were asked to banks who provide financing to firms involved in the oil and natural gas sectors. Specifically, banks were asked to project their outlook for delinquencies and charge-offs assuming both 1) economic activity moves in line with consensus and 2) energy prices evolve as priced via the futures curve. Despite Q1 economic forecasts being optimistic and Q1 commodity prices having stabilized, 60% of banks expected loan quality to deteriorate, while the remainder expected loan quality to remain stable. Virtually no banks expected an improvement in loan quality…

     


    We believe the rubber will hit the road later this year for HY Energy. The recent rally in oil prices is insufficient for lower-quality energy firms who have most of 2016 production unhedged. Not to be forgotten for many E&Ps, natural gas prices are still struggling, and haven’t enjoyed the same bounce as oil prices YTD (Figure 3). Banks may not have cut reserve bank lending facilities aggressively yet, but the October review may be less forgiving with this backdrop. 

     

    In addition, the current spot price of WTI ($59) is well above the UBS 2015 YE forecast of $51, based on demand/supply fundamentals. 

    UBS also discusses one of our favorite topics: the idea that access to capital markets — thanks largely to the Fed-induced quest for yield and concomitant ultra-low borrowing costs — have allowed otherwise insolvent producers to keep right on drilling, contributing to oversupply and, ironically to their own demise.

    Energy has been an outperformer in 2015 and open capital markets are to thank. Oil & Gas Issuance in HY Energy has been $17.5bn YTD, or 12.4% of total issuance. This is below the average 15-16% of the prior four years, but much of this year’s drop occurred in January, while issuance for the rest of 2015 has been closer to historical averages of prior years. Our equity colleagues have also cited $`11bn of E&P equity issuance YTD as of April 27th, and that channel remains open.

    Unfettered market access only serves to delay the inevitable, as proven this week when American Eagle Energy — who pulled a Movie Gallery in early March after failing to make even a single coupon payment —became the fourth casualty of the oil downturn, after filing for Chapter 11 on Monday. As we said last month, expect many more to come as the countdown to the day of reckoning for the US shale sector has just about run out.



  • Political Accountability from a Perspective of an Investor

    By Chris at www.CapitalistExploits.at

    There is a great deal of chatter about the recently concluded British elections in which a posh sounding man with eyes suspiciously close together just trumped another man who obviously economically illiterate is missing a chin. During this particular circus show it’s not a leader people were picking but rather choosing which gang led by these two clowns will run the place.

    It’s deeply troubling to think that the fate of Englishmen is being decided by a band of thieves whose IQ is decidedly smaller than their waistbands. And before I get hate-mail from either side let me say categorically that I consider that statement true irrespective of which of the current buffoons took the reigning spot.

    Dumb and Dumber

    It got me to thinking about running a more equitable, transparent and consequence driven election process. In order to do so I’m going to take some lessons learned in venture capital and see what a new and wonderful world we could all create if we could apply them to politics.

    Think about this: what if voting for candidates and political parties was more like voting for a company to prosper?

    If your candidate and party got in then your life should be better for it, much in the same way when we vote for a company by investing into it. If said company subsequently does well then our lives are enriched by our investment into that company.

    It can all be very simple, unlike this obscure nonsense we have right now.

    In venture capital, as investors we’re often taking positions in very early stage companies where risks to our capital are high. We know that statistically some of these companies won’t make it out alive – such is the nature of the business.

    Since things don’t always work out as we would wish we must act to protect ourselves and our capital. One way of doing this is via anti dilution clauses. One in particular that is commonly used by VCs is called a liquidation preference.

    I think this description is a good one:

    A term used in venture capital contracts to specify which investors get paid first and how much they get paid in the event of a liquidation event such as the sale of the company.

     

    Liquidation preference helps protect venture capitalists from losing money by making sure they get their initial investments back before other parties. If the company is sold at a profit, liquidation preference can also help them be first in line to claim part of the profits. Venture capitalists are usually repaid before holders of common stock and before the company’s original owners and employees.

    Entrepreneurs find it easier to raise money if they are prepared to provide assurances that will go a long way to covering investors potential losses. Eliminating downside for investors while allowing them participation in the upside is a smart thing to do.

    Essentially, investors have the right to get paid first, ahead of founders, and management, and even ahead of preference shareholders. For example, if a company sells for a price lower than the price the investor paid, then the proceeds of the sale on a 1x liquidation preference will go towards those investors until they’re made whole.

    Now, let’s imagine what this would look like in the political circus of elections.

    Voters (shareholders/investors) would vote (invest) for their party (company) and if that party wins then it’s game on.

    The end of any political term in office is deemed to be the liquidation event. In other words at this point the score card is read. All the promises that have been made need to be kept. If at the end of the term they have not kept up to their promises then voters (shareholders) get to keep all of their taxes paid (investments made) and are made whole on their “investments”.

    I’ll go one step further and say that if there exists a shortfall (and looking at the last few 100 years I think it’s safe to say there would be some enormous shortfalls ) that such shortfall is made up by the individuals in the party, all jointly and severally liable. Sounds fair to me!

    I’ll be happy to draft all the agreements for this new system and I won’t charge a dime for it. Consider it humanitarian work.

    – Chris

     

    “There’s another way we’re getting behind business – by sorting out the banks. Taxpayers bailed you out. Now it’s time for you to repay the favor and start lending to Britain’s small businesses.” – David Cameron



  • "More Probable Than Not"

    Submitted by Ben Hunt via Salient Partners' Epsilon Theory blog,

    The only thing that I ask from this group today and the American people is to judge me from this day forward. That’s all I can ask for.
    Alex Rodriguez press conference, February 17, 2009, regarding his steroid use from 2001 – 2003.

    I’m ready to put this chapter behind me and play some ball.
    – Alex Rodriguez “apology” letter, February 17, 2015, regarding his steroid use from 2010 – 2012.

    Brady:

    I would never do something that was outside of the rules of play.  I would never have someone do something that I thought was outside of the rules.

    Reporter:

    So you never knowingly played with a football that was under 12.5 pounds?

    Brady:

    No.

    Tom Brady press conference, January 22, 2015

    Now, we all know that air pressure is a function of the atmospheric conditions. If there is activity in the ball relative to the rubbing process I think that explains why when we gave them to the official and the officials put them at let’s say 12.5 … once the ball reached its equilibrium state it’s probably closer to 11.5.
    – noted physicist and football coach Bill Belichick, January 24, 2015.

    That is an allegation [FOMC quashing their own General Counsel’s investigation of leaks] that I don’t believe has any basis in fact. I’m not going to go into any detail but I don’t know where that piece of information could possibly have come from.
    – Janet Yellen press conference, March 18, 2015.

    The Board’s Inspector General and the Department of Justice are in the midst of an investigation into this matter [FOMC leaks to journalists and market consultants]. We are cooperating fully with them and look forward to the results of their investigation. … I had one meeting with Ms. Regina Schleiger of Medley Global Advisors during the period covered by the staff review. As Vice Chair of the Board, I met with Ms. Schleiger on June 11, 2012, to hear her perspectives on international developments.
    – Janet Yellen letter to Rep. Jeb Hensarling, May 4, 2015.

    Mr. Bernanke said that he was sensitive to the public’s anxieties about the “revolving door” between Wall Street and Washington and chose to go to Citadel, in part, because “it is not regulated by the Federal Reserve and I won’t be doing any lobbying of any sort.” He added that he had been recruited by banks but declined their offers. “I wanted to avoid the appearance of a conflict of interest,” he said. “I ruled out any firm that was regulated by the Federal Reserve.”
    – New York Times, April 16, 2015.

    Senator:

    Fletcher, there's an old saying to the victors belong the spoils.

    Fletcher:

    There's another old saying, Senator.  Don't piss down my back and tell me it's raining.

    "The Outlaw Josey Wales" (1976)

    My father was a doctor who spent his entire career in a small hospital built by the Tennessee Coal and Iron company in Fairfield, Alabama. He was an ER doc way before emergency medicine was its own thing, which meant that he saw a wide gamut of cases, from knife fights to car wrecks to heart attacks. But it also meant that he saw a lot of ordinary colds and various infectious diseases, as the emergency clinic then – as now – was the only on-demand medical facility available for people who couldn’t afford or didn’t have access to private physician practices. Now one of my father’s great joys in life was watching sports on our grainy black and white TV, miraculously upgraded to a grainy color TV when I was 12. I’m sure he spent hundreds, if not thousands, of happy hours watching sports. Unless, of course, the hapless TV commentator made the mistake of excusing the absence of, say, Larry Bird from a Celtics game by saying that Bird “had a touch of the flu” and so was too sick to play, which was guaranteed to send my father into a 10-minute tirade.
     
    “A touch of the flu? A touch of the flu? You mean he has contracted the influenza virus? Are you out of your mind? Do you have any idea what it means to have the flu? Do you have any idea how sick you are if you have the flu? People DIE from the flu, you moron! What does that even mean … a touch of the flu? Is Larry Bird in the hospital? Because if he has influenza, you sure better get him to the hospital! I hope you’ve got a saline IV hooked up to Larry Bird’s arm right now! No, he’s not in the hospital. Do you know why? Because he has a COLD. That’s right, you idiot, he has a COLD! Not the flu!”
     
    Honest to god, this would go on for quite a while. Somehow it never got old to my father to rail at what he perceived as the mendacity – to use a good Tennessee Williams word – of a TV commentator elevating Larry Bird’s status from an ordinary human wrestling with a common cold to a heroic struggle with influenza. Even today, 30 years later, I can’t help but laugh at these memories of my father whenever I read or hear about a player out for the game because of “flu-like symptoms.”
     
    I’ve inherited a lot of my father’s traits, and one of them is his intolerance for this mendacity of language, this intentional failure to call things by their proper names, this linguistic exercise in self-puffery and cover-up. Unfortunately for me and anyone else who shares this peculiar sensitivity, mendacity of language has never been more rampant in all of our social worlds, from sports to politics to markets. 
     
    With the advent of always-on mass media that projects the illusion of a one-to-one personal connection with cartoons like “Tom Brady” and “Jim Cramer” – corporate entities that are connected with but distinct from human beings like Tom Brady and Jim Cramer – language intentionally designed to influence rather than inform is now ubiquitous in the business of sports and politics and markets Why? Because it works. It delays sanctions until after you play in the Super Bowl, until after you sign a quarter of a billion dollar contract. It deflects attention until after your term in office is over, until after you cash in with a book deal and hedge fund consultancy.
     
    To use the ponderous, legally parsed language of the NFL’s Wells Report on “deflate-gate”, language which I think wonderfully encapsulates the pinched spirit of our age, here are four things that I believe are “more probable than not”:
    1) Alex Rodriguez has routinely used steroids and PED’s of various stripes since he was a sophomore in high school.
     
    2) Tom Brady has routinely bribed equipment managers with autographed jerseys and new shoes in order to receive footballs deflated well below what he knew was the legal limit.
     
    3) Janet Yellen has routinely leaked market-moving information to favored private sector conduits, and has also sought to quash internal investigations of same.
     
    4) Ben Bernanke is for sale to the highest bidder.
    But here’s the thing. I’m not that worked up about ANY of these issues. Yes, A-Rod has been juicing for 25 years, and Tom Terrific breaks the rules he thinks he can get away with breaking. Okay. Them and about 5,000 other professional athletes. Janet Yellen, the prime author of Fed “communication policy” (the intentional use of words to influence market expectations), leaks her viewpoint as part of that communication policy and then tries to kill an internal investigation. Okay. Her and every other senior politician and bureaucrat in the history of human civilization. As for Bernanke … a former President of the United States and the leading candidate to be the next President of the United States have personally received more than $100 million in “donations” from mega-corporations and foreign governments, and I’m supposed to be outraged about Ben Bernanke cashing a big check from Ken Griffin?
     
    What I AM worked up about, though, is the mendacity … the utter lack of character and authenticity … on full display in ALL of these cases. All of these cases and so many, many more. 
     
    You want to go work for Citadel? Fine, go work for Citadel. But OWN IT. Don’t insult my … I’m not even going to say intelligence, because it’s not an assault on intelligence we’re talking about here … don’t insult my 50 years of life as a reasonably self-aware human being by claiming that you’re taking the high road here by working for Citadel instead of, say, JP Morgan. I mean, the notion that access to the Fed’s regulatory authority over big banks is somehow the defining characteristic of why Ben Bernanke is a sought-after commodity, or that any public outrage here is clearly misplaced because, after all, he won’t be a – gasp! – bank lobbyist, per se … it’s all just horrifically insulting to anyone with the common sense to know that the sky is blue, that 2 + 2 = 4, and that you don’t meaningfully change the air pressure in footballs by rubbing them vigorously. It’s mendacity and inauthenticity in the first degree.
     
    You want to embark on a conscious policy of manipulating market expectations (yes, manipulating is a strong word, but it’s exactly accurate) by planting a carefully constructed Narrative with journalists like Jon Hilsenrath at the Wall Street Journal and consultants like Regina Schleiger at Medley, journalists and consultants who you know will be influential precisely because they are trumpeting their exclusive access to you? Fine. I totally get it. Once you’ve hit zero on short rates and pushed your balance sheet up over $4 trillion in LSAP’s, jawboning is the only bullet you’ve got left in the gun. But OWN IT. Don’t tell me that you’re meeting with Regina Schleiger at Medley because you want to hear HER perspectives on monetary policy! I’m sure that Ms. Schleiger is a very smart person. I’m sure that she is an insightful observer of the international economic scene. But – and I’m trying to say this in the kindest possible way – there’s not 1 in 100,000 investors who even knows who Ms. Schleiger is, and fewer still who would be willing to pay money or time to hear her personal opinion about the proper course of monetary policy. The exception, we are told, is the Chair of the Federal Reserve, in many respects the most powerful person on the planet … she, of course, is terribly keen to hear Ms. Schleiger’s views on international economics. 
     
    And yes, I know that Fed governors have these consultant meetings all the time. I know that their guests do most of the talking. But I also know, because I’ve done it, that professional investors and allocators are willing to pay tens of thousands of dollars to consultants like Medley, solely to glean a scrap of insight as to what the Fed is thinking, solely to be a willing host of the Narrative virus that the Fed is trying to spread. More to the point, Janet Yellen knows it, too, which is why she has these meetings. The act itself is not a horrible thing … not for A-Rod, not for Brady, not for Yellen, and not for Bernanke. It’s not a crime, or at least not a crime that will shame your children or your fan base. Certainly it’s a difficult and unpleasant thing when you’re revealed, because now you’ve got to deal with the Roger Goodell’s and the Bud Selig’s and the Jeb Hensarling’s and the Elizabeth Warren’s of the world – petty tyrants, all – but you knew there was this chance when you made the decision to break the rules, (or the “rules” in Bernanke’s and 2009 A-Rod’s case). But don’t turn a difficult situation into a personal capitulation to mendacity. Far better to own it.  
     
    Believe it or not, I’m not just venting my spleen at the outrageous displays of mendacity that assault us at every turn. I think that there’s an enormous political opportunity today (and I mean political in the broadest sense of the word, a sense that clearly includes the Fed, and arguably includes the NFL and MLB) to embrace authenticity, even if you are authentically an unlikable or – to use the insult du jour – a “polarizing” person. Not only am I convinced that we are each more likely to be successful in our chosen field when acting authentically (don’t you think that if Tiger Woods had embraced his authentically heel-ish nature in 2009, grown a goatee and moved to a casino suite in Vegas, that he’d still be winning majors today?), but also specifically within the chosen field of politics I think there is such a hunger for authenticity that ANY display of honest conviction when confronted with adversity, even if the adversity is well-deserved for breaking a rule, quickly becomes an enormous asset. Maybe this will turn out to be a more interesting election in 2016 than we think. Then again, with the vast campaign coffers already accumulated by Clinton™ and Bush™, two profoundly inauthentic corporate entities, maybe not.   
     
    Sigh. I know I’m not going to change anything by writing about this stuff, any more than my father was going to change a sports commentator’s patter by yelling at the TV. Like my father, though, I just can’t help myself. It’s never easy to be authentic. It’s never easy to call things by their proper names. It’s never easy to own it. But here in the Golden Age of the Central Banker, it’s never been more important. Or more politically savvy.

     



  • US May Use Military To Confront China In South China Sea Islands Dispute

    Just days after Japanese PM Shinzo Abe leaves Washington (having stepped up his nation's military assertiveness), The Wall Street Journal reports that the US Secretary of Defense has asked staff for military options in the South China Sea (as we have detailed China's land reclamation efforts):

    *U.S. MAY USE MILITARY TO CONFRONT CHINA IN SPRATLY ISLANDS DISPUTE: WSJ

    Having ironically commented on China's "bullying," it appears Nobel-Peace-Prize winner President Obama is preparing for an even bigger objective, amid China's rising threat to USD dominance (with Yuan liberalization and AIIB success).

     

    As The Wall Street Journal reports, the U.S. military is considering using aircraft and Navy ships to directly contest Chinese territorial claims to a chain of rapidly expanding artificial islands, U.S. officials said, in a move that would raise the stakes in a regional showdown over who controls disputed waters in the South China Sea.

    Defense Secretary Ash Carter has asked his staff to look at options that include flying Navy surveillance aircraft over the islands and sending U.S. naval ships to well within 12 nautical miles of reefs that have been built up and claimed by the Chinese in an area known as the Spratly Islands.

     

    Such moves, if approved by the White House, would send a message to Beijing that the U.S. won’t accede to Chinese territorial claims to the man-made islands in what the U.S. considers to be international waters and airspace.

    The proposal under consideration would be to send Navy ships and aircraft to within 12 nautical miles of only those built-up sites that the U.S. doesn’t legally consider to be islands, officials say.

    Under the U.N. Convention on the Law of the Sea, reclaimed features aren’t entitled to territorial waters if the original features are not islands recognized under the agreement, U.S. officials say. Under that interpretation, the U.S. believes it doesn’t need to honor the 12-mile zone around the built-up reefs that weren’t considered to be islands before construction there began.

     

    Several U.S. allies in the region have been privately urging the White House to do more to challenge Chinese behavior, warning Washington that U.S. inaction in the South China Sea risked inadvertently reinforcing Beijing’s territorial claims, U.S. officials said. Some allies in the region have, in contrast, expressed concern to Washington that a change in the U.S.’s approach could inadvertently draw them into a conflict.

     

    “It’s important that everyone in the region have a clear understanding of exactly what China is doing,” a U.S. official said. “We’ve got to get eyes on.” The U.S. has been using satellites to monitor building at the islands.

     

    In recent months, the White House has sought to increase pressure on Beijing to halt construction on the islands through diplomatic channels, as well as by calling out the Chinese publicly in recent press briefings and government reports.

    And it appears the US military has been testing the waters so to speak…

    U.S. military aircraft have repeatedly approached the 12-nautical-mile zone declared by China around the built up reefs. But to avoid an escalation, the planes haven’t penetrate the zone. A senior military official said the flights “have kept a distance from the islands and remained near the 12-mile mark.”

     

    U.S. planes have flown close to the islands where the building has been taking place, prompting Chinese military officers to radio the approaching U.S. aircraft to notify the pilots that they are nearing Chinese sovereign territory. In response, U.S. pilots have told the Chinese that they are flying through international airspace.

     

    The USS Fort Worth, a combat ship, has been operating in recent days in waters near the Spratlys. “We’re just not going within the 12 miles—yet,” a senior U.S. official said.

    Finally, it is worth noting that…

    The military proposals haven’t been formally presented to the White House, which would have to sign off on any change in the U.S. posture. The White House declined to comment on the deliberations.

     

    Officials said the issue is a complicated one because at least some of the areas where the Chinese have been doing construction are, in eyes of the U.S. government, legitimate islands, which would be entitled to a 12-nautical-mile zone.

    *  *  *

    As a reminder, China has been busy…

    Now, a series of satellite images have confirmed the construction of a 10,000 foot runway on the reef, which would appear to suggest that China may be planning on landing military aircraft such as fighter jets on the reclaimed islands. Here, in glorious HD, are the visuals accompanied by descriptions via the Asia Maritime Transparency Initiative:

     
     

    Satellite photography has identified three cement plants operating on the island.

     
     

    China has already constructed in excess of 60 semi-permanent or permanent buildings.

     
     

    At least 20 structures are visible on the southern side of the island (ZH: including a helipad).

     
     

    China is building an airstrip on the island. The airstrip is likely large enough to land nearly any Chinese aircraft.

     
     

    Images taken on April 11 show the runway more than one-third complete.

     
     

    Beijing is also installing port facilities which may be capable of docking military tankers.

    Full interactive report available here from the AMTI

     

    Here’s more color from NY Times on what this may mean from a military and geopolitical perspective:

     
     

    The runway, which is expected to be about 10,000 feet long — enough to accommodate fighter jets and surveillance aircraft — is a game changer in the competition between the United States and China in the South China Sea, said Peter Dutton, professor of strategic studies at the Naval War College in Rhode Island.

     

    “This is a major strategic event,” Mr. Dutton said. “In order to have sea control, you need to have air control…”

     

    In time, Mr. Dutton said, China is likely to install radar and missiles that could intimidate countries like the Philippines, an American ally, and Vietnam, which also have claims to the Spratlys, as they resupply modest military garrisons in the area.

     

    More broadly, he said, China’s ability to use Fiery Cross Reef as a landing strip for fighter and surveillance aircraft will vastly expand its zone of competition with the United States in the South China Sea…

     

    “We absolutely think it is for military aircraft, but of course an airstrip is an airstrip — anything can land on it if it’s long enough,” said James Hardy, Asia-Pacific editor for Jane’s Defense Weekly…

     

    “The main question is, what else would land there?” he said. “Unless they are planning to turn these into resorts — which seems unlikely, not least given the statement from the Foreign Ministry last week — then military aircraft are the only things that would need to land there.”

    And a bit more from Reuters

     
     

    Senator John McCain, chairman of the U.S. Senate Armed Services Committee, called the Chinese moves "aggressive" and said they showed the need for the Obama administration to act on plans to move more military resources into the economically important Asian region and boost cooperation with Asian countries worried by China.

     

    McCain referred to a U.S. intelligence assessment from February that China's military modernization was designed to counteract U.S. strength and said Washington had a lot of work ahead to maintain its military advantage in the Asia-Pacific.

     

    "When any nation fills in 600 acres of land and builds runways and most likely is putting in other kinds of military capabilities in what is international waters, it is clearly a threat to where the world's economy is going, has gone, and will remain for the foreseeable future," he told a public briefing in Congress.

     

    A spokesperson for the U.S. State Department said the scale of China’s land reclamation and construction was fueling concerns within the region that China intends to militarize its outposts and stressed the importance of freedom of navigation.

     

    "The United States has a strong interest in preservation of peace and security in the SouthChina Sea. We do not believe that large-scale land reclamation with the intent to militarize outposts on disputed land features is consistent with the region’s desire for peace and stability."

    *  *  *

    This comes at an interesting time for relations between Beijing and Washington. China’s recent move to evacuate foreign nationals from the embattled Yemeni port city of Aden marked the first time the rising superpower has participated in an international rescue effort. During the same week, state television indicated the country would begin its first patrol by nuclear submarine later this year.

    Meanwhile, the China-led Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank marks a coup in the post-war economic era, as the multilateral institution will seek to plug holes left by the US-dominated IMF and the Japan-influenced ADB, while simultaneously positioning the yuan to play a more prominent role in what is quickly becoming a new economic world order characterized by the ascendancy of the renminbi and the decline of traditional systems that have supported dollar hegemony such as petrocurrency mercantilism. While it’s unclear exactly how ambitious Beijing hopes to be in terms of turning the Spratlys into a military outpost, China’s bold development efforts underscore the degree to which the country isn’t timid when it comes to advancing its interests in the face of Western admonition.



  • NY Governor Probes Nuclear Plant 'Incident' As Oil Spills Into Hudson River

    Having explained to the general public that there was nothing to be concerned about, when an exploding transformer shut down at least one unit of the Indian River nuclear power plant, noting “no danger to public safety,” it appears the situation is not as ‘contained’ as officials hoped. As Sputnik News reports, thousands of gallons of oil that leaked into the Hudson River after the explosion has formed a gigantic oil sheen on the waterway. NY Governor Andrew Cuomo has demanded a probe into the incident, adding that Entergy and contractors will clean up the spill.

    • *CUOMO: PROBE ON WEEKEND INCIDENT AT INDIAN POINT PLANT ONGOING
    • *CUOMO SAYS OIL DISCHARGE RESULT OF FIRE IN A TRANSFORMER
    • *CUOMO: N.Y. WORKING WITH U.S. COAST GUARD TO MONITOR SITUATION
    • *CUOMO: NY, U.S. EVALUATING ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE TO HUDSON RIVER

    As Sputnik News reports,

    The oil made its way into the river following an explosion, fire, and leak that occurred Saturday at the Indian Point nuclear facility in Buchanan, about 40 miles north of Midtown Manhattan.

     

    According to the US Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC), oil leaked into the facility’s discharge drains during the fire, then into the river.

     

     

    However, “there is no doubt that oil was discharged into the Hudson River,” New York Governor Andrew Cuomo said at Indian Point on Sunday. “We have booms in the water now around the discharged pipe to collect any oil that may be in the river.”

     

    The fire did not cause the release of any radiation and did not pose a threat to workers or the public, according to a statement by Entergy Corp, the owner of the nuclear power plant.

     

    The Journal News cited a state official as saying the oil leak “left a sheen of 75-by-100 feet just south of the two reactors, and is likely expanding.”

     

    There is also a “notable odor” in the vicinity of the power plant, according to a boat crew for the watchdog group Riverkeeper, which patrolled the Hudson off Indian Point after the transformer fire.

    *  *  *

    According to the Journal News, US Rep. Nita Lowey of New York said the NRC should not renew Indian Point’s license for their reactors, a matter the federal body is currently considering.

    “This latest episode proves that Indian Point remains a serious threat to public health and safety,” Lowey said in a statement. “We are extremely fortunate that a catastrophic scenario did not unfold, and I urge officials to conduct a swift and thorough investigation.”

     



  • OBaMa'S NeVeRENDiNG SToRY…



  • Continued Weak Consumer Spending "Puzzles" BofA

    BofAML’s Michelle Meyer is “puzzled” at why the US consumer is not the spendaholic her textbooks said they should be by now…

    A setback after the bounce in March

    Based on BAC internal data, which tracks spending on credit and debit cards, consumer spending slowed in April. Retail sales ex-autos declined 0.1% mom seasonally adjusted after climbing 0.8% in March. It is prudent to smooth through the last three months, which reveals an average monthly gain of 0.3%. 

    Given the great deal of noise in the data, it is helpful to examine spending trends by sector.

     

    Department store sales were the weakest, maintaining the post-recession trend of contraction. The housing-related sectors were also sluggish, with a decline in spending on home improvements and home goods. There seemed to be a weaker trend to the former, but the drop in home goods looked like a reversal from recent strength. On the other end, there was a notable gain in spending at electronic stores, which we think may have partly owed to the launch of the Apple iWatch. As we show in Chart 2, prior releases of Apple products caused notable spikes in spending, which the seasonal adjustment process did not capture.

     

    The gain this time was modest relative to previous iPad and iPhone releases. This is likely because much of the sales were on pre-order, which means that actual sales will happen with a lag.

    We are left puzzled by the weak April consumer spending data – we expected the consumer to be a tailwind for growth in this year, offsetting the drag from weaker investment and manufacturing. Even accounting for the softer jobs data in the past two months, the labor market added an average of 255,000 jobs a month over the past six months. Consumers have benefited from lower gasoline prices and confidence has picked up.

    If consumer spending does not accelerate, we will have to question our forecast for GDP growth to accelerate back above 3.0% in the second half of the year. 

    *  *  *

    It appears we are going to need a new excuse…



  • How Much Longer Can The Oil Age Last?

    Submitted by Gaurav Angihotri via OilPrice.com,

    History has been so fascinated with oil and its price movements that it is indeed hard to imagine our future without oil. Over the last few months, we have witnessed how oil prices have fluctuated from a 6 year low level of $42.98 per barrel in March 2015 to the current levels of $60 per barrel. It is interesting to note that, in spite of the biggest oil cartel in the world deciding to stick to its high production levels, the oil prices have increased mainly due to falling US crude inventories and strong demand. However, the current upward rally might be short lived and there may yet be another drop in the international oil price when Iran eventually starts pumping its oil into the market at full capacity, potentially creating another supply glut. In these endless price rallies, it is important to take a holistic view of the global energy industry and question which way it is heading. Are the dynamics of global energy changing with current improvements in renewable energy sources and affordable new storage technologies? Can the oil age end in the near future? Will we ever stop feverishly analyzing the rise and fall of oil prices? Or, will oil remain irreplaceable in our life time?

    Are Renewables ready to take over?

    With little or no pollution, renewables like solar, wind and biofuels are viewed by many as a means to curtail the rising greenhouse emissions and replace oil as a sustainable alternative. There is little doubt as to why China, US, Japan, UK and Germany, some of the world’s biggest energy gluttons have invested heavily in renewables. 

    EIAENergyConsumption

    Image Source: EIA

    However, according to a study conducted by Frankfurt School-UNEP Collaborating Centre for Climate & Sustainable Energy Finance, the United Nations Environment Program (UNEP) and Bloomberg New Energy Finance, the total global investments in renewables fell by 14% to $214 billion in 2013. One of the major reasons of this fall was the backing out of some big oil firms such as BP, Chevron and Conoco Phillips. These companies significantly reduced their investments in renewables and decided to focus on their ‘core’ business; that is, oil and gas. As per Lysle Brinker, an oil and gas equity analyst at IHS "It's not their (Big oil majors) strong suit to be spending a lot of money and time on renewables when they are definitely challenged in their core industry."

    GlobalNewInvestmentInRenewables

    However, if we take the example of the solar industry, where the cost of an average photo voltaic panel is declining at a rate of more than 10% per annum we see that, in spite of reduced global investments, renewables still hold a lot of promise. Some of the major integrated oil and gas companies such as Shell, Total and Statoil have actually been slowly and steadily increasing their renewable related investments. Shell is investing big time in biofuels, while Total, with its stake in Sunpower, is investing substantially in the solar sector while Statoil is placing its bets on wind energy. This shows that renewables are a phenomenon that many believe can give oil a run for its money.

    Is Saudi Arabia sensing an end of oil age?

    “No one can set the price of oil – It is up to Allah”, this is what Saudi Arabia’s oil minister Ali Al Naimi had to say while speaking to CNBC recently. OPEC, which holds around 40 % of the world’s crude output, is showing no signs of reducing its production levels, even if Iran starts pumping more oil after sanctions are lifted should the international nuclear deal with P 5+ 1 counties prove successful. Many see this move by OPEC as a means to protect its market share and drive US shale players out of business. But is the decision of OPEC (especially Saudi Arabia) part of a much bigger game? The Saudis, who lead OPEC, would obviously be very interested in delaying ‘Peak Oil Demand’ after which global demand for oil would start declining steadily, along with Saudi oil revenues.

    According to Bank of America and Merrill Lynch commodity researchers, if crude prices stay in the range of $50 – $70, peak oil demand would be pushed beyond 2030. This delay in peak oil demand would definitely hurt renewables and anyone who is investing in them. As per Alex Thursby, Chief Executive at the National Bank of Abu Dhabi, “Renewable energy technologies are far further advanced than many may believe: solar photovoltaic (PV) and on-shore wind have a track record of successful deployment, and costs have fallen dramatically in the past few years. In many parts of the world, indeed, they are now competitive with hydrocarbon energy sources. Already, more than half of the investment in new electricity generation worldwide is in renewables. Potentially, the gains to be made from focusing on energy efficiency are as great as the benefits of increasing generation. Together, these help us to reframe how we think about the prospects for energy in the region.”

    Yes, OPEC has sensed the end of its glory days. And it is obvious that Saudi Arabia, with 85% of its export revenues coming from petroleum exports does not want the oil age to end anytime soon.

    What can we expect?

    If we look at China, the second biggest global consumer of oil, we find that its oil consumption rate constitutes about one third the world’s total consumption rates and shows no signs of slowing. In fact, EIA even predicts steady growth of China’s oil production reaching 4.6 million barrels per day in 2020 and 5.6 million barrels per day in 2040.

    ChinaOilProductionAndConsumption

    China has also invested heavily in building its strategic petroleum reserves and plans to expand them to 500 million barrels by 2020.

    Now take India, a country that is considered by many as the next solar investment hotspot. India has been investing heavily in building its own strategic petroleum reserves and its public sector undertaking, Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Limited (ONGC) is planning to invest about $62 billion on its discoveries in Krishna Godavari Basin block KG-D5.

    These are two of the world’s fastest growing economies that are investing heavily in renewables but also safeguarding their oil and gas aspirations. Moreover, when we analyze past oil price trends, we find that volatility related to geopolitical equations, speculations, wars, economic sanctions and climate change have always kept the global energy markets guessing about the future. The world is still myopic when it comes to energy. Yes, it wants to embrace renewables but not at the cost of oil. Whatever happens to oil prices in the coming years, one thing is certain: that the age of oil isn’t ending anytime soon, at least not in the next 30 years.



  • Dilbert On College Graduate Career Options

    More tips for the most-indebted graduate class ever...

     

     

    *  *  *

    Dear Class of 2015, 

    Because we recognize your plight, allow us to provide you with a bit of friendly advice as it realtes to your student loans. Once you are uncerimoniously thrown from your dorm into the less-than robust US jobs market, you will likely discover that contrary to what you were told in your economics courses, the US economy is but a shadow of its former self.

    Because you probably didn't study to become a petroleum engineer, you will likely find your student debt burden to be quite onerous. The key to having it discharged is to make just enough money to stay clear of bankruptcy, but not enough to really survive above the poverty line. This is because it's hard to have student debt discharged in the event you go completely broke.

    However, if your discretionary income is so small as to render you incapable of making payments, the government will start you on a program whereby a monthly payment of zero dollars counts towards the 300 "payments" you need to make to have your debt forgiven. Toe this line carefully (i.e. don't slip up and start making too much discretionary income) and the entirety of your student debt will be forgiven in 25 short years without your ever having to pay a dime.

    You're welcome,

    Zero Hedge



  • Goldman Fears Crude Oil's Self-Defeating Rally

    Market rebalancing derailed by price rally…

    The oil market rebalancing has started: weak prices in 1Q15 pushed producers to cut capex while supporting demand. This led to a recovery in prices further fueled by relief that US crude stocks would not breach capacity, strong demand and rising Middle East tensions. The rise in prices was further supported by oil screening as cheap relative to E&P equities, drawing cross-asset investors into buying crude.

     

     

    But, as Goldman Sachs details below, while the rally in oil prices has closed the valuation gap to equities, these trade on historically high multiples and oil itself is now trading at a premium to its own still weak fundamentals in our view.

     

    Goldman therefore views this rally as derailing this rebalancing and setting the stage for sequentially weaker prices, especially with oil speculative length as long as when oil traded at $100/bbl.

     

     

    ..given still weak current and forward fundamentals

    First, while US crude builds turn to draws, it is total petroleum stocks that matter, as rising product stocks will depress refining margins and weigh on crude prices.

     

    Second, our updated supply and demand balance points to an only gradual decline in elevated inventories in 2016 as production growth from low-cost producers such as Saudi, Iraq and Russia help offset strong demand growth and declining non-OPEC ex. US production. Further, we don’t see the US rig curtailment as large enough yet to put production on a persistent downward trend with risk to our flat Iranian production path skewed to the upside.

     

    Third, we believe that WTI oil prices settling above $60/bbl will eventually lead US producers to ramp up activity, draw down a large well backlog and hedge, given improved returns with costs down by c.20%.

    Fourth, the broader imbalance of too much capital looking for opportunities in the energy space remains intact

    The imbalance of too much capital looking for opportunities in the energy space remains intact. For example, the combined dry powder for M&A from the three US oil majors and of North America natural resources private equity funds currently stands at $150 billion, above our analysts forecast capex for the US E&P sector in 2015.

     

     

    While ultimately, the long-run asset value of shale oil reserves bodes well for their ability to attract capital, capital investments are now part of the adjustment process given the collapsed time lag shale has created between when capital is spent and when production rises. With credit and equity access not currently part of the adjustment process, the market has one lever left to balance itself: cash flow through oil prices. This large availability of low-cost external capital therefore exacerbates the need for sustained low prices in our view to keep US producing assets from quickly being redeployed in a lower cost environment.

      Sequential price decline still required

      As a result, while low prices precipitated the market rebalancing, we view the recent rally as premature with crude oil prices expensive relative to current and forecast fundamentals. Ultimately, with evidence at hand that US producers responded aggressively to low prices, the burden of proof has shifted to how they will respond to the recent recovery and whether low-cost producers can sustainably deliver higher production.

       

      This may as a result delay the sequential decline in prices until this fall, especially as we approach a period of seasonally stronger summer demand.

       

      Calling the timing for prices to sequentially decline is challenging in the short run as we approach a period of seasonally stronger summer demand and China SPR fill. Nonetheless, we expect evidence of this fundamental weakness and expected US producer reaction to gradually materialize in the US weekly rig count, hedging flows, weakening refinery margins and monthly OPEC production and rig count growth.

      *  *  *

      Source: Goldman Sachs



    • A Tale Of Two Graphs – Why Bubble Finance Will Fail

      Submitted by David Stockman via Contra Corner blog,

      On Friday the BLS reported, among other things, that full-time employment in April had dropped by 252,000 from the prior month and that the weekly earnings of production workers had risen by the grand sum of 67 cents (0.1%) before inflation and taxes.  But why should still another confirmation that the main street job market is dead in the water stop the robo-traders from another romp higher?

      In fact, this incongruous spectacle of dead wages and soaring financial assets has been going on for several decades now——a transparently obvious trend obfuscated by the unrelenting recency bias of the MSM and the authorized Wall Street/Washington narrative. So let Friday’s incongruous stock market rip serve as a portal into the ugly interior history of how central bank bubble finance has fostered an existential crisis in what remains of American capitalism.

      On the main street side, this isn’t a matter of sluggish recovery from a mysterious financial crisis that arrived, apparently, on a comet from deep space in September 2008. Alas, for three decades running now, the constant dollar weekly wages of full-time workers have been flat as a pancake.

      And let’s be clear. We are not talking here about after school jobs held by quasi-perpetual students, the meager pay of moonlighting moms or the episodic work gigs of society’s tens of million of loosely attached drifters.

      To be sure, the ranks of these marginal job holders have become immense according to the Social Security Administration’s most recent authoritative data—– and it is “authoritative” compared to most of Washington’s statistical mill flotsam because its based on the payroll records of millions of employers who generally do not withhold taxes from ghosts. To wit, there were about 50 million low wage job holders (under $15k/year) who as a group earned an average gross pay of just $6,000 in 2013. So unless there is wholesale violation of the minimum wage laws, upwards of one-third of the US labor force of 155 million is working about 15 hours per week at the lowest lawful pay rate per hour.

      Call that a giant social problem. In truth, however, its not the half of the real crisis. The latter is shown in the graph below, which is for “full-time” workers defined by the BLS as being on the job at least 35 hours per week.

      Thirty years after it was ostensibly “Morning in America”, full-time wage workers have gained only 0.1% per annum in their weekly pay envelope. That’s a rounding error—even if you believe that the BLS’ statistical shenanigans have actually captured cumulative inflation since 1986. In the real world, of course, actual inflation is much higher—-so real wages have self-evidently been sinking for 30 years.

      1986-2015 CAGR……..0.1%

      Nor does this stagnant trend in real wage rates  tell the entire story. The Friday “jobs” report also showed that the share of the prime work age population holding any kind of job—–even a few hours per week “coding” or delivering pizzas—–is now down by fully 10 percentage points from the level it gained after women had fully entered the labor force in the 1990s.

      Employment-16-54-051115 

      Needless to say, even as the main street economy of work and production has been going nowhere, the financial system has erupted skyward. During the last 35 years according to the Fed’s flow-of-funds calculations, the sum of credit market debt outstanding plus the market value of equities has soared from $6 trillion to $95 trillion or by 15X. By contrast, since 1981 the nominal GDP has risen by only 5X.

      This is “financialization” in its full brobdingnagian glory.  A financial sphere which had occupied 212% of GDP in 1981 now weighs in at 537%.  And, no, the starting figure does not represent some temporarily aberrant low bequeathed by the hapless Jimmy Carter; the 1981 ratio was actually the historic norm. During the halcyon times of 1955, for instance, the sum of credit market debt and equity market value actually posted slightly lower at 197% of GDP.

      Total Marketable Securities and GDP - Click to enlarge

      Total Marketable Securities and GDP – Click to enlarge

      So the elephant in the room is the nearly $90 trillion of gain in financial market value during the last 35 years. In a word, it represents a heaping pile of inflation——both the traditional CPI kind and the new style financial inflation inaugurated by the Greenspan Fed, as well.

      Stated in constant 2015 dollars, real GDP was $7.2 trillion in 1981, meaning that it has grown by about 2.5X over the last three and one-half decades to $17.7 trillion at present. All the rest of the 15X gain in financial market value since then is not reflective of capitalism, or human greed or even “deregulation” at work. This is the baleful handiwork of a rogue central bank.

      Total Marketable Securities % of GDP - Click to enlarge

      Total Marketable Securities % of GDP – Click to enlarge

      How did this massive inflation of the financial sphere happen? In a word, financial repression and the doctrine of wealth effects.

      Since the time of Greenspan’s abject panic in the wake of Black Monday in October 1987, the Fed has chronically pegged the money market rate below market clearing levels, thereby fueling an embedded carry trade that has mushroomed relentlessly. And this isn’t just about the record $485 billion of margin debt outstanding or even the several trillions of repo trades that are captured by current reporting systems.

      No, the entire financial system is infected by the endemic carry trades which result from falsification of the money market by the Fed. There are hundreds of trillion of futures, options and OTC “bespoke” contracts outstanding, for example, but they are inherently and systematically mispriced owing to the pegging of money market rates at zero percent for the last 7 years and at a fixed, below-market rate for the past 30 years. The economic evil is as much in the pegging as in the zero bound level because it is the powerhouse peg of the fed that reduces the risk of carrying financial assets with cheap short-term borrowings.

      And the wealth effects doctrine only compounds the deformation. That is, it reduces the price risk of carrying financial assets with high levels of repo or options leverage because of the Fed’s “put” under the market. The latter, of course, is an anomalous artifact of bubble finance which is believed by nearly 100% of the gamblers but denied by virtually all of the money printers.

      But the proof is in the pudding. Downside hedges (i.e. puts on the S&P 500 in their most basic form) are dirt cheap owing to the willingness of market makers to collect nickels on downside insurance, knowing that the Fed is pledged to keep the steamroller of 10-20% market breaks at bay. Indeed, the S&P 500 path shown below could not happen in a free market—–even one with far more healthy fundamentals that the floundering recovery of the past six years.

      In short, in an honest free market gamblers would have to pay more for their carry funding; face much greater uncertainty as to its price and availability; and dissipate for more of their winnings hedging their portfolios than is required under the current central bank driven regime of bubble finance. The contra factual thus presents itself. Namely, would the value of corporate equity have soared from $1.3 trillion to $36.5 trillion or by 28X since 1981 in an honest free market?

      Next, throw into the mix the Fed’s severe interest rate repression in the bond market and you get more financial inflation. When debt is priced drastically below its economic cost and receives a deep tax subsidy to boot, a variation of the supply side theorem manifests itself. Namely, when the cost of servicing debt capital is made artificially low, you get a lot more of it—–from the public and private sectors alike. As to the former, the present day proclivity of politicians to kick-the-fiscal-can is a direct consequence of financial repression.

      With respect to the latter, consider the explosion of corporate bond issuance, which in 1981 amounted to just $550 billion of outstandings or a mere 17% of GDP. Today that figure is $11.6 trillion or 20X larger and amounts to 65% of GDP. Yet, self-evidently, that explosion of new borrowings did not go into the acquisition of productive assets. If it had, real GDP would have grown a lot more rapidly than the 2.7% rate recorded for the 33 years ending in December 2014—-and by the mere 1.1% recorded during the sub-period since Q4 2007.

      Instead, the debt was overwhelmingly used for financial engineering—-or what is ultimately a Ponzi scheme by which new corporate borrowings are used to shrink the outstanding float of stock via LBOs, stock buybacks and cash M&A deals. Consequently, carry trade gamblers are enabled to bid up the shrunken supply of secondary market equities to ever higher levels.

      Not surprisingly, therefore, the US corporate sector’s market capitalization has exploded from $2 trillion in 1981 to $48 trillion at present. That’s right. The nominal value of corporate debt at par plus equity at market has risen by 24X, and most of that gain has occurred since the inauguration of monetary central planning under Greenspan in October 1987.

      Total Corporate Securities and GDP - Click to enlarge

      Total Corporate Securities and GDP – Click to enlarge

      The above graph surely hints at the dangerous instability fostered by bubble finance. And it is not by happenstance that the Greenspan Fed essentially threw in the towel when it authorized so-called “sweep accounts” on bank deposits in the early 1990s—-a maneuver that essentially eliminated reserve requirements on traditional checking account money. Not only does this mean that required reserves in the banking system now amount to a laughably microscopic 0.4% of deposits, but the whole apparatus is irrelevant anyway because banks are now only a minor source of new credit in the bubble finance system.

      What central bank bubble finance has actually unleashed is a self-fueling form of asset-based credit creation. The options, futures and currency markets, for example, are based on what amounts to loans which are collateralized by small fractions (1-10%) of the underlying’s current market value. As valuations rise ever higher, collateral values follow and implicit leverage grows. It is a financial beanstalk.

      At the end of the day, the collateral based finance embedded in the current $95 trillion level of US credit and equity outstanding is far more dangerous than the old fashioned fractional reserve lending of the pre-1990 banking system. At least under the old regime, bank regulators and central bankers like Volcker were steeped in the tradition of safe and sound commercial banking.

      By contrast, the post-Greenspan central bankers have opened a Pandora’s Box of market based hypothecated-finance, and they do not have a clue about the enormous resulting bubble they have unleashed. Nor do they understand that this $95 trillion monster is a voracious rent-seeking vampire squid that makes Goldman Sachs look little a piker. That is, the relentless trading, churning and synthesizing of assets and derivatives within the giant bloated system of finance has almost nothing to do with raising or allocating capital for productive use.

      Instead, this giant $95 trillion pool is where honest savings from the household and business sectors go to be scalped, appropriated and stolen by the hedge funds, dealers, financial engineers and gamblers which populate the casino. And it is the excess girth of it that does the damage, magnifying the rent extraction and dead-weight economic costs by orders of magnitude.

      Stated differently, had the US economy not been “financialized” over the past 35 years and if the historic 200% ratio of credit market debt and corporate equity at market value still prevailed today, the size of the financial system would be $35 trillion, not $95 trillion. On a playing field $60 trillion smaller would there not be far fewer fast money sharks churning, scalping and strip-mining the secondary markets in stocks, bonds, loans and their derivatives?

      But here’s the thing. Maybe 100,000 people “live large” off today’s $95 trillion casino. By contrast, according to the Social Security Administration’s wage records, there were 100 million workers who held any kind of paying job during 2013, who earned a collective total of just $1.65 trillion that year. That amounts to the incredibly small sum of just $16,500 per average worker——and not for a small slice of the labor force but fully two-thirds of all Americans with a job. 

      In short, full-time wage workers have been on a treadmill for decades; average pay for the overwhelming share of jobs celebrated by the talking heads on payroll Friday is pitifully low; and the denizens of the Eccles Building keep their heavy foot on the monetary accelerator as they witlessly inflate a $95 trillion financial bubble—-a true financial vampire squid that they stubbornly deny even exists.

      I have called this a tale of two graphs. But what it really describes is a clear and present danger to American capitalism fostered by an unelected monetary politburo in thrall to its own lust for power and mesmerized by its own doctrinaire group think. The tragedy is that nothing can stop them except the thundering crash of the gargantuan bubble they have single handedly enabled.



    • The Potatoes Of Wrath: Kerry Caption Contest

      John Kerry came, read Putin a long list of grievances that the US has with Russia’s ongoing opposition to everything Obama does around the globe and prevents him from setting a unipolar global agenda, and left, but not before he handed the Russian a basket full of potatoes.

      Perhaps next time ketchup will be more appropriate? Or maybe a carrot?

      Source



    • The Face Of Baltimore You Won't See In The News

      We suspect there will be less rioting and looting after this horrifying clip of a group of Baltimore teens kicking and brutally attacking a Maryland man after he tried to break up a fight

       

       

      Warning: scenes are graphic…

      As WBALTV reports,

      Richard Fletcher was beaten by a gang after asking two girls to stop fighting on his truck in Dundalk, Maryland.

       

      Man, 61, left with horrific injuries and facing $400,000 medical bills after near fatal attack by pack of FIFTY teens, including girls, when he tried to break up a fight

       

      A 17-year-old boy has been charged as an adult for his role in beating a 61-year-old alongside a group of approximately 50 other teens in Baltimore, Maryland, on April 22.

       

      Richard Fletcher was brutally beaten by the teens after he went outside to ask two girls who were fighting on top of his truck to move along and continue their dispute elsewhere.

       

      The mob of teens began to hit and kick Fletcher until he fell to the ground, but the attack didn't end.

       

      After the beating last month, Fletcher was left with broken eye sockets, a broken nose, broken ribs and a brain bleed, according to CBS Baltimore.

       

      He also needed a blood transfusion.

       

      Police have made two arrests in the case and are hoping to bring all of the teens, who are believed to be students at Baltimore Community High School, that participated in the beating to justice.

       

      Antoine Lawson has already been charged with attempted murder and a 15-year-old girl was charged with assault.

      Joe Lamb, who owns a business nearby, saw the attack and said he wasn't all that surprised with what happened based on how the neighborhood has been, WBAL reported.

      He said: 'It has gotten out of hand now, gone too far. 'The kids walk on top of cars, kick dogs, let dogs out, throw trash, steal milk from school and throw it at houses, threaten neighbors with bodily harm.'

      *  *  *



    • NBC Confirms Obama Lied About Bin Laden Raid

      Submitted by Mac Slavo via SHTFPLan.com

      Pulitzer Prize winning investigative journalist Samuel Hersh claimed yesterday that the Obama administration lied to the American people about certain aspects aspects of the 2011 raid that killed Osama Bin Laden. According to Hersh, the United States did not act alone when Navy SEALs were sent to capture or kill the world’s most wanted terrorist. The real story, according to the report, is that members of Pakistani intelligence services were privy to the raid months before it happened and that it was a “walk-in” Pakistani intelligence officer who gave up the location of Bin Laden rather than a CIA operation that tracked him down by following various couriers. Further, it has been claimed that Bin Laden was not buried at sea the way the Obama administration said, but rather, his limbs were simply thrown from the helicopter after the mission (suggesting that some portion of his body, perhaps his head, were retained for posterity’s sake).

      It’s  a markedly different story than the one President Obama told on the night he announced Bin Laden’s death. In that nationally televised speech the President took credit for ordering the raid and made it clear it was a unilateral action involving only American assets.

      The Obama administration has spent the last 24 hours working to discredit the story. Pentagon spokesman Col. Steve Warren said the report from Hersh was “largely a fabrication” with “too many inaccuracies.” The White House says the Hersh’s investigation is riddled with inaccuracies.

      But according to NBC News, which has reportedly been conducting their own investigation for the last several years, Hersh’s claims aren’t that inaccurate after all.

      Two intelligence sources tell NBC News that the year before the U.S. raid that killed Osama bin Laden, a “walk in” asset from Pakistani intelligence told the CIA where the most wanted man in the world was hiding – and these two sources plus a third say that the Pakistani government knew where bin Laden was hiding all along.

       

      The U.S. government has always characterized the heroic raid by Seal Team Six that killed bin Laden as a unilateral U.S. operation, and has maintained that the CIA found him by tracking couriers to his walled complex in Abbottabad, Pakistan.

       

      The new revelations do not necessarily cast doubt on the overall narrative that the White House began circulating within hours of the May 2011 operation. The official story about how bin Laden was found was constructed in a way that protected the identity and existence of the asset, who also knew who inside the Pakistani government was aware of the Pakistani intelligence agency’s operation to hide bin Laden, according to a special operations officer with prior knowledge of the bin Laden mission. The official story focused on a long hunt for bin Laden’s presumed courier, Ahmed al-Kuwaiti.

       

       

      The NBC News sources who confirm that a Pakistani intelligence official became a “walk in” asset include the special operations officer and a CIA officer who had served in Pakistan. These two sources and a third source, a very senior former U.S. intelligence official, also say that elements of the ISI were aware of bin Laden’s presence in Abbottabad. The former official was emphatic about the ISI’s awareness, saying twice, “They knew.”

      Source: NBC News

      Video Report:

       

      The one thing that President Obama could hail as a success during his tenure as President has now been exposed as an outright lie.

      It looks like all those ‘conspiracy nuts’ who took issue with the “official” story following the President’s original announcement of bin Laden’s death were not so crazy after all. There’s a reason millions of Americans have lost trust in their government, and especially with the sitting President of the United States. It’s because we have been consistently lied to about anything and everything of any significance.

      What else are they lying about?

      Fast and Furious gun running? Economic recovery? Official unemployment numbers? Jade Helm military exercises? The Ukraine conflict? Or, what about the deaths of SEAL team members that were supposedly involved with Bin Laden raid?

      Flashback: Representative Joe Wilson breaks State of the Union Decorum when he shouts “You Lie” during President Obama’s speech.

      How right he was…



    Digest powered by RSS Digest